652 Service

8/21/2019 652 Service

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/652-service 1/569

SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service


i

THEORY OF OPERATION TOTAL CONTENTS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1

IMPORTANT NOTICE ................................................................................................S-1

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION .........................S-1

SAFETY WARNINGS .................................................................................................S-2

WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE ........................................................S-18

MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT ....................................................S-21

Composition of the service manual ................................................................................. C-1

Notation of the service manual ....................................................................................... C-2

bizhub 652/552/602/502 Main bodyOUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1

CONFIGURATION/OPERATION ..................................................................................17

DF-618OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1

CONFIGURATION/OPERATION ....................................................................................6

LU-301OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1


LU-204OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1


ZU-606OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1


FS-526OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1


SD-508OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1


8/21/2019 652 Service


ii

PK-516OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1

CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................... 5

JS-602

OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................... 3

PI-505OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1


FS-527OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1


PK-517OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1


SD-509OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1


JS-603OUTLINE ........................................................................................................................ 1


AU-101/AU-102/AU-201/OT-503AU-101/AU-102............................................................................................................... 1

AU-201............................................................................................................................ 2

OT-503 ............................................................................................................................ 3

EK-604/605/SC-507EK-604............................................................................................................................ 1

EK-605............................................................................................................................ 2

SC-507 ........................................................................................................................... 4

SA-502CONFIGURATION/OPERATION .................................................................................... 1

8/21/2019 652 Service


SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

S-1

Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them

before doing service work.

Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as

the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

(hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by

KMBT-trained service technicians.

Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service

Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that

the information contained in this service manual is complete and accurate.

The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to

the product while servicing the product for which this service manual is intended.

Therefore, this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in thecourse of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of

the product properly.

Keep this service manual also for future service.

In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and

“ CAUTION” is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited

meaning.When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,

repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:


IMPORTANT NOTICE

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER,WARNING AND CAUTION

DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury

WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury

CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, mediumtrouble, and property damage

:Precaution when servicing the

product. General

precaution

Electric hazard High temperature

:Prohibition when servicing the

product. General

prohibition

Do not touch

with wet hand

Do not

disassemble

:Direction when servicing theproduct. General

instruction

Unplug Ground/Earth

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-2

[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTABUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.

KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability isachieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.

Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,

physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving

at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve

a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore

strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reason-

ing behind this policy.

SAFETY WARNINGS

Prohibited Actions

DANGER• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.

• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT.

Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and

injury.

• Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with

wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.

• Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between

relay contacts).

• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.).Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and

injury.

• Making any modification to the product unless instructed

by KMBT.

• Using parts not specified by KMBT.

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-3

[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet

used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE)

to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the

supply.

Power Cord Set or Power PlugWARNING

• Use power supply cord set which meets the following

criteria:

- provided with a plug having configuration intended for

the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the prod-

uct’s rated voltage and current, and

- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and

- provided with three-conductor cable having enough cur-

rent capacity, and

- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area.

Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock.

• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:

- having configuration intended for the connection to wall

outlet appropriate for the product’s rated voltage and

current, and

- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and- meets regulatory requirements for the area.

Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connect-

ing to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,

grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.

• Conductors in the power cable must be connected to ter-

minals of the plug according to the following order:

•Black or Brown:L (line)

•White or Light Blue:N (neutral)

•Green/Yellow:PE (earth)

Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the

product, and results in fire or electric shock.

kw

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-4

[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all

applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engi-

neer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical

equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety

and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.

1. Power Supply

Connection to Power Supply

WARNING

• Check that mains voltage is as specified.

Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or

electric shock.

• Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same

configuration as the plug.

Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to

inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity,

grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock.

If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer

to contact qualified electrician for the installation.

• Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a

capacity greater than the maximum power consumption.If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may

result.

• If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall

outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall

outlet.

If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may

result.

• Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outletsecurely.

Contact problems may lead to increased resistance,

overheating, and the risk of fire.

• Check whether the product is grounded properly.

If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you

may suffer electric shock while operating the product.

Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.

kw

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-5

Power Plug and Cord

WARNING

• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with

this product, make sure the connector is securely insertedin the inlet of the product.

When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with

the fixture properly.

If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the prod-

uct securely, a contact problem may lead to increased

resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or

pinched by a table and so on.

Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check

whether the sheath is damaged.

If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace

with a new power cord (with plug and connector on each

end) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged power cord

may result in fire or electric shock.

• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.

Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug

and wall outlet.

Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing

dust may result in fire.

• Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet

hand.

The risk of electric shock exists.

• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the

cable.

The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and

electric shock.

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-6

2. Installation Requirements

Wiring

WARNING

• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords

in the same outlet.If used, the risk of fire exists.

• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one.

Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so

using a too long extension cord may result in fire.

Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken

up. Fire may result.

Prohibited Installation Places

WARNING

• Do not place the product near flammable materials or vola-

tile materials that may catch fire.

A risk of fire exists.

• Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such

as rain.

A risk of fire and electric shock exists.

When not Using the Product for a long time

WARNING

• When the product is not used over an extended period oftime (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power

cord.

Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may

cause fire.

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-7

Ventilation

CAUTION

• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it

will not be harmful to the human body.If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases,

ventilate the room.

a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room

b. When taking a lot of copies

c. When using multiple products at the same time

Stability

CAUTION• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.

In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may

slide, leading to a injury.

Inspection before Servicing

CAUTION

• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant docu-mentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and

proceed with the inspection following the prescribed pro-

cedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools.

Do not make any adjustment not described in the docu-

mentation.

If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the prod-

uct may break and a risk of injury or fire exists.

• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnectthe power plugs from the product and options.

When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some

units are still powered even if the POWER switch is

turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists.

• The area around the fixing unit is hot.

You may get burnt.

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-8

• Do not leave the machine unattended during transporta-

tion, installation, and inspection of the machine. If it is to

be unavoidably left unattended, face protrusions toward

the wall or take other necessary risk reducing action.

The user may stumble over a protrusion of the machine

or be caught by a cable, falling to the floor or being

injured.

Work Performed with the Product Powered On

WARNING• Take every care when making adjustments or performing

an operation check with the product powered.

If you make adjustments or perform an operation check

with the external cover detached, you may touch live or

high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears

or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.

• Take every care when servicing with the external cover

detached.

High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of elec-

tric shock exists.

• If it is absolutely necessary to service the machine with

the door open or external covers removed, always be

attentive to the motion of the internal parts.

A normally protected part may cause unexpected haz-

ards.

Safety Checkpoints

WARNING

• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other

damage.

The user or CE may be injured.

• Whenever mounting an option on the machine, be atten-

tive to the motion of the fellow worker of the joint work.

The fellow worker may be injured with his or her finger or

hand pinched between the machine and the option.

Inspection before Servicing

CAUTION

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-9

• When mounting an option on the machine, be careful

about the clearance between the machine and the option.

You may be injured with your finger or hand pinched

between the machine and the option.

• When removing a part that secures a motor, gear, or other

moving part, disassembling a unit, or reinstalling any of

such parts and units, be careful about moving parts and

use care not to drop any part or unit. During the service

procedure, give sufficient support for any heavy unit.

You may be injured by a falling part or unit.

• Check the external covers and frame for possible sharp

edges, burrs, and damage.

They can be a cause of injury during use or servicing.

• When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow spot, be careful

about sharp edges and burrs of the frame and parts.

They may injure your hands or fingers.

• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and

screws to fall into the product.

They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock

or fire.

• Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or

fire.

• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electri-

cal parts and electrode units such as a charging corona

unit.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or

fire.

• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or

fire.

• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for

deterioration and sign of leakage.Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire.

Safety Checkpoints

WARNING

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-10

• Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit)

incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has

been disconnected.

The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of

loss of eyesight.

• Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply

power with the write unit shifted from the specified mount-

ing position.

The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of

loss of eyesight.

• When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lith-

ium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose

of the used lithium battery using the method specified by

local authority.

Improper replacement can cause explosion.

• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g.,

optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installa-

tion state.


• Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and

check whether the interlock functions properly.

If the interlock does not function, you may receive an

electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in

the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam).

• Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp

edges, burrs, or other pointed parts.

Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock orfire.

• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connec-

tors, etc. that were removed for safety check and mainte-

nance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay

special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables,

forgotten screws, etc.)

A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.

Safety Checkpoints

WARNING

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-11

Handling of Consumables

WARNING

• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care

must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let thesubstances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be

stimulative.

If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water

immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a

physician.

• Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire.

You may be burned due to dust explosion.

Handling of Service Materials

CAUTION

• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet.

Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (ace-

tone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled

with care. A risk of fire exists.

• Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before

any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully

evaporated.


• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take

care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately

wipe it off.


• When using any solvent, ventilate the room well.

Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to

discomfort.

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-12

[4] Used Batteries Precautions

ALL Areas

CAUTION

Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.

Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.

Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

Germany

VORSICHT!

Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.

Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.

Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.

France

ATTENTION

Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.

Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recom-

mandé par le constructeur.Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.

Denmark

ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.

Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.

Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.

Finland, Sweden

VAROlTUSParisto voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.

Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.

Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.

Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparat-

tillverkaren.

Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.

NorwayADVARSEL

Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.

Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.

Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-13

[5] Laser Safety

• This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product. There is no possibility of

danger from a laser, provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this

manual.

5.1 Internal Laser Radiation

*at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit

• This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The

laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit.• The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICEABLE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit

should not be opened under any circumstances.

semiconductor laser

Maximum power of the laser diode 30 mW

Maximum average radiation power (*)bizhub 652/602 13.8 µW

bizhub 552/502 11.8 µW

Wavelength 775-800 nm

A2WUP0C001DA

Laser Aperture of the Print Head

Unit

Print Head Unit

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-14

U.S.A., Canada(CDRH Regulation)• This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Stan-

dard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory

for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for

Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of

the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device

does not produce hazardous laser radiation.

• The label shown on page S-16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and

must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States..

All Areas

Denmark

CAUTION Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those

specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

semiconductor laser



CAUTION• Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those

specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

semiconductor laser



ADVARSEL• Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion.

Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825-1sikkerheds kravene.

halvlederlaser

Laserdiodens højeste styrke 30 mW

bølgelængden 775-800 nm

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-15

Finland, Sweden

Norway

LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITEKLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

VAROITUS!

• Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saat-taa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle laser-säteilylle.

puolijohdelaser

Laserdiodin suurin teho 30 mW

aallonpituus 775-800 nm

VARNING!

• Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats,kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen förlaserklass 1.

halvledarlaser

Den maximala effekten för laserdioden 30 mW

våglängden 775-800 nm

VARO!• Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättomälle laser-

säteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen.

VARNING!• Osynlig laserstråining när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad.

Betrakta ej stråien.

ADVERSEL• Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisn-

ing, kan brukeren utsettes för unsynlig laserstrålning, som overskrider grensenfor laser klass 1.

halvleder laser

Maksimal effekt till laserdiode 30 mW

bølgelengde 775-800 nm

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-16

5.2 Laser Safety Label

• A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below.

5.3 Laser Caution Label

• A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.

A2WUP0E007DA

* Only for the U.S.A.

A2WUP0C002DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-17

5.4 PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT

• When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the

above specifications.

• When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when

working around the printerhead and PC drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF.

• If the job requires that the printer be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser

protective goggles.• A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use

utmost care when handling tools on the user’s premises.

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-18

Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.

When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should

be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.

WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

A2WUP0E004DA

The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot.Touching any part other than thoseindicated may result in burns.

CAUTIONDo not burn used toner cartridges.Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous.

WARNING

Do not burn the used waste tonerbox. Toner expelld from the fire is dangerous.

WARNING

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-19

A0P0P0E509DA

This area generates high voltage.Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned

ON to avoid getting an electric shock.

High voltage

This area generates high voltage.

Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned

ON to avoid getting an electric shock.

High voltage

8/21/2019 652 Service



S-20

CAUTION:

This area generates high voltage.Be careful not to touch here when the power is turnedON to avoid getting an electric shock.

High voltage

This area generates high voltage.Be careful not to touch here when the power is turnedON to avoid getting an electric shock.

High voltage

A2WUP0E005DA

• You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not totouch by any caution label. Do not remove caution labels. If any caution label has

come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read, contact our serviceoffice.

8/21/2019 652 Service


MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

S-21

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately

take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further

damage.2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evalua-

tion must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.

3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded

through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.

4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations speci-

fied by every distributor.

MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF ANACCIDENT

8/21/2019 652 Service


MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

S-22

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service


C-1

Composition of the service manualThis service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to

explain the main machine and its corresponding options.

Theory of Operation section gives, as information for the CE to get a full understanding of

the product, a rough outline of the object and role of each function, the relationshipbetween the electrical system and the mechanical system, and the timing of operation of

each part.

Field Service section gives, as information required by the CE at the site (or at the cus-

tomer’s premise), a rough outline of the service schedule and its details, maintenance

steps, the object and role of each adjustment, error codes and supplementary information.

The basic configuration of each section is as follows. However some options may not be

applied to the following configuration.

<Theory of Operation section>

<Field Service section>

OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration,

product specifications, unit configuration, and paper path

CONFIGURATION/

OPERATION:

Explanation of configuration of each unit,

operating system, and control system

OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration, and product

specifications

MAINTENANCE: Explanation of service schedule, maintenance steps, ser-

vice tools, removal/reinstallation methods of major parts,

and firmware version up method etc.

ADJUSTMENT/SETTING: Explanation of utility mode, service mode, and mechanical

adjustment etc.

TROUBLESHOOTING: Explanation of lists of jam codes and error codes, and

their countermeasures etc.

APPENDIX: Parts layout drawings, connector layout drawings, timing

chart, overall layout drawing are attached.

8/21/2019 652 Service


C-2

Notation of the service manualA. Product nameIn this manual, each of the products is described as follows:

NOTE• bizhub 602/502 described in this manual is available only as Taiwan model.

B. Brand nameThe company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or

the registered trademark of each company.

C. Feeding direction• When the long side of the paper is parallel with the feeding direction, it is called short

edge feeding. The feeding direction which is perpendicular to the short edge feeding is

called the long edge feeding.

• Short edge feeding will be identified with [S (abbreviation for Short edge feeding)] on the

paper size. No specific notation is added for the long edge feeding.

When the size has only the short edge feeding with no long edge feeding, [S] will not be

added to the paper size.

<Sample notation>

(1) bizhub 652/552/602/502: Main body

(2) Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP

Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Vista

Microsoft Windows 7: Windows 7

Microsoft Windows Server 2003: Windows Server 2003

Microsoft Windows Server 2008: Windows Server 2008

When the description is made in combination of the OS’s mentioned above:

Windows 7/Vista/Server 2008/XP/

Server 2003

Windows 7/Vista/XP

Windows Server 2008/Server 2003

Paper size Feeding direction Notation

A4Long edge feeding A4

Short edge feeding A4S

A3 Short edge feeding A3

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

652/552/602/502

8/21/2019 652 Service


Revision historyAfter publication of this service manual, the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for

improvement of their performance.

Therefore, the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine.

When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual, a revised version will be

issued with a revision mark added as required.

Revision mark:

• To indicate clearly a section revised, is shown at the left margin of the revised section.

The number inside represents the number of times the revision has been made.

• To indicate clearly a page that contains the revision, is shown near the page number of the

corresponding page.


NOTERevision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.

• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. 3.0:

The revision marks for Ver. 3.0 only are shown with those for Ver. 2.0 deleted.

• When a page revised in Ver. 2.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3.0:

The revision marks for Ver. 2.0 are left as they are.

1

1

1

1

2010/12 1.0 — Issue of the first edition

Date Service manual Ver. Revision mark Descriptions of revision

8/21/2019 652 Service


b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2

O U T L I N E

C O N F I G U R A T I O N /

O P E R A T I O N

Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

i

CONTENTS

bizhub 652/552/602/502 Main body

OUTLINE1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION...................................................................................1

1.1 bizhub 652/552/602/502....................................................................................... 1

2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 3

2.1 Type ...................................................................................................................... 3

2.2 Functions ..............................................................................................................4

2.3 Paper .................................................................................................................... 6

2.4 Materials ...............................................................................................................7

2.5 Print volume..........................................................................................................7

2.6 Machine specifications..........................................................................................8

2.7 Operating environment ......................................................................................... 8

2.8 Print functions....................................................................................................... 9

2.9 Scan functions .................................................................................................... 12

3. SECTION CONFIGURATION................................................................................ 14

4. PAPER PATH......................................................................................................... 15

4.1 bizhub 652/552/602/502.....................................................................................15

CONFIGURATION/OPERATION5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 17

5.1 Control block diagram......................................................................................... 17

5.2 Image creation process ...................................................................................... 18

5.3 Image forming control ......................................................................................... 20

5.4 Process speed....................................................................................................20

6. INTERFACE SECTION ......................................................................................... 21

6.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 21

6.1.1 Front side ................................................................................................... 21

6.1.2 Rear side..................................................................................................... 22

6.1.3 Right side .................................................................................................... 24

7. SCANNER SECTION............................................................................................ 29

7.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 29

7.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 30

7.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 31

7.3.1 When the power is ON................................................................................ 31

7.3.2 Control when the Start key is pressed ........................................................ 32

7.3.3 DF original glass cleaning control ............................................................... 35

8/21/2019 652 Service


bizhub652/552/602/502

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

7.3.4 Original scanning area................................................................................ 37

7.3.5 Original size detection control..................................................................... 38

7.3.6 Image processing ....................................................................................... 40

8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION) ........................................................................ 41

8.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 41

8.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 428.2.1 Outline ........................................................................................................ 42

8.2.2 Laser exposure process.............................................................................. 44

8.2.3 Laser emission timing................................................................................. 46

8.2.4 Laser emission stop.................................................................................... 47

8.2.5 Laser emission area ................................................................................... 47

8.2.6 Image processing ....................................................................................... 48

9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION.................................................................................. 49

9.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 49

9.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 50

9.2.1 Toner cartridge drive................................................................................... 50

9.2.2 Toner hopper drive...................................................................................... 50

9.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 51

9.3.1 Replenishing the toner hopper with toner................................................... 51

9.3.2 Replenishing the developing unit with toner ............................................... 53

9.3.3 Toner cartridge life control .......................................................................... 55

9.3.4 Toner cartridge detection............................................................................ 57

9.3.5 Toner spill prevention shutter ...................................................................... 58

10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION .................................................................................... 59

10.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 59

10.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 60

10.2.1 Drum unit drive ........................................................................................... 60

10.2.2 Developing unit drive .................................................................................. 61

10.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 6210.3.1 Outline ........................................................................................................ 62

10.3.2 Imaging unit detection................................................................................. 62

11. DRUM UNIT SECTION......................................................................................... 63

11.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 63

11.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 64

11.2.1 Photo conductor drive................................................................................. 64

11.2.2 Charge corona cleaner drive ...................................................................... 65

11.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 66

11.3.1 Photo conductor drive gear......................................................................... 66

8/21/2019 652 Service


b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


iii

11.3.2 Main erase lamp control.............................................................................. 68

11.3.3 Photo conductor cleaning ........................................................................... 69

11.3.4 Photo conductor charge control ..................................................................69

11.3.5 Charge corona cleaning control .................................................................. 70

11.3.6 Ozone removal............................................................................................ 72

11.3.7 Detection of drum unit/K ............................................................................. 73

12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION ............................................................................ 75

12.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 75

12.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 76

12.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 77

12.3.1 Developer flow............................................................................................. 77

12.3.2 Auto refining developing system ................................................................. 79

12.3.3 Developing bias........................................................................................... 80

12.3.4 Toner density control................................................................................... 81

12.3.5 Detection of developing unit/K .................................................................... 82

12.3.6 Toner scattering prevention.........................................................................83

12.3.7 Image stabilization control ..........................................................................83

13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION .................................................................................... 84

13.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 84

13.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 86

13.2.1 Transfer belt drive........................................................................................ 86

13.2.2 Transfer belt cleaning section drive.............................................................87

13.2.3 1st transfer roller drive ................................................................................ 88

13.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 89

13.3.1 1st transfer roller control .............................................................................89

13.3.2 Transfer belt cleaning ..................................................................................91

13.3.3 Image stabilization control ..........................................................................92

14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION................................................................................... 93

14.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 9314.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 95

14.2.1 Pressure/retraction drive .............................................................................95

14.2.2 2nd transfer roller drive ............................................................................... 95

14.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 96

14.3.1 2nd transfer roller control ............................................................................96

14.3.2 2nd transfer control ..................................................................................... 97

14.3.3 2nd transfer roller cleaning.......................................................................... 98

14.3.4 Paper separation control .............................................................................99

14.3.5 Sensor protection......................................................................................100

8/21/2019 652 Service


bizhub652/552/602/502

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


iv

15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION....................................................................... 101

15.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 101

15.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 103

15.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 104

15.3.1 Waste toner collecting path to the waste toner box .................................. 104

15.3.2 Toner path in the waste toner box............................................................. 10815.3.3 Waste toner box set detection .................................................................. 111

15.3.4 Waste toner box full detection................................................................... 112

16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)......................................................... 114

16.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 114

16.1.1 Major components .................................................................................... 114

16.1.2 Layout of sensors and rollers.................................................................... 115

16.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 116

16.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 117

16.3.1 Up/down control........................................................................................ 117

16.3.2 Paper feed control..................................................................................... 119

16.3.3 Paper size detection control...................................................................... 126

16.3.4 Remaining paper detection control ........................................................... 128

16.3.5 Paper temperature detection control......................................................... 129

17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)......................................................... 130

17.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 130

17.1.1 Major components (tray3)......................................................................... 130

17.1.2 Major components (tray3 horizontal transport section)............................. 131

17.1.3 Major components (tray4)......................................................................... 132

17.1.4 Layout of sensors and rollers.................................................................... 133

17.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 134

17.2.1 Tray3 ......................................................................................................... 134

17.2.2 Tray3 horizontal transport ......................................................................... 134

17.2.3 Tray4 ......................................................................................................... 13517.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 136

17.3.1 Up/down control........................................................................................ 136

17.3.2 Paper Feed control ................................................................................... 139

17.3.3 Paper size detection control...................................................................... 145

17.3.4 Remaining paper detection control ........................................................... 146

17.3.5 Dehumidification heater control ................................................................ 149

17.3.6 Detection of tray3/4 slid out/in................................................................... 150

17.3.7 Detection of horizontal transport unit slid out/in........................................ 151

18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY) ......................................................... 152

8/21/2019 652 Service


b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


v

18.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 152

18.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 153

18.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 154

18.3.1 Bypass paper lifting motion control ...........................................................154

18.3.2 paper feed control ..................................................................................... 155

18.3.3 Paper size detection control...................................................................... 15718.3.4 Remaining paper detection control ........................................................... 160

18.3.5 Detection of bypass unit opened/closed ................................................... 161

18.3.6 Detection of bypass sub tray extended/retracted ...................................... 162

19. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION................................................................... 163

19.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 163

19.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 164

19.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 165

19.3.1 Vertical transport control ........................................................................... 165

19.3.2 Transport motor control ............................................................................. 165

19.3.3 Operation timing........................................................................................ 165

20. REGISTRATION SECTION................................................................................. 167

20.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 167

20.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 167

20.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 168

20.3.1 Registration control ................................................................................... 168

20.3.2 OHP detection...........................................................................................170

20.3.3 Paper transport speed control................................................................... 171

21. FUSING SECTION.............................................................................................. 172

21.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 172

21.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 174

21.2.1 Heating roller drive .................................................................................... 174

21.2.2 Fusing pressure roller pressure drive........................................................ 174

21.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 175

21.3.1 Fusing speed correction............................................................................ 175

21.3.2 Fusing pressure/retraction control.............................................................178

21.3.3 Heating roller heating control .................................................................... 179

21.3.4 Heating control of the fusing pressure roller ............................................. 184

21.3.5 Fusing temperature control ....................................................................... 185

21.3.6 Heating roller temperature sensor............................................................. 190

21.3.7 Heating roller temperature sensor condensation detection....................... 191

21.3.8 Heating roller alternative temperature control ........................................... 192

21.3.9 Heating roller temperature sensor contamination detection control.......... 192

8/21/2019 652 Service


bizhub652/552/602/502

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


vi

21.3.10 Protection against abnormal temperature................................................. 193

21.3.11 Sensor disconnection detection control .................................................... 194

21.3.12 Brandnew detection .................................................................................. 195

21.3.13 Fusing cooling control............................................................................... 195

22. DUPLEX SECTION............................................................................................. 198

22.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 198

22.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 199

22.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 200

22.3.1 Paper conveyance control......................................................................... 200

22.3.2 Duplex circulation control.......................................................................... 202

23. PAPER EXIT SECTION ...................................................................................... 208

23.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 208

23.2 Drive ................................................................................................................. 209

23.3 Operation.......................................................................................................... 210

23.3.1 Transport control....................................................................................... 210

24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL ................................................................... 213

24.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 213

24.1.1 Image stabilization control chart ............................................................... 214

24.1.2 Overview of each control .......................................................................... 215

24.2 Image stabilization control operation sequence ............................................... 217

24.3 Image stabilization control operating condition ................................................ 218

24.3.1 In standby state ........................................................................................ 218

24.3.2 Before, during, and after a print cycle....................................................... 219

24.4 Utility/Service Mode.......................................................................................... 220

24.4.1 Expert Adjustment .................................................................................... 220

24.4.2 Service Mode............................................................................................ 220

24.5 Image stabilization control operating time ........................................................ 221

25. IMAGE PROCESSING........................................................................................ 222

25.1 Scanner section image processing block diagram ........................................... 222

25.2 Write section image processing block diagram ................................................ 223

26. POWER SUPPLY SECTION............................................................................... 226

26.1 Parts energized when the main power switch is turned ON............................. 226

26.1.1 Configuration ............................................................................................ 226

26.1.2 Operation.................................................................................................. 226

26.1.3 Auto power OFF system ........................................................................... 227

26.2 Parts energized when the sub power switch is turned ON............................... 228

26.2.1 Configuration ............................................................................................ 22826.2.2 Operation.................................................................................................. 228

26.3 Power cables .................................................................................................... 229

8/21/2019 652 Service


b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


vii

26.3.1 Configuration.............................................................................................229

26.3.2 Operation ..................................................................................................229

27. FAN CONTROL................................................................................................... 230

27.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 230

27.2 Operation.......................................................................................................... 231

27.2.1 Function .................................................................................................... 23127.2.2 Control conditions ..................................................................................... 232

28. COUNTER CONTROL........................................................................................235

28.1 Configuration .................................................................................................... 235

28.2 Operation.......................................................................................................... 235

8/21/2019 652 Service


bizhub652/552/602/502

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


viii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

1

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2

O U T L I N E

OUTLINE

1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

1.1 bizhub 652/552/602/502

1/2 System front view

*1: This option may not be available depending on the sales area.

*2: Except for the North America and Europe area.

[1] bizhub 652/552/602/502 [12] Finisher FS-527

[2] Authentication unit: Biometric type AU-101 [13] Saddle stitcher SD-509

[3] Authentication unit: Biometric type AU-102 [14] Job separator JS-603

[4] Authentication unit: IC card type AU-201 [15] Punch kit PK-517

[5] Working table WT-506 [16] Z folding unit ZU-606

[6] Keyboard holder KH-101 [17] Saddle stitcher SD-508

[7] Local interface kit EK-604 [18] Finisher FS-526

[8] Local interface kit EK-605 *1 [19] Punch kit PK-516

[9] Mount kit MK-715 *2 [20] Post inserter PI-505

[10] Large capacity unit LU-301 [21] Job separator JS-602

[11] Large capacity unit LU-204 [22] Output tray OT-503

[1]

[2]

[5]

[7][8]

[6]

[10]

[11]

[22]

A0P0F1E503DC

[18]

[17]

[3] [4]

[9]

[19] [20] [21]

[16]

[15] [14]

[12][13]

8/21/2019 652 Service


1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

2

bizhub652/552/602/502

O U T L I N E

2/2 System rear view

*1: North America and Europe only*2: Europe only.

*3: The LK-103 v2 is not available for North America area.

NOTE• To install the Scan accelerator kit (SA-502) or the Fax kit (FK-502), installing the

Mount kit (MK-720) is necessary.• As the Scan accelerator kit (SA-502) and the FAX kit (FK-502) line 2 required for the

second fax line need to be installed at the same place, only one of them can beinstalled.

[1] bizhub 652/552/602/502 [7] Mount kit MK-720

[2] Stamp unit SP-501 [8] Key counter kit KIT-1

[3] Fax kit FK-502 [9] Key counter kit KIT-CF *2

[4] Heater HT-508 *1 [10] i-Option LK-101 v2/102/103 v2 *3

/105

[5] Scan accelerator kit SA-502 [11] Upgrade kit UK-203

[6] Security kit SC-507

[2]

[1]

[3]

[4]

[8]

[9]

[10] [11]

[6]

[7]

[5]

A2WUT1E004DA

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

3

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2

O U T L I N E

2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 Type

Type Combination scanner and printer console type

Copying system Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper

Printing process Laser electrostatic printing systemPC drum type OPC drum: KM-12 (OPC with high mold releasability)

Scanning density Main scan direction: 600 dpi, Sub scan direction: 600 dpi

Exposure lamp White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W

Platen Stationary (mirror scan)

Original scanningMirror scanning CCD optical system

* Sheet through system when ADF is used

Registration Rear left edge

Paper feedingseparation system

Manual bypass : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism

Tray 1 : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism




Exposure system 1 polygon 2 beam exposure and polygon mirror scan system

Exposure densityEquivalent to 1800 dpi in main scanning direction ×

600 dpi in sub scanning direction

Developing system Dry 2 components developing method, HMT developing system

Charging system DC comb electrode scorotron system with electrode cleaning function

Neutralizing system Red LED system

Image transfer system Belt image transfer system (1st)/roller image transfer system (2nd)Paper separating

system

Combination of curvature, separating claws, and bias system

Fusing system Belt IH fusing system

Heating system Heating: IH heating, Soaking: Halogen lamp

8/21/2019 652 Service


2. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

4

bizhub652/552/602/502

O U T L I N E

2.2 Functions

Types of original Sheets, books, and three-dimensional objects

Max. original size A3 or 11 x 17

Max. original weight 2 kg

Multiple copies 1 to 9999

Warm-up time

(at ambient tempera-

ture of 23° C/73.4° F

and rated source volt-

age)

When the sub power switch is turned ON at any timing while the main power

switch remains ON for a predetermined period of time or more

(room temperature is 23° C/73.4° F)

bizhub 652 30 sec. or less


bizhub 602

(Taiwan only)

90 sec. or less

bizhub 502

(Taiwan only)

60 sec. or less

When the main power switch is turned ON during the sub power switch being

ON (room temperature is 23° C/73.4° F)



bizhub 602

(Taiwan only)

90 sec. or less

bizhub 502

(Taiwan only)

60 sec. or less

Image loss Leading edge: 4.2 mm (3/16 inch),

Trailing edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch),

Rear edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch),

Front edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch)

First copy time (Tray1/2 A4 or 8 1 / 2 x 11, full size)

bizhub 652 3.8 sec. or less

bizhub 552 4.3 sec. or less

bizhub 602

(Taiwan only)

4.0 sec. or less

bizhub 502

(Taiwan only)

4.3 sec. or less

Processing speed Plain paper bizhub 652: 310.00 mm/s

bizhub 552: 264.00 mm/s

bizhub 602: 288.00 mm/s (Taiwan only)


Thick 1, Thick 1+ bizhub 652: 155.00 mm/s

bizhub 552: 132.00 mm/s



Thick 2, Thick 3,

Thick 4, OHP, Post

card, Envelope, Labelsheet, glossy mode

bizhub 652/552/602/502: 120.00 mm/s

8/21/2019 652 Service



5

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2

O U T L I N E

Copying speed for

multi-copy cycle

(A4 or 8 1 / 2 x 11, plain

paper, tray 1)

bizhub 652 1-sided: 65 copies/min, 2-sided: 65 copies/min

(8 1 / 2 x 11: 64 copies/min)

bizhub 552 1-sided: 55 copies/min, 2-sided: 55 copies/min

bizhub 602

(Taiwan only)

1-sided: 60 copies/min, 2-sided: 60 copies/min

bizhub 502

(Taiwan only)

1-sided: 50 copies/min, 2-sided: 50 copies/min

Fixed zoom ratios Full size x1.000

Reduction Metric area x0.500, x0.707, x0.816, x0.866

Inch area x0.500, x0.647, x0.733, x0.785

Enlargement Metric area x1.154, x1.224, x1.414, x2.000

Inch area x1.214, x1.294, x1.545, x2.000

Zoom ratios memory 3 memories

Variable zoom ratios x0.250 to x4.000 in 0.001 increments

Paper size Tray 1/Tray 2 Metric area A3 Wide, A3 to A5S, A6S, post card

Inch area 11 x 17 to 8 1 / 2 x 11, 8 x 13 *1, 16K, 8K,12 1 / 4 x 18

Tray 3/Tray 4 A4, B5, A5, 8 1 / 2 x 11, 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2, 16K, postcard

Bypass tray

Metric area

A3 wide, A3 to B6S, A6S, postcard,

long size paper (210 mm to 297 mm x

457.3 mm to 1,200 mm)

Inch area

11 x 17 to 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2, 8 x 13 *1, 16K, 8K,

12 1 / 4 x 18, long size paper (8 1 / 4 to 1111 / 16 x 18 to 47 1 / 4)

Copy exit tray capacity

(When OT-503 ismounted)

Plain paper 250 sheets

Thick paper 10 sheets

OHP transparencies 1 sheet

External memoryfunction

Supported external

memory devices

USB flash memory device that supports the USB (2.0)

interface

FAT32-formatted memory device

8/21/2019 652 Service



6

bizhub652/552/602/502

O U T L I N E

2.3 Paper

*1: Excluding damp paper, curled paper, and recycled paper.

*2: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3/4 is used.

*3: 127 to 210 g/m2 / 33.75 to 55.75 lb

Automatic duplex unit : Only the plain paper weighing 60 to 90 g/m2

(16 to 24 lb) orthick paper weighing 91 to 256 g/m2 (24.25 to 68 lb) are

reliably fed.

TypePaper source (maximum tray capacity)

Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Bypass tray

P a p e r

t y p e

Plain paper

(60 to 90 g/m2 / 16

to 24 lb)

❍

(500 sheets)

❍

(500 sheets)

❍

(1500 sheets)

❍

(1000 sheets)

❍

(150 sheets)

Translucent paper – – – – –

OHP film – – – – ❍

(20 sheets)

Thick paper 1 *1

(91 to 120 g/m2

/ 24.25 to 32 lb)

❍

(400 sheets)

❍

(400 sheets)

❍

(1150 sheets)

❍

(750 sheets)

❍

(100 sheets)

Thick paper 1+ *1

(121 to 157 g/m2

/ 32 to 41.75 lb)

❍

(280 sheets)

❍

(280 sheets)

❍

(800 sheets)

❍

(500 sheets)

❍

(80 sheets)

Thick paper 2 *1

(158 to 209 g/m2 / 42 to 55.5 lb)

❍ (250 sheets)

❍ (250 sheets)

❍ (700 sheets)

❍ (450 sheets)

❍ (70 sheets)

Thick paper 3 *1,2

(210 to 256 g/m2

/ 55.75 to 68 lb)

❍

(200 sheets)

❍

(200 sheets)

❍

(600 sheets)

❍

(400 sheets)

❍

(60 sheets)

Thick paper 4 *1,2

(257 to 300 g/m2

/ 68.25 to 80 lb)

– – – – ❍

(50 sheets)

Postcards – – ❍

(200 sheets)

❍

(200 sheets)

❍

(50 sheets)

Envelopes – – – – ❍

(10 sheets)Labels – – – – ❍ (50 sheets)

Long size paper – – – – ❍ (1 sheet)

C o p y p a p e r d i m e n s i o n s

Width139.7 to 311.1 mm

5 1 / 2 to 12 1 / 2 inch

A4, B5, A5, 8 1 / 2 x 11,

5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2, 16K, postcard

90 to 311.1 mm

3 1 / 2 to 12 1 / 4 inch

Length182.0 to 457.2 mm

7 1 / 4 to 18 inch

139.7 to 457.2

mm

5 1 / 2 to 18 inch

L o n g s i z e p a p e r * 3

Width – – – –210 to 297 mm

8 1 / 4 to 11 3 / 4 inch

Length – – – –457 to 1200 mm

18 to 47 1 / 4 inch

8/21/2019 652 Service



7

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2

O U T L I N E

2.4 Materials

*1: Field standard yield• This machine has the field standard yield which indicates the available print numbers

estimated by the quantities and usage of the unit in the market standard job mode.

Yields for each preventative maintenance unit will differ depending on actual usage.

• The market standard job modes for this unit are as follows.

2.5 Print volume

• bizhub 652

• bizhub 552

Parts name Field standard yield *1 Type name

Toner cartridge 37,500 prints TN618

Developing unit 1,140,000 prints DV612K

Drum unit 285000 prints DR612K

Waste toner box 160,000 prints WX-102

Market standard job modes

bizhub 652 bizhub 552 bizhub 602 bizhub 502

Printing 7 P/J 6 P/J 6 P/J 5 P/JPaper size A4: 93 %, A4S: 7 %

Total print volume/month US: 19,500

EU: 25,600

US: 13,500

EU: 17,200- -

No. of

image

stabilization

operations

No. of times power

turned on20 times/month

No. of returns from

sleep modeNone

Changes in

surrounding

environment

None

US Average 19,500 prints/month

Maximum 190,000 prints/month

EU Average 25,600 prints/month


US Average 13,500 prints/month


EU Average 17,200 prints/month


8/21/2019 652 Service



8

bizhub652/552/602/502

O U T L I N E

2.6 Machine specifications

*1: Width when the bypass tray is closed.

*2: Including the control panel.

*3: Space requirements are the respective values when the finisher tray extension, LCU,

and paper trays are pulled out and the ADF is raised.

2.7 Operating environment

Power requirements Voltage: AC 100 V, 120 V, 127 V, 220-240 V

Current: 100 V 15 A

110 V 15 A

120 V 16 A

127 V 16 A220-240 V 10 A

Frequency: 50 to 60 Hz ± 3 Hz

Max power consumption 100 V 1,500 W or less

110 V 1,500 W or less

120 V 2,100 W or less

127 V 2,100 W or less

220-240 V 2,100 W or less

Dimensions 650 *1 (W) x 879 *2 (H) x 1,155 mm (H)

25.5 *1 (W) x 34.5 *2 (D) x 45.5 inch (H)Space requirements 2,554 (W) x 1,525 mm (D) x 1,650 mm (H)*3

100.5 (W) x 60.0 inch (D) x 65.0 inch (H) *3

Weight Machine Approx. 201.0 kg / 443.0 lb (without IU and TC)

IU and TC Approx. 4.8 kg / 10.5 lb

Temperature 10 to 30° C / 50 to 86° F (with a fluctuation of 10° C / 18° F or less per hour)

Humidity 15 to 85% (Relative humidity with a fluctuation of 10%/h)

Levelness Difference between front and back, right and left should be 1 degree or under.

8/21/2019 652 Service



9

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2

O U T L I N E

2.8 Print functions

Type Built-in printer controller

RAM 2 GB (shared with the main body)

HDD 250 GB (shared with the main body)

Interface Standard Ethernet (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T)

USB 2.0

Option (EK-604/605) USB 2.0

Frame type Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet II, Ethernet SNAP

Supported protocols TCP/IP (IPv4/IPv6), BOOTP, ARP, ICMP, DHCP, DHCPv6, AutoIP, SLP, SNMP,

FTP, LPR/LPD, RAW Socket, SMB over TCP/IP, IPP, HTTP, POP, SMTP, LDAP,

NTP, SSL, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk, Bonjour, NetBEUI, WebDAV, DPWS, S/MIME,

IPsec, DNS, DynamicDNS, LLMNR, LLTD

Print speed

(A4 or 8 1 / 2 x 11, plain

paper)

bizhub 652 1-sided: 65 ppm, 2-sided: 65 ppm (64 ppm for 8 1 / 2 x 11)

bizhub 552 1-sided: 55 ppm, 2-sided: 55 ppm

bizhub 602

(Taiwan only)

1-sided: 60 ppm, 2-sided: 60 ppm

bizhub 502

(Taiwan only)

1-sided: 50 ppm, 2-sided: 50 ppm

Printer language PCL5c/6 Emulation

PCL XL ver. 2.1 Emulation

PostScript 3 Emulation (3016)

XPS ver.1.0

Print resolution Equivalent to 1,800 dpi in main scanning direction ×

600 dpi in sub scanning direction

Printer fonts PCL Latin 80 Fonts Postscript 3 Emulation Latin 137 Fonts

Supported computer IBM PC/AT compatible machine,

Macintosh

(PowerPC/Intel processor : Only MacOS X 10.4/10.5/10.6 for Intel processor)

8/21/2019 652 Service



10

bizhub652/552/602/502

O U T L I N E

Printer driver PCL KONICAMI-

NOLTA driver (PCL

driver)

Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)

Windows XP Professional (SP1 or later)

Windows Server 2003, Standard Edition (SP1 or later)

Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (SP1 or later)

Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition

Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise Edition

Windows XP Professional x64 Edition

Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 EditionWindows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition

Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard x64 Edition

Windows Server 2003 R2, Enterprise x64 Edition

Windows Vista Business *

Windows Vista Enterprise *

Windows Vista Home Basic *

Windows Vista Home Premium *

Windows Vista Ultimate *

Windows Server 2008 Standard *

Windows Server 2008 Enterprise *

Windows 7 Home Premium/Professional/Ultimate *

Windows Server 2008 R2 StandardWindows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise

Windows 7 Home Basic

Windows 7 Home Premium *

Windows 7 Professional *

Windows 7 Enterprise *

Windows 7 Ultimate *

*: 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are supported

PostScript KONI-

CAMINOLTA driver

(PS driver)




Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (SP1 or later)Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition



Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition

Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition







Windows Vista Ultimate *Windows Server 2008 Standard *


Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard

Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise







8/21/2019 652 Service



11

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2

O U T L I N E

Printer driver XPS KONICAMI-

NOLTA driver (XPS

driver)








Windows Server 2008 R2 StandardWindows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise







PostScript PPD

driver (PS-PPD)

Mac OS 9.2 or later

PostScript PPD

driver (Mac OS X)

Mac OS X 10.2.8/10.3/10.4/10.5/10.6

Fax driver Windows XP Home Edition (SP1 or later)



Windows Server 2003, Enterprise Edition (SP1 or later)

Windows Server 2003 R2, Standard Edition



Windows Server 2003, Standard x64 Edition

Windows Server 2003, Enterprise x64 Edition










Windows Server 2008 R2 Standard

Windows Server 2008 R2 Enterprise



Windows 7 Professional *Windows 7 Enterprise *



8/21/2019 652 Service



12

bizhub652/552/602/502

O U T L I N E

2.9 Scan functions

Scanner Scannable range Same as the copier

(Max. 11 x 17: inch area, A3: metric area)

Scan speed

(When the ADF is used)

78 pages/min (A4 or 8 1 / 2 x 11, 1-sided, 300 dpi)

Functions Scan to E-mail, Scan to FTP, Scan to SMB, Scan toBOX, Scan to WebDAV, Scan to Web service

Scanning resolution 200/300/400/600 dpi

TWAIN Driver TWAIN Driver, HDD TWAIN Driver

Supported operating

systems



Windows Vista Home Basic (SP2 or later) *1

Windows Vista Home Premium (SP2 or later) *1

Windows Vista Business (SP2 or later) *1

Windows Vista Enterprise (SP2 or later) *1

Windows Vista Ultimate (SP2 or later) *1

Windows 7 Home Basic *2Windows 7 Home Premium *2

Windows 7 Professional *2

Windows 7 Enterprise *2

Windows 7 Ultimate *2

*1: 32 bits (x86) environment are supported

*2: 32 bits (x86)/64 bits (x64) environment are sup-

ported

PC Conform to the specification of operating system

Required memory Conform to the specification of operating system

Network Computer to which TCP/IP protocol is correctly set

Hard disk Required 20 MB or more disk space

8/21/2019 652 Service



13

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2

O U T L I N E

• This machine supports Unicode. However, if the operating system used in a destination

computer does not support Unicode (2 and 3 byte characters), SMB transmission may

be unavailable. If SMB transmission is unsuccessful, specify the shared name of the des-

tination folder using ASCII codes (one-byte alphanumeric characters).

NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

SMB Supported

operating

systems

Windows Windows NT4.0 each Server/Workstation

Windows 2000 each Server/Professional

Windows XP Home/Professional

Windows Server 2003 each edition

Windows Server 2003 R2 each edition

Windows Vista each edition


Windows Server 2008 R2 each editionWindows 7 each edition

DFS function is supported only in the environment

that structured with the following Windows server

operating systems.

Windows 2000 Server each edition





Direct hosting function apply to the following oper-

ating systems.

Windows 2000 each edition

Windows XP each edition

Windows Vista each edition



Windows 7 each edition

Samba * 2.2.x

3.x

Novell

Netware

Netware 6.5 (SP6 or later)

8/21/2019 652 Service


3. SECTION CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

14

bizhub652/552/602/502

O U T L I N E

3. SECTION CONFIGURATION

A2WUT1C002DA

Scanner section(IR section)

Fusing section

Transfer corona section

Write section (PH section)

Paper feed section(Bypass tray)

Paper feed section (Tray1)

Paper feed section (Tray2)Toner collecting sectionIn front door (dotted linesection)

Imaging unit section(IU section)

Toner supply section



Duplex section(standard)

Auto document feed section * Standard

Paper exit section

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. PAPER PATH

15

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2

O U T L I N E

4. PAPER PATH

4.1 bizhub 652/552/602/502

A2WUT1C003DA

8/21/2019 652 Service


4. PAPER PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

16

bizhub652/552/602/502

O U T L I N E

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION

17

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

CONFIGURATION/OPERATION

5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION

5.1 Control block diagram

A2WUT2E044DA

CCD board

R G B

R G B

K

Scannerrelay board

Original glassposition controlboard

Inverter board

Control panel

Vendor

Fusing unit

DC power supply

Service EEPROM

Developing motor

High voltage unit

Paper feed/ transportdrive board

Printer controlboard

MFP board

PH relay board

PH section

Scannersection

Mainbody

Index board

HDD

USB board

Authentic-ation unit

Fax board

Laser driveboard

Paper feedsection

Duplex unit

Paper feed unitFinisher

Polygon motor

Bypass traysection

PC drum motor

Key counter

Total counter

8/21/2019 652 Service


5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

18

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

5.2 Image creation process

[1]Photoelectric

conversion

• The light reflected off the surface of the original is separated into dif-

ferent colors using the color filters (R, G, and B); CCD then converts

it into a corresponding electric signal and outputs the signal to the

printer image processing section (MFP board).

[2]

Printer image

processing

(No illustration is pro-

vided)

• The electric signal is converted to 8-bit digital image signals. After

going through some corrections, the digital image signals is con-

verted to VIDEO signals (K).

• D/A conversion will be performed after the VIDEO signals (K) is cor-

rected. This data will control the emission of the laser diode.

[3] Photo conductor• The image of the original projected onto the surface of the photo con-

ductor is changed to a corresponding electrostatic latent image.[4] Charging • Supply DC ( - ) charge on the photo conductor.

[5] Exposure• Expose photo conductor to a laser beam to develop electrostatic

latent image.

[6] Developing

• The toner, agitated and negatively charged in the developer mixing

chamber, is attracted onto the electrostatic latent image formed on

the surface of the photo conductor. It is thereby changed to a visible,

developed image.

• AC and DC negative bias voltages are applied to the developing

roller, thereby preventing toner from sticking to the background image

portion.

[7] 1st transfer

• A DC positive voltage is applied to the backside of the transfer belt,

thereby allowing the visible, developed image on the surface of the

photo conductor (K) to be transferred onto the transfer belt.

A2WUT2C008DA

[1]

[3]

[4]

[5][6]

[7][9][10]

[11]

[8]

[13]

[15]

[16]

[12]

[14]

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION

19

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

[8] 2nd transfer

• A DC positive voltage is applied to the backside of the paper, thereby

allowing the visible, developed image on the surface of the transfer

belt to be transferred onto the paper.

[9] Separation

• The paper, which has undergone the 2nd transfer process, is neutral-

ized so that it can be properly separated from the transfer belt by the

paper separator claws.

[10] Transfer belt cleaning

• The residual toner left on the transfer belt is collected by the cleaning

brush to clean the surface of the transfer belt.

[11] Main erase

• The surface of the photo conductor is irradiated with LED light, which

neutralizes any surface potential remaining on the surface of the

photo conductor.

[12]Photo conductor

cleaning

• The residual toner left on the photo conductor is collected by the

cleaning blade to clean the surface of the photo conductor.

[13] Fusing

• The visible toner image transferred onto the surface of the paper is

melted by the heat of the heating roller and fixed to the paper by pres-

sure of the fusing pressure roller.

[14] Paper exit• The paper, for which the toner image has been properly fixed, is fed

out onto the exit tray.

[15]Paper exit

(two-sided print)

• For two-sided printing, the 1-sided printed paper is turned over and

transported onto the duplex unit.

[16] Duplex

• The 1-sided printed paper, which has been turned over, is fed into the

main body, so that the paper can be subjected to the second print

cycle.

8/21/2019 652 Service


5. OVERALL CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

20

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

5.3 Image forming control

5.4 Process speed

A2WUT2E097DA

Developing bias DC K

Main erase lamp/K (EL/K)

K PC drum motor (M18)

Charge K

BCL (+)

BCL (-)

Cleaner motor (M38)

Transfer belt motor (M1)

2nd transfer roller pressure retraction

1st transfer pressure retraction

Image write start signal

Developing bias AC K

1st transfer K

2nd transfer

Neutralization

Registration motor (M2)Take-up motor (M22)

Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)

Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5)

Gate switch solenoid (SD1)

Exit motor (M4)

Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6)

Paper cooling fan motor (FM13)

Toner suction fan motor (FM7)

Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2)


Suction fan motor (FM1)Cooling fan motor (FM3)

IU cooling fan motor (FM15)

Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16)

IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10)

PH cooling fan motor (FM14)

Polygon motor (M34)

LD

Dehumidification heater

Fusing motor (M30)

Waste toner agitating motor (M20)

Power supply cooling fan motor (FM9)

K developing motor (M19)

Paper typeProcess speed (mm/s)

Plain paper

Thick

paper1

Thick

paper1+

Thick

paper2

Thick

paper3

(post-

cards)

Thick

paper4

Enve-

lopesOHP

Mode

Normal

mode

(matte)

Gloss

mode

bizhub 652 310 120 155 120

bizhub 552/502 264 120 132 120

bizhub 602 288 120 155 120

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. INTERFACE SECTION

21

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

6. INTERFACE SECTION

6.1 Configuration

6.1.1 Front side

A2WUT2C084DA

A0P0T5C050DA

Total counter

Main power switch(Power switch) (SW1)

Total counter

Main power switch

(Power switch) (SW1)

8/21/2019 652 Service


6. INTERFACE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

22

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

6.1.2 Rear side

A. Upper side

A0P0T5C053DA

Upper side

Lower side

A0P0T5C054DA

Toner filter Optional finishing connection connector

8/21/2019 652 Service



23

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

B. Lower side

NOTE• For the dehumidification heater, see “17.3.5 Dehumidification heater control”.

A2WUT2C085DA

Dehumidification heater switch(SW2)

Not used

Power cable 1

Not used

8/21/2019 652 Service



24

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

6.1.3 Right side

A0P0T5C057DA

Front side

Rear side (upper)

Rear side (lower)

8/21/2019 652 Service



25

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

A. Front side

NOTE• Use utmost care when unplugging or plugging the cable. If the USB cable

extended from the USB port at the rear (upper) portion is unplugged, the USB portat the front side is no longer operational.

A0P0T5C059DA

A0P0T5C060DA

USB port (optional) USB port (standard)

Sub power switch

Audio output terminal

(Japan only)

8/21/2019 652 Service



26

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. Rear side (upper)

NOTE• The USB cable is extended up to the USB port at the front side. If the cable is

unplugged from the USB port, therefore, the USB port at the front side is no longeroperational. Use utmost care when unplugging or plugging the cable.

• Sliding the service port cover will reveal the port dedicated to firmware upgrading.

• The service port cover is provided with a service port sensor that detects that thecover is opened or closed.• When the service port sensor is blocked, the machine determines that the cover is

closed.

NOTE• For details of “firmware upgrading”, see Field Service.• Be sure to close the service port cover after the firmware upgrading is completed.

A0P0T5C061DA

A0P0T5C062DA

USB port (standard:dedicated to local print)

Serial port (standard:not used)

Network port (standard:

dedicated to network print)

Service port cover fixing

screw

Service port cover (withopen/close detectionsystem)

USB port (standard)

Service port (standard:dedicated to firmwareupgrading)

USB extension cable (standard:USB extension cable to the USBboard at the front side)

USB extension cable

Service port cover

Service port (dedicated to firmware upgrading)

8/21/2019 652 Service



27

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

A0P0T5C063DB

Service port cover

Service port sensor(PS60)

8/21/2019 652 Service



28

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

C. Rear side (lower)

A0P0T5C065DA

A0P0T5C064DA

Fax kit (optional)

TEL terminal (optional)

TEL terminal (optional)

LINE terminal (optional)

LINE terminal (optional)

Line extension kit(optional)* The second line is onthe outside.

Control panel connectionconnector (standard)

Fax kit (optional)

Scanner section connectionconnector (standard)

Not used

Security kit(optional)

Note: This photo shows a system mounted with a fax kit and a security kit.

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. SCANNER SECTION

29

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

7. SCANNER SECTION

7.1 Configuration

A0P0T5C090DA

A0P0T5C058DA

20 degree sensor(PS202)

Scanner relay board(REYB/SCAN)

Scanner motor (M201)

Lens CCD unit

USB board (UB)

Mirror unit

Original glass movingmotor (M202)

Exposure unit

Scanner home

sensor (PS201)

Glass moving unitInverter board (INVB)

Optical cooling fan

motor (FM201)

Original glass positioncontrol board (OGPCB)

Original size detectionsensor 1 (PS204)

Status displayboard (MCMB)

Fax speaker (SP) Original size detectionsensor 2 (PS205)

Original cover sensor(RS201)

8/21/2019 652 Service


7. SCANNER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

30

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

7.2 Drive

A00JT2C003DA

Scanner drivecable/R

Mirror unit

Exposure unit

Scanner motor (M201)

Scanner drive cable/F

Scanner home sensor (PS201)

Original glass movingmotor (M202)

Glass moving unit

8/21/2019 652 Service



31

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

7.3 Operation

7.3.1 When the power is ON

1. The exposure unit moves from the scanner standby position to the home position.

2. Exposure unit moves from the home position to the shading position (under the

shading correction sheet) and stops (in scanning direction).

3. The exposure lamp turns ON and the gain value of the CCD sensor output voltage

to R, G, and B is adjusted.4. After adjusting the gain value, a shading correction is performed. The exposure

lamp goes out when the correction is completed.

5. The exposure unit moves in the return direction and stops at the home position.

6. The exposure unit moves in the scan direction and stops at the standby position.

A00JT2C004DA

Home position

Shading position

Scanning direction

Returning direction

Standby position

A0P0T2C001AA

Scanner movement

Shading position

Standby position

Home position

The exposure lamp (FL201) turns ONand a gain adjustment and shadingcorrection are made.

8/21/2019 652 Service



32

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

7.3.2 Control when the Start key is pressed

A. Original scanning modeOriginal scanning mode has two types: Original cover mode and DF mode.

(1) Original cover mode1. Turning the Start key ON will turn the exposure lamp ON (at the standby position)

2. The exposure unit moves in the return direction and stops at the shading position.

At the shading position, the gain adjustment is made.3. The exposure unit moves in the return direction and stops at the scan start posi-

tion.

4. To start a scan, the exposure unit moves from the scan start position to the leading

edge of an original while performing shading correction. The exposure unit will start

reading the original image from the leading edge. The unit will finish reading the

image at the back edge of the image.

5. The exposure lamp will be OFF when the reading is complete.

6. The exposure unit moves in the return direction and stops at the home position.

Then the exposure unit moves in the scan direction and stops at the standby posi-

tion. It scans only once even for the color scan, since R, G, and B data will all bememorized in one scanning.

A0P0T2C002AA

A00JT2C005DA

Shading position

Homeposition Standby position

Standby position

Scan start position

Scan startposition

Leading edge of the image

OriginalBack edge of the image

Scan

Return

Shading position

Home position

Leading edge of the image

Exposure lamp(FL201) ON

Back edge of the image

Scannermovement

8/21/2019 652 Service



33

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

(2) DF mode• The original fed by the document feeder will be read at the original DF glass for. The

Exposure unit will move to the reading position and stops. The document will be read as

the paper is transferred.

• bizhub 652/552: DF-618

A0P0T5C109DA

DF original glass

Reading position

8/21/2019 652 Service



34

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. Original scanning control• The light reflected off the exposed original reaches the CCD sensor via the lens.

• The CCD sensor outputs an electric signal (analog) that varies according to the intensity

of the light.

• One CCD sensor has a photoreceiver that individually responds to each of the three pri-

mary colors of R, G, and B.

• The electric signal is converted to digital data for each of R, G, and B by the board

(CCDB), becoming individual digital signals.• Analog-to-digital conversion is made according to an instruction given by the MFP board

(MFPB).

(1) Calibration

The following adjustment and correction (calibration) are made before the original isscanned, so that the image of the original can be adequately read. For details, see “25.

IMAGE PROCESSING”.

See P.222

• Gain adjustment

• Shading correction

R

G

B

9.325 µm

9.325 µm

4036ma2602c0

37.3 µm

37.3 µm

CCD sensorScanning direction

S u b s c a n n i n g

d i r e c t i o n

Main scanningdirection

8/21/2019 652 Service



35

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

7.3.3 DF original glass cleaning control

A. DF original glass cleaning• The reading lines will occur when DF original glass has stain. Shift mechanism for the DF

original glass is provided to avoid this trouble.

• The stand-by position for the DF original glass will be detected by the glass home sen-

sor.

• DF original glass will move back and forth by the original glass moving motor.

B. Details of DF original glass cleaning• The DF original glass makes three different movements. Each mode has different move-

ment.• The following explains different movements and different modes.

(1) Normal movement performed each time after reading a sheet of original• The DF original glass moves slightly back or forth every time after reading a sheet of

multiple originals. This changes the image reading position on the DF original glass and

prevents the repeated occurrence of lines in the sub scan direction due to the same stain

on the glass.

NOTEThis cleaning operation is not performed when the setting is made in the service mode as fol-lows. [System 2] - [Split Line Detect. Setting] - [Prior Detection] - [Not Set]

A00JT2C007DA

Original glass moving motor (M202)

Glass home sensor

(PS203)

A00JT2C538DAA00JT2C539DA

The first original The second original

DF original glass

Image reading position Image reading position

8/21/2019 652 Service



36

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

(2) DF original glass cleaning movement performed each time after reading a sheetof original

• While reading multiple originals consecutively, the DF original glass moves widely back

and forth between each original reading.

• Due to the effect of the step sheet that makes contact with the DF original glass, stain on

the DF original glass can be removed from the reading position and reduce image

streaks in the sub scan direction.

• Stain collected on the DF original glass is removed from the reading section by the trail-

ing edge of an original that is passing by.

(3) DF original glass cleaning movement performed after completing a job• After the completion of a job, the DF original glass moves widely back and forth to

remove stain remaining on the surface. This reduces the occurrence of lines in the sub

scan direction.

A00JT2C540DA

DF original glass Image reading position

Step sheet

A00JT2C544DA

StainDF original glass

Original

Image reading position

8/21/2019 652 Service



37

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

C. Step sheet• The step sheet is provided in order to reduce the stain on the DF original glass.

• It is installed to the operator side of the DF original glass in order to reduce the area orig-

inal touches the glass.

7.3.4 Original scanning area

Original scanning areas vary depending on a scanning mode.

A. Original cover mode• Main scanning direction: Max. 297.0 mm

• Sub scanning direction: Max. 431.8 mm

B. DF mode• Main scanning direction: Max. 297.0 mm

• Sub scanning direction: Max. 1,000.0 mm

9J07T2C007DA

Step sheet

DF original glass

Original

8/21/2019 652 Service



38

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

7.3.5 Original size detection control

A. Detection method• For detection of the original size, the reflective size sensors detect the length of the orig-

inal while the CCD detects the width of the original.

• For the original of an irregular size, the nearest standard size on the large side is applied

to it.

A0P0T5C058DA

4037T2E597AA

A0P0T5C074DA

Automatic document feeder

20 degrees sensor (PS202)

CCD unitExposure unit

Original standardposition

Original readposition

Exposure unit

313.5 mm

Original sizedetectionsensor 1 (PS204)

20 degrees

Original size detection sensor 1 (PS204)

Original size detection sensor 2 (PS205) *

Original sizedetectionsensor 2 (PS205) *

346.1 mm

*: Option

8/21/2019 652 Service



39

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

B. Original size judgement

NOTE• Table 1 or 2 can be selected in the service mode.

Criterion

Metric area & china areas

Table 1

Table 2

*: Option

Inch areas

Table 1

Table 2

*: Option

Original

size

detection

sensor 1

Main scanning width (mm)

0~130.0 ~153.0 ~187.0 ~200.0 ~215.0 ~225.0 ~261.5 ~275.0 275.1~

OFF No original A5S B5S 16KS A4S B5 B5 16K A4

ON A3 - - - - FLS B4 8K A3

Original

size

detection

sensor


1 2* 0~130 ~143.9 ~153 ~187 ~200 ~213 ~220.9 ~225 ~261.5 ~274.7 ~284.4 284.5~

OFF OFF

No

origi-

nal

51 / 2 ×

81 / 2 SA5S B5S

16K

SA4S

81 / 2 ×

11 S- B5 16K

81 / 2 ×

11A4

ON OFF A3 - - - - FLS FLS FLS - - - -

- ON A3 - - - - -81 / 2 ×

14- B4 8K 11 × 17 A3

Original size

detection

sensor 1


0~130.0 ~144.7 ~220.9 ~221.0

OFF No original 51 / 2 × 81 / 2 S 81 / 2 × 11 S 81 / 2 × 11

ON 11 × 17 - 81 / 2 × 14 11 × 17

Original size

detection

sensor


1 2* 0~130 ~143.9 ~153 ~187 ~213 ~220.9 ~225 ~262 ~284.4 284.5~

OFF OFFNo

original51 / 2 × 81 / 2 S A5S B5S A4S 81 / 2 × 11 S - B5 81 / 2 × 11 A4

ON OFF A3 - - - FLS FLS FLS - - -

- ON A3 - - - - 81 / 2 × 14 - B4 11 × 17 A3

8/21/2019 652 Service



40

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

C. Detection timing

7.3.6 Image processing

The image processing has following items. For details, see “25. IMAGE PROCESSING”.

See P.222

Scanner section image processing block diagram• Photoelectric conversion

• Analog-to-digital conversion

Original size detection sensor 1 (PS204)

20 degree sensor (PS202)

Exposure lamp (FL201)

Original cover sensor (RS201)

Validates the original length Validates the original size

A2WUT2E002DA

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)

41

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION)

8.1 Configuration

[1] Laser aperture [2] Index mirror

[3] Index lens [4] Index board (INDEXB)

[5] Return mirror/2 [6] Laser drive board/K (LDDB/K)

[7] Collimator [8] Return mirror/1

[9] Cylindrical lens [10] Polygon mirror

[11] G1 lens [12] G2 lens

[13] G3 lens [14] Return mirror/3

[15] Laser beam

A2WUT2C009DA

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[11]

[1]

[13]

[14]

[15]

[12]

[9]

[10]

[8]

8/21/2019 652 Service


8. WRITE SECTION (PH SECTION) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

42

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

8.2 Operation

8.2.1 Outline

• The surface of the photo conductor is irradiated with a laser beam and an electrostatic

latent image is thereby formed.

• The PH unit has two semiconductor lasers. A single polygon motor is used to make a

scan. (2 line one scan)

• To be compatible with the high speed printing system, a seven sided polygon mirror isused. The two beam array LD is used to control the growth of the polygon motor rotation

speed.

• The two-beam array LD consists of two LD elements arranged vertically. Two lines are

scanned simultaneously with two laser beams emitted from these two LD elements

through a single face of the polygon mirror.

• The “intensity balance” of the two beam array LD can be adjusted in “LD 1/2 Balance

Adj.” of the Service Mode. If there is a difference in intensity between the two LD ele-

ments, grain-like noise occurs in the print image. For details of the adjustment, see the

“Field Service” of the Service Manual.

A2WUT2C011DA

[2]

[2]

[3]

[3]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[5]

[11] [4]

[6]

[6]

[7]

[7]

[8] [9]

[8][9]

[10]

[10]

[2]

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



43

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

[1] Transfer belt [2] Photo conductor

[3] Photo conductor rotatory direction [4] Beam A

[5] Beam B [6] Polygon mirror



[11] Laser diode

8/21/2019 652 Service



44

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

8.2.2 Laser exposure process

A. Operation1. The laser beam (two beams) enters the cylindrical lens via the return mirror/2.

2. The laser beam is condensed at the vicinity of the polygon mirror by the cylindrical

lens.

3. The condensing angle of the laser beam is corrected by the G1, G2 and G3 lenses

and then reaches the return mirror/3.

4. The laser beam is condensed on the photo conductor surface via the return mirror/

3.

(1) Top side view of the PH unit

[1] Index mirror [2] Index lens

[3] Index board (INDEXB) [4] Return mirror/2

[5] Laser drive board/K (LDDB/K) [6] Collimator

[7] Return mirror/1 [8] Cylindrical lens

[9] Polygon mirror [10] G1 lens


[13] Return mirror/3 [14] Laser beam

A2WUT2C012DA

[2][3][4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[9]

[10]

[11]

[1]

[13][12]

[8]

[14]

8/21/2019 652 Service



45

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

(2) Front view of the PH unit

[1] Transfer belt [2] Polygon mirror



[7] Photo conductor

A2WUT2C013DA

[2] [3] [4] [5]

[6]

[7]

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



46

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

8.2.3 Laser emission timing

• After a print cycle has been started, when the stable rotation signals of photo conductor

and polygon motor are detected, a laser ON signal is output from the printer control

board.

• The laser ON signal causes each laser diode to turn ON and emit a laser beam.

• After passing through the return mirror/2, cylindrical lens, polygon mirror, G1 lens, G2

lens, index mirror, and index lens, the laser beam is applied to the index board. This gen-

erates an index signal.

• This index signal has a function of keeping the same laser beam emission timing per

every two lines in the main scanning direction.

• If the index signal is not detected within a predetermined period of time, the machine

determines that it is a laser emission fault, displaying “trouble code: C4501 laser mal-

function”.

• The machine continuously monitors the index signal. If the index signal cannot be

detected at regular intervals, the machine determines that it is a laser emission fault, dis-

playing “trouble code: C4501 laser malfunction”.

[1] Index mirror [2] Index lens

[3] Index board (INDEXB) [4] Return mirror/2

[5] Laser drive board/K (LDDB/K) [6] Collimator

[7] Return mirror/1 [8] Cylindrical lens

[9] Polygon mirror [10] G1 lens


[13] Return mirror/3 [14] Laser beam

A2WUT2C014DA

[2][3][4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[10]

[11]

[1]

[14]

[13][12]

[9]

[8]

8/21/2019 652 Service



47

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

8.2.4 Laser emission stop

Emission of the laser beam is stopped if any of the following conditions is encountered dur-

ing printing:

• End of a print job

• The front door or any other door is opened.

• A misfeed occurs.

• A malfunction occurs.

8.2.5 Laser emission area

A. Main scanning direction• The print start position in the main scanning direction is determined by the main scan-

ning print start signal (/HSYNC) that is output from the printer control board and the

width of the paper.

• The laser emission area is determined by the paper size. The area of 3 mm/0.118 inch

on both edges of the paper is, however, the void image area.

B. Sub scanning direction

• The print start position in the sub scanning direction is determined by the image writestart signal (/TOD) that is output from the printer control board and the length of the

paper.

• The laser emission area is determined by paper size. However, there are void areas that

are 4.2 mm/0.165 inch from the leading edge and 3 mm/0.118 inch from the trailing edge

of paper.

4138to2595c0

Void width: 3 mm/0.118”

Void width: 4.2 mm/ 0.165”

Void width: 3 mm/0.118”

Void width: 3 mm/ 0.118”

8/21/2019 652 Service



48

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

8.2.6 Image processing

The image processing has following items. For details, see “25. IMAGE PROCESSING”.

See P.222

Image processing block diagram• Shading correction

• Line-to-line variation correction/color aberration correction

• Detection of security pattern• Free erase

• AE processing

• Image data editing

• Image area discrimination

• Monochrome data creation

• Miscellaneous processing (improved reproduction of black text, edge emphasis and

smoothing)

• BTC compression

• Input buffer memory

• JBIG compression• File (code) memory

• JBIG expansion

• Memory access coordinator

• Frame memory

• Output buffer memory

• BTC expansion

• Main scanning direction resolution conversion and movement

• Sub-scanning direction resolution conversion

• Color conversion processing (V to K)

• Embedment of security pattern

• Area discrimination FEET• Interpolation

• Gamma correction

• Error diffusion (binary)

• Screening

• Main scanning position correction

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION

49

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION

9.1 Configuration

• The toner supply section is composed of the toner cartridge drive section, toner cartridge

and toner hopper section.

[1] Toner cartridge [2] Toner cartridge drive section

[3] Toner hopper section [4] Spiral spring

[5] Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14) [6] Toner replenishing port

[7] Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K) [8] Toner supply motor/K (M12)

[9] Toner cartridge set board

A2WUT2C015DA

[2]

[3]

[7]

[8]

[6]

[9]

[4]

[5]

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service


9. TONER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

50

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

9.2 Drive

9.2.1 Toner cartridge drive

9.2.2 Toner hopper drive

[1] Spiral spring [2] Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)

[3] Spiral spring rotatory direction [4] Toner conveying direction

A2WUT2C016DA

[3]

[4]

[1]

[2]

[1] Toner supply screw [2] Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K)[3] Toner supply motor/K (M12) [4] Toner agitating blade

A2WUT2C017DA

[2]

[3] [1]

[3]

[4]

[4]

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



51

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

9.3 Operation

9.3.1 Replenishing the toner hopper with toner

A. Toner• The toner cartridge/K is packed with both toner and carrier (small percent) and the devel-

oping unit/K is replenished with fresh carrier at the same time that it is replenished with

toner. Excess developer in the developing unit/K is discharged to the waste toner box,

thereby inhibiting developer left in the developing unit/K from being deteriorated andmaintaining stable image quality for an extended period of time. This method is referred

to as the auto refining developing system.

For details, see “12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION”.

• “Toner and carrier” packed in the toner cartridge is simply referred to as “Toner” instead

of “Developer” throughout the manual.

• “Developer”, if clearly specified, refers to the “developer” that is mixed in the developing

unit to offer a specified T/C.

B. Toner replenishing control• The toner is supplied from the toner cartridge to the toner hopper by the toner cartridge

motor C/K.

• When the toner cartridge motor C/K rotates, the spiral spring provided in the toner car-

tridge rotates. Thus toner in the toner cartridge is conveyed to front side of the machine

and toner is supplied to the toner hopper.

• The toner empty sensor/K located in the toner hopper detects the remaining toner

amount and controls toner replenishment from the toner cartridge to the toner hopper.

[1] Toner cartridge coupling portion [2] Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)

A2WUT2C018DA

[1]

[2]

8/21/2019 652 Service



52

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

C. Toner cartridge motor rotation speed selection control• The toner cartridge motor selects a rotation speed of either low or high.

• When toner left in the toner cartridge is equal to, or more than, a specified value, the

toner cartridge motor rotates at the low speed to supply a specified amount of toner to

the toner hopper.

• When toner left in the toner cartridge decreases, the toner empty sensor/K in the toner

hopper detects a toner cartridge near empty.

• When toner left in the toner cartridge decreases, the toner efficiency decreases. (Whenthe toner cartridge motor rotates at the low speed, a specified amount of toner cannot be

supplied to the toner hopper.)

Speed of the toner cartridge motor is therefore changed from the low speed to the high

speed.

• The increased speed of the toner cartridge motor boosts up toner supply efficiency that

has been degraded. As a result, a specified amount of toner can be supplied from the

toner cartridge to the toner hopper.

8/21/2019 652 Service



53

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

9.3.2 Replenishing the developing unit with toner

A. Toner replenishing control• Toner, which has been supplied from the toner cartridge to the toner hopper, is replen-

ished to the developing unit by the toner supply motor/K.

• T/C is detected by the TCR sensor in the developing unit/K when the K developing motor

is energized.

• Based on T/C ratio detected by the TRC sensor and amount of toner consumption calcu-

lated by the dot counter, toner replenishing time (amount) is calculated.

• When the toner replenishing amount is calculated, the calculation result may at times be

toner replenishing time (amount) that exceeds the maximum volume for one replenishing

sequence (for printing an image with high density).

One replenishing sequence may not be enough to replenish the amount of toner equiva-

lent to the calculation result. In such a case, the “shortfall in the toner replenishing time

(amount)” during the preceding toner replenishing sequence is added to the required

toner replenishing time (amount) of the next toner replenishing sequence, so that the

sum of these two elements will then be supplied in the next toner replenishing sequence.

[1] Toner supply motor/K (M12) [2] Toner hopper (Rear view)

[3] Toner agitating blade [4] Toner conveying screw

[5] Toner flow [6] Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K)

A2WUT2C020DA

[1]

[6]

[2]

[3]

[5]

[4]

8/21/2019 652 Service



54

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. Toner empty detection mechanism• A piezo sensor is used as the toner empty sensor/K.

[1] Toner hopper (Top side view) [2] Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K)

[3] Toner supply motor/K (M12) [4] Toner agitating blade

[5] Toner supply screw

A2WUT2C019DA

[3]

[4]

[5]

[1]

[2]

8/21/2019 652 Service



55

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

9.3.3 Toner cartridge life control

• The amount of toner remaining in the cartridge is displayed as the four states, “normal”,

“toner cartridge near empty”, “toner cartridge empty”, and “toner hopper empty”.

• Normal:

The number of pages that can be printed is 7,500 or more.

• Toner cartridge near empty:

The number of pages that can be printed is 5,000 to less than 7,500.• Toner cartridge empty:

No toner remains in the toner cartridge.

The number of pages that can be printed is approximately 1,000.

• Toner hopper empty:

No toner remains in the toner cartridge and toner hopper.

The machine stops printing.

A. Toner cartridge near empty detection control• A toner cartridge near empty warning is displayed, if the toner empty sensor/K of the

toner hopper detects no toner while the toner cartridge motor runs at low speed.

B. Toner cartridge empty control• After the toner cartridge near empty condition is detected, if the toner empty sensor/K of

the toner hopper detects toner empty, the toner cartridge empty warning is displayed.

Remaining toner amount Description

NormalEnough toner remains in the toner cartridge and the toner hopper.

(Low speed replenishment)

Toner cartridge near

empty

Low speed replenishment cannot supply the required amount of toner to the

toner hopper within a certain time. (Switch to the high speed replenishment)

Toner cartridge emptyEven high speed replenishment cannot supply the required amount of toner

to the toner hopper within a certain time.

Toner hopper emptyToner inside the toner hopper is running out, thus toner cannot be supplied

to the developing unit. A printing cannot be continued.

8/21/2019 652 Service



56

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

C. Toner hopper empty detection• Toner amount more than the given level is supplied to the developing unit after detecting

a toner cartridge empty, toner hopper empty warning is displayed.

NOTE• The warning screen to be displayed is changed by specifying the person who replaces

the unit in the “System 2” → “Unit Change” in the Service Mode. The illustration shows

the message when “User” is selected.

• The default setting is “User”.

• For details, see “Field Service” of the Service Manual.

Toner cartridge near empty Toner cartridge empty

Toner hopper empty

A2WUT2E091DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



57

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

9.3.4 Toner cartridge detection

• The toner cartridge detection is controlled by means of accessing the toner cartridge set

board when the upper front door is closed or the sub power switch is turned ON to deter-

mine whether the toner cartridge is loaded or not.

• After detecting the presence of the cartridge, the machine determines whether the car-

tridge is new or not.

[1] Toner cartridge set board

A2WUT2C021DA

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



58

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

9.3.5 Toner spill prevention shutter

• To prevent toner from being spilled when the toner cartridge is removed from the

machine, there is a shutter mechanism provided. When the toner cartridge is installed in

the machine, the shutter opens.

• Do not open the shutter while the toner replenishing port faces down.

[1] Toner replenishing port [2] Shutter closed

(Before toner cartridge is installed)

[3] Shutter opened

(When toner cartridge is installed)

A2WUT2C022DA[2] [3]

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION

59

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION

10.1 Configuration

• The imaging unit/K (IU) of this machine can be physically divided into the drum unit and

developing unit. It is further divided into the charging, photo conductor, developing, and

cleaning sections.

[1] Imaging unit/K [2] Drum unit/K

[3] Developing unit/K

A2WUT2C023DA

[2]

[3]

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service


10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

60

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

10.2 Drive

10.2.1 Drum unit drive

[1] K PC drum motor (M18) [2] Photo conductor

[3] Photo conductor rotatory direction [4] Toner collecting port

[5] Toner collecting screw [6] Photo conductor drive gear

A2WUT2C024DA

[1]

[3]

[4]

[2]

[5]

[6]

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION

61

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

10.2.2 Developing unit drive

[1] Developing roller [2] K developing motor (M19)

[3] Conveying screw (supply screw/agitating

screw)

[4] Developer discharge port

[5] Developing roller rotatory direction

[5]

[4]

[3]

[1]

[2]

A2WUT2C025DA

8/21/2019 652 Service


10. IMAGING UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

62

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

10.3 Operation

10.3.1 Outline

• The imaging unit/K (IU) of this machine can be physically divided into the drum unit and

developing unit. It is further divided into the charging, photo conductor, developing, and

cleaning sections.

10.3.2 Imaging unit detection

• The developing unit has EEPROM board to perform the developing unit new article

detection, developing unit mounting detection and life management.

• The drum unit has the mounting detect board to perform the developing unit new article

detection and developing unit mounting detection.

For details of each unit, see the following chapters.P-63 DRUM UNIT SECTION

P-75 DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION

Model LifeDrum unit Developing unit

bizhub 652/552285,000 counts (number of field

standard printed pages)

1,140,000 counts (number of field

standard printed pages)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 11. DRUM UNIT SECTION

63

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

11. DRUM UNIT SECTION

11.1 Configuration

• The drum unit is composed of the photo conductor section, charging section and clean-

ing section.

[1] Main erase lamp/K (EL/K) [2] K PC drum motor (M18)

[3] Drum unit release lever [4] Photo conductor

[5] Charge corona [6] Drum unit set board

[7] Toner collecting port [8] Toner collecting screw

[9] Cleaning blade [10] Charge control plate (Grid mesh)

[11] Comb electrode [12] Charge corona cleaning mechanism

A2WUT2C026DA

[3]

[3]

[2]

[6]

[7]

[5]

[4]

[1]

[1]

[8]

[9]

[4]

[8]

[12]

[9]

[3]

[5]

[11]

[10]

[6]

8/21/2019 652 Service


11. DRUM UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

64

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

11.2 Drive

11.2.1 Photo conductor drive

• The K PC drum motor provides the drive for the photo conductor which is rotated via the

drive gear.

• Drive is transmitted to the photo conductor when the triangular-prism-shaped shaft is

engaged with the mating coupling part.• The K PC drum motor provides the drive for the toner collecting screw which is rotated

via the photo conductor.

[1] K PC drum motor (M18) [2] Photo conductor

[3] Photo conductor rotatory direction [4] Toner collecting screw

A2WUT2C027DA

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

8/21/2019 652 Service



65

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

11.2.2 Charge corona cleaner drive

[1] Cleaner moving direction (From the home

position to the return position)

[2] Charge cleaning motor/K (M15)

[3] Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43) [4] Cleaner moving direction (From the return

position to the home position)

[5] Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44) [6] Charge control plate (Grid mesh)

[7] Cleaner drive screw [8] Comb electrode

[9] Charging cleaner [10] Cleaner position detection plate

A2WUT2C028DA

[2]

[3]

[8]

[1]

[4]

[5]

[9]

[7]

[9]

[7]

[10]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[6]

[3][2][2]

8/21/2019 652 Service



66

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

11.3 Operation

11.3.1 Photo conductor drive gear

• The K photo conductor drive gear employs a large diameter gear to enable the high-

speed monochrome printing.

• The photo conductor employs also a large diameter photo conductor.

[1] Toner collecting screw [2] Photo conductor

[3] Photo conductor drive gear rotatory direc-

tion

[4] Photo conductor drive gear

[5] Photo conductor rotatory direction

A2WUT2C029DA

[3]

[5]

[4]

[1][2]

8/21/2019 652 Service



67

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

A. Photo conductor small amount rotation control• Humidity around the IU can produce a difference in sensitivity among different photo con-

ductors. This could lead to drum memory, allowing black bands to occur in the image.

• Ozone stagnant in areas near the photo conductor charge corona reduces sensitivity of

the photo conductors, causing white bands to occur in the image.

• To prevent these image problems, the photo conductor rotates not to keep facing the

same surface toward to the charge corona for a long time.

• The time interval of this control is set different depending on how long the photo conduc-tor has been used and what the humidity and the temperature are inside the machine.

• Control operating condition

- Consecutive print:

Rotate the photo conductor consecutively for more than a predetermined period of

time.

- Intermittent printing:

The next job is started with a time interval of less than 10 min. after the completion of

the preceding job, and the cumulative time of rotation of the photo conductor between

the preceding and current jobs exceeds a predetermined period of time.

• If the above conditions are detected, the photo conductor is rotated a small amount dur-ing the standby after the completion of the job.

[1] Photo conductor [2] Photo conductor rotatory direction

[3] Charge corona

A2WUT2C030DA

[3]

[2]

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



68

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

11.3.2 Main erase lamp control

• The main erase lamp/K radiation onto the surface of the photo conductor removes elec-

tric charge remaining on the surface.

• To improve cleaning performance, the main erase lamp/K is located upstream of the

cleaning blade in the direction of the photo conductor rotation.

[1] Main erase lamp/K (EL/K) [2] Photo conductor rotatory direction

[3] Photo conductor [4] Charge corona

[5] Cleaning blade

A2WUT2C031DA

[3]

[4]

[1]

[5]

[2]

8/21/2019 652 Service



69

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

11.3.3 Photo conductor cleaning

• The cleaning blade is pressed up against the surface of the photo conductor, scraping

residual toner off the surface.

• The main erase lamp/K located upstream in the direction of the photo conductor rotation

removes electric charge remaining on the surface of the photo conductor. Thus the

cleaning blade located downstream in the direction of the photo conductor rotation

scrapes residual toner off the surface easily.

• Toner, which has been scraped off the surface of the photo conductor, is conveyed to the

front side of the machine by the toner collecting screw. It is collected into the waste toner

box.

11.3.4 Photo conductor charge control

A. Comb electrode

• The charge corona incorporates a comb electrode, capable of conducting charging oper-ation centrally on the charge control plate (grid mesh), which enables to reduce the

amount of ozone produced.

B. Charge control plate

• Discharge occurs via the charge control plate (grid mesh), so that the photo conductor

surface can be uniformly charged.

• The grid voltage (Vg) applied to the charge control plate (grid mesh) is controlled through

the image stabilization control.

[1] Toner collecting screw [2] Collected toner flow

[3] 1st transfer [4] Photo conductor rotatory direction

[5] Developing [6] Photo conductor

[7] Charge corona [8] Cleaning blade

A2WUT2C032DA

[2][3]

[5]

[1]

[4]

[6] [7]

[8]

8/21/2019 652 Service



70

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

11.3.5 Charge corona cleaning control

• If the comb electrode of the charge corona gets dirt, the voltage applied to the surface of

the photo conductor become nonuniform, thus image problems (bands) may occur.

• To prevent these problems, the charge corona has a cleaning mechanism that periodi-

cally cleans the comb electrode and the charge control plate (grid mesh).

• The cleaner is driven by the charge cleaning motor/K.

• To clean the charge corona, the charge cleaning motor/K is rotated to bring the cleaner

from the home position to the return position. Then, the charge cleaning motor/K is

rotated backward to bring the cleaner to the home position. (Operating time approxi-

mately 20 sec., 50 sec. maximum)

• When the power switch is turned ON or the front door is opened/closed, the charge

corona cleaner home position detection control is performed. If the charge corona

cleaner is not at the home position, the charge cleaning motor/K rotates to bring the

charge corona cleaner to its home position.

• The charging cleaner home sensor detects the position (rear) of the charge corona

cleaner. The charging cleaner return sensor (this side) detects the return position.

• The cleaning operation starts when the count exceeds 2,700 at the end of a print job

since the last electrode cleaning.If, however, the number of pages yet to be printed for the current job is 50 or more with

the count exceeding 2,700, the job is stopped and the cleaning operation is performed.

• The count method is such that a paper length (length in the sub-scanning direction)

equivalent to that of A4 is counted as one.

NOTE• The manual cleaning and auto cleaning can be set in “System 1” → “Charging CH Clean-

ing” in the Service Mode.

• The default setting of “K Charge A/C ON/OFF Setting” is “ON”.


Paper length in the sub scanning direction Count

216 mm or less 1

Over 216 mm and up to 432 mm 2




Over 1080 mm 6

8/21/2019 652 Service



71

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

[1] Cleaner moving direction (From the return

position to the home position)

[2] Charge corona cleaner

[3] Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) [4] Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43)

[5] Cleaner moving direction (From the home

position to the return position)

[6] Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44)

[7] Charge control plate (Grid mesh) [8] Cleaner drive screw

[9] Comb electrode

A2WUT2C033DA

[6]

[7]

[4]

[9]

[1]

[5]

[8]

[2]

[3]

8/21/2019 652 Service



72

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

11.3.6 Ozone removal

• Removes ozone produced by the charge corona.

• The ozone ventilation fan motor draws air.

• The air containing ozone flows through the exhaust duct. The ozone filter located at the

distal end of the exhaust duct decomposes the ozone in the exhaust into oxygen.

• The air, which is now harmless, is discharged out of the machine.

[1] Discharged to the outside of the machine [2] Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6)

[3] Air flow of drawn air [4] Exhaust duct

[5] Ozone produced when discharging [6] Charge corona

[7] Ozone filter

A2WUT2C040DA

[4]

[2] [1]

[7]

[6]

[5]

[3]

8/21/2019 652 Service



73

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

11.3.7 Detection of drum unit/K

A. Drum unit detection• The drum unit detection is controlled by means of accessing the drum unit set board

when the lower front door is closed or the sub power switch is turned ON to determine

whether the unit is loaded or not.

• After detecting the presence of the unit, the machine determines whether the unit is new

or not.

[1] Drum unit set board

A2WUT2C034DA[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



74

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. When life is reached

• The drum unit life counter is used to keep track of the life of the drum unit.

• A near-life condition is encountered when the consumption rate reaches about 87%, at

which time the L code screen appears.

• A warning screen appears when the drum unit life counter reaches the life value. Initia-

tion of a new print cycle is prohibited when a predetermined number of printed pages are

produced after the life value has been reached, at which time a drum unit replacement

screen will appear.

A2WUT2E092DA

L code key (The L code screen

appears when the L code key is

touched)

When a life value is reachedWhen a near-life value is reached

When a predetermined number of

printed pages are produced after

the life value has been reached.

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION

75

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION

12.1 Configuration

[1] Developing unit [2] K developing motor (M19)

[3] TCR sensor/K (TCRS/K) [4] Developer discharge port

[5] Toner replenishing port [6] Photo conductor

[7] Developing roller [8] Doctor blade


screw)

A2WUT2C035DA

[2]

[1]

[9]

[8]

[3]

[7]

[3]

[6]

[4]

[5]

8/21/2019 652 Service


12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

76

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

12.2 Drive

[1] Developing roller [2] K developing motor (M19)


screw)

[4] Developer discharge port

[5] Developing roller rotatory direction

A2WUT2C036DA

[5]

[4]

[3]

[1]

[2]

8/21/2019 652 Service



77

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

12.3 Operation

A. Toner• The toner cartridge/K is packed with both toner and carrier (small percent) and the devel-

oping unit/K is replenished with fresh carrier at the same time that it is replenished with

toner. Excess developer in the developing unit/K is discharged to the waste toner box,

thereby inhibiting developer left in the developing unit/K from being deteriorated and

maintaining stable image quality for an extended period of time. This method is referredto as the auto refining developing system.

For details, see “12.3.2 Auto refining developing system”.

• “Toner and carrier” packed in the toner cartridge is simply referred to as “Toner” instead

of “Developer” throughout the manual.

• “Developer”, if clearly specified, refers to the “developer” that is mixed in the developing

unit to offer a specified T/C.

12.3.1 Developer flow

1. Toner (including carrier) supplied from the front end of the developing unit is fed to

the rear of the unit, while being mixed with developer and electrically charged bythe conveying screw (agitating screw).

2. The TCR sensor installed on the underside of the developing unit detects toner-to-

carrier ratio (T/C) during this time.

3. The developer conveyed to the rear of the unit is carried to the conveying screw

(supply screw) on the right.

4. The developer is conveyed onto the developing roller. The doctor blade then con-

trols the height of the developer brush to ensure that the developer on the develop-

ing roller levels out.

5. Toner sticks to the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the photo conductor.

The developer that is left on the developing roller is returned to the conveying

screw (supply screw) on the right by the magnetic pole positioning of the develop-ing roller. It is then conveyed to the front of the unit.

6. The developer is returned to the conveying screw (agitating screw) from the con-

veying screw (supply screw).

7. With operations described above repeatedly performed, the developer is circulated

thought the developing unit.

8. Part of the circulating developer is collected in the waste toner box through the

developer discharge port located at the front side of the conveying screw (supply

screw). The developer discharge port is provided with a shutter mechanism.

Mounting the waste toner box pushes the shutter at the developer discharge port,

opening the developer discharge port. Removing the waste toner box, on the otherhand, closes the shutter and developer is thereby prevented from spilling from the

developer discharge port. (For details, see the paragraphs that describe the auto

refining developing system and toner collecting section.)

8/21/2019 652 Service



78

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

[1] Toner supplied from toner hopper [2] Photo conductor

[3] Developing roller [4] Conveying screw (supply screw/agitating

screw)

[5] Developer discharge port [6] Developer collected to waste toner box

[7] Toner flow inside developing unit [8] Photo conductor rotatory direction

A2WUT2C037DA

[8]

[7]

[6]

[2]

[1]

[7]

[6]

[3]

[5]

[4]

8/21/2019 652 Service



79

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

12.3.2 Auto refining developing system

• The toner cartridge/K is packed with both toner and carrier and the developing unit/K is

replenished with fresh carrier at the same time that it is replenished with toner.

• Excess developer in the developing unit/K is discharged, thereby inhibiting developer left

in the developing unit/K from being deteriorated and maintaining stable image quality for

an extended period of time.

A0P0T2J609AA

Toner bottleTonerNew carrier

Low degree of deterioration ofentire developer

Circulationand agitation

Developing unit

Waste toner box

8/21/2019 652 Service



80

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

12.3.3 Developing bias

• The developing bias voltage (Vdc) is applied to the developing roller so that an adequate

amount of toner is attracted onto the surface of the photo conductor can be controlled.

• To help toner to be attracted more easily to the surface of the photo conductor, the devel-

oping bias voltage (Vdc) of DC+AC is applied during development. AC component is

applied only while development is taking place. At any other timing, only Vdc is applied.

• The developing bias voltage (Vdc) is supplied from high voltage unit /1.

[1] Charge corona [2] Developing roller

[3] High voltage unit/1 (HV1) [4] Developing unit (Rear view)

[5] Developing bias voltage application termi-

nal

A2WUT2C038DA

[2]

[3]

[3]

[1]

[4][5]

8/21/2019 652 Service



81

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

12.3.4 Toner density control

• The magnetic TCR sensor is mounted on the underside of the developing section. This

TCR sensor detects toner-to-carrier ratio (T/C) of the developer. The reading is used for

determining the amount of toner supplied.

• The target T/C ratio is 7%.

• When a new developing unit/K is mounted in the machine, the sensitivity of the TCR sen-

sor/K is automatically adjusted.

• The sensitivity of the TCR sensor/K cannot be adjusted manually from the Service Mode

and so on.

• The detection level of the TCR sensor/K can be adjusted from Service Mode → Image

Process Adjustment → TCR Level Setting. (The setting will be enabled after the TCR

sensor/K automatic adjustment.)

For details, see “Field Service” of the Service Manual.

[1] Photo conductor [2] Developing roller[3] Conveying screw (supply screw/agitating

screw)

[4] TCR sensor/K (TCRS/K)

A2WUT2C041DA

[4]

[2]

[1]

[3]

[4]

[1]

[2]

[3]

8/21/2019 652 Service



82

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

12.3.5 Detection of developing unit/K

• A new developing unit for replacement has EEPROM board that detects a new unit and

keeps track of the service life of the unit.

A. New developing unit detection• The developing unit shipped with the main body does not have any EEPROM board. The

life counter is recorded in the main body.

• A new developing unit/K is detected when 24 V is turned ON after the main power switchis turned OFF and ON or the lower front door is opened and closed.

• When a new developing unit is detected, the lift counter is automatically reset and a TCR

adjustment is carried out.

• An automatic TCR adjustment takes about 140 sec.

B. When life is reached• The developing unit life counter is used to keep track of the life of the developing unit.

• A warning screen appears when the life value is reached. Initiation of a new print cycle is

prohibited when a predetermined number of printed pages are produced after the life

value has been reached, at which time a developing unit replacement screen will appear.

When a life value is reached When printing is prohibited

A2WUT2E093DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



83

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

12.3.6 Toner scattering prevention

• To prevent the image and machine interior from being dirtied, a toner filter is installed at

the rear of the machine, and the toner suction fan motor that work together sucks toner

particles rising up during development.

• The toner filter comes together with the drum unit/K.

12.3.7 Image stabilization control

• An image stabilization control is automatically performed, when the developing unit/K or

drum unit/K is replaced with a new one.

• For details, see “24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL”.

[1] Toner filter [2] Discharged to the outside of the machine

[3] Toner suction fan motor (FM7) [4] Developing unit/K

[5] Toner scattered [6] Air flow of drawn air

[7] Frame [8] Exhaust duct

A2WUT2C039DA

[3]

[4]

[1]

[2]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

8/21/2019 652 Service


13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

84

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION

13.1 Configuration

A2WUT2C042DA

[4]

[3]

[8]

[2]

[5]

[1]

[10]

[9]

[11]

[10]

[13]

[14]

[12]

[9]

[15]

[7]

[6]

[16]

A0P0T2C013DA

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 13. 1st TRANSFER SECTION

85

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

[1] Transfer belt unit [2] Transfer belt motor (M1)

[3] Pressure welding alienation sensor/K

(PS51)

[4] 1st transfer pressure retraction motor

(M21)

[5] Cleaner motor (M38) [6] Transfer belt cleaning section

[7] Waste toner conveying relay section [8] Pressure cam

[9] Retraction roller [10] 1st transfer roller/K[11] Transfer belt drive roller [12] Transfer belt driven roller/1

[13] Cleaning brush 1 [14] Cleaning brush 2

[15] Imaging unit/K [16] Transfer belt driven roller/2

8/21/2019 652 Service



86

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

13.2 Drive

13.2.1 Transfer belt drive

[1] Transfer belt drive roller [2] Transfer belt motor (M1)

[3] Transfer belt [4] Transfer belt driven roller/1

[5] Transfer belt driven roller/2 [6] Transfer belt rotatory direction

A2WUT2C043DA

[2]

[3]

[1]

[6]

[6]

[5]

[4]

8/21/2019 652 Service



87

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

13.2.2 Transfer belt cleaning section drive

A. Cleaning brush drive

B. Toner collecting screw drive

[1] Cleaner motor (M38) [2] Cleaning brush 1

[3] Toner collecting roller 1 [4] Cleaning brush 2

[5] Toner collecting roller 2 [6] Transfer belt

[7] Toner collecting screw

A2WUT2C045DA

[1]

[2]

[4]

[5]

[3]

[2] [6]

[7] [4]

[5]

[3]

[1] Transfer belt driven roller shaft [2] Toner collecting screw

[3] Toner agitating paddle

A2WUT2C046DA

[2]

[3]

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



88

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

13.2.3 1st transfer roller drive

[1] 1st transfer roller/K [2] Retraction roller


(PS51)

[4] Sliding plate


(M21)

[6] Cam

[7] Transfer belt

A2WUT2C047DA

[5] [3]

[6]

[6]

[1]

[2]

[4]

[7][4]

8/21/2019 652 Service



89

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

13.3 Operation

13.3.1 1st transfer roller control

• The machine is provided with a mechanism that presses the 1st transfer roller/K up

against the inside of the transfer belt during the 1st transfer stage. The 1st transfer pres-

sure retraction motor provides the drive for this operation.

• The cam causes the 1st transfer roller/K and retraction roller to perform pressure/retrac-

tion operation.• The pressure welding alienation sensor/K detects the retraction position of the 1st trans-

fer roller/K.

• To detect pressure and retraction positions, the sliding plate position is detected.

• In the pressure operation, a predetermined pulse controls the stop position.

• In order to reduce the first print time, the machine uses the cam that can turn both for-

ward and backward. With the least rotation of the cam, the 1st transfer roller/K position

can be changed.

• The pressure operation starts when a print cycle starts, and the retraction operation

starts when the print cycle completes.

A2WUT2C048DA

[2]

[2]

[8] [10][9] [11] [12]

[3]

[1]

[7]

[6]

[5]

[4]

8/21/2019 652 Service



90

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

A. Retraction roller control• At the same time that the pressure position of the 1st transfer roller/K is changed, the

machine moves the retraction roller up and down to change the position of the surface of

the transfer belt to suit the corresponding position in the specific print mode or standby

state.

• Changing the cam stop position moves the retraction lever, which results in the retraction

roller moving up or down.

• The retraction roller is driven by the cam.


(PS51)

[2] Sliding plate


(M21)

[4] Cam

[5] Retraction roller [6] Roller pressure/retraction

[7] 1st transfer roller/K [8] Retraction roller (When pressed)

[9] 1st transfer roller/K (When pressed) [10] Transfer belt

[11] Retraction roller (When retracted) [12] 1st transfer roller/K (When retracted)

8/21/2019 652 Service



91

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

13.3.2 Transfer belt cleaning

• To scrape residual toner off the surface of the transfer belt, the transfer belt is provided

with cleaning brush 1 and 2.

• Cleaning brush 1 and 2 are a rotary brush. To enhance its ability to scrape residual toner

off the surface of the transfer belt, the brush is turned in a direction opposite to that of the

transfer belt. The cleaner motor provides the drive for this system.

• During a print cycle, an image stabilization operation, the 2nd transfer roller cleaning,

and other states whenever the transfer belt operates.

• The waste toner conveyance screw conveys waste toner collected by the cleaning brush

1 and 2 to the front side of the machine.

• Waste toner is conveyed to the waste toner conveying relay section from the toner col-

lecting port located in the front side of the waste toner conveyance screw. Then it is col-

lected into the waste toner box. (For details, see “15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION”.)

• The toner collecting port located in the front side of the waste toner conveyance screw of

the transfer belt unit is provided with a shutter mechanism. Mounting the transfer belt unit

pushes the shutter at the toner collecting port, opening the toner collecting port. Remov-

ing the transfer belt unit, on the other hand, closes the shutter and toner is thereby pre-

vented from spilling from the toner collecting port.

[1] Transfer belt [2] Cleaning brush 1

[3] Toner collecting roller 1 [4] Toner collecting roller 2

[5] Toner collecting screw [6] Cleaning brush 2

[7] Transfer belt rotatory direction [8] Shutter (Closed)

[9] Shutter (Opened) [10] Toner flow

A2WUT2C049DA

[9]

[10]

[8]

[7]

[2] [1]

[5]

[6]

[4]

[3]

8/21/2019 652 Service



92

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

13.3.3 Image stabilization control

• An image stabilization control sequence is automatically performed when a new transfer

belt unit is mounted in the machine and the retraction of new transfer belt unit is carried

out from the service mode.

• For details, see “24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL”.

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION

93

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION

14.1 Configuration

A2WUT2C050DA[8]

[3]

[4]

[6]

[9]

[2] [1]

[7]

[5]

A0P0T2C016DA A0P0T2C015DA

Temperature/humidity sensor(TEM/HUMS)

8/21/2019 652 Service


14. 2nd TRANSFER SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

94

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

[1] 2nd transfer section (Front view) [2] Charge neutralizing needle

[3] 2nd transfer roller [4] Shutter

[5] Temperature/humidity sensor (TEM/HUMS) [6] IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F)

[7] 2nd transfer section (Rear view) [8] 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor (M3)

[9] Pressure welding alienation sensor (PS50)

8/21/2019 652 Service



95

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

14.2 Drive

14.2.1 Pressure/retraction drive

14.2.2 2nd transfer roller drive

A2WUT2C051DA

2nd transfer pressure retractionmotor (M3)

IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F)

Pressure welding alienation sensor (PS50)

Cam

Pressure lever

Shutter

2nd transfer roller

[1] Transfer belt drive roller [2] 2nd transfer roller

[3] Transfer belt [4] Transfer belt drive roller rotatory direction

[5] Transfer belt rotatory direction [6] 2nd transfer roller rotatory direction

A2WUT2C052DA

[2]

[1]

[6]

[5]

[4]

[5]

[5]

[3]

8/21/2019 652 Service



96

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

14.3 Operation

14.3.1 2nd transfer roller control

A. 2nd transfer roller pressure/retraction• The 2nd transfer roller has a pressure/retraction mechanism which presses to and

retracts from the transfer belt so the patterns made on the transfer belt except by print-

ing, such as detection pattern creation during image stabilization operation, will not affect

the 2nd transfer roller.• The pressure operation starts when a print cycle starts, and the retraction operation

starts when the print cycle completes.

• Pressure/retraction operation

1. Drive from the 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor is transmitted to the drive

gear.

2. The drive gear rotates to rotate the cam. Pressing down the pressure lever will

press the 2nd transfer roller against the transfer belt.

3. At this time, the pressure welding alienation sensor detects that the 2nd transfer

roller reaches the pressure position. The 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor is

stopped.

4. The cam rotates further when the 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor turns ON

again. Releasing the pressure lever will move the 2nd transfer roller to the retrac-

tion position. At this time, the pressure welding alienation sensor detects that the

roller reaches the retraction position. The 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor is

stopped.

A0P0T2C017DA

4036ma2168c0 4036ma2023c1

2nd transferroller

Cam

When retracted When pressed

Drive roller

2nd transferroller

Cam

2nd transfer pressureretraction motor (M3)

Pressure welding alienationsensor (PS50)

8/21/2019 652 Service



97

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

14.3.2 2nd transfer control

• The toner on the transfer belt is transferred onto the paper when the paper is transported

between the transfer belt and the 2nd transfer roller.

• To adjust the 2nd transfer output to the correct voltage, ATVC system is installed.

A constant current is output to the 2nd transfer roller to measure voltage. The measured

voltage is corrected to be used for automatic adjustment of the 2nd transfer output volt-

age.

• The ATVC operation is performed after the power switch is turned ON. (Mainly just before

image stabilization operation)

Or, it is performed before the machine starts a print cycle for the first time after the tem-

perature change inside the machine went over the threshold.

• Overview of ATVC operation

Constant current

2nd transfer roller

Transfer belt

Transfer belt drive roller

HV2

Output a constant current to the 2ndtransfer roller.

Calculate the resistance value of the2nd transfer roller.

Determine the 2nd transfer outputvoltage.

Printer control board (PRCB)

Measures the voltage

8/21/2019 652 Service



98

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

14.3.3 2nd transfer roller cleaning

• To remove residual toner off the surface of the 2nd transfer roller, a +/- DC bias is applied

alternately to the roller, thereby moving the residual toner to the surface of the transfer

belt.

• The cleaning brush then scrapes off the toner on the surface of the transfer belt.

A. Cleaning operation timing• The sequence is carried when the power switch are turned ON or each door is opened

and closed when a print cycle has been abnormally terminated due to a misfeed or anoccurrence of the malfunction.

• The sequence is carried out at the end of a print cycle, if the cumulative count since the

preceding 2nd transfer roller cleaning sequence exceeds 300 during the print cycle.

• If the cumulative count since the preceding 2nd transfer roller cleaning sequence

exceeds 3,000 during a print cycle, the print cycle is interrupted and the cleaning

sequence is carried out. The print cycle is resumed as soon as the cleaning sequence is

completed.

[1] Residual toner [2] The residual toner is transferred to the

transfer belt

[3] The residual toner is transferred [4] The residual toner is collected

[5] Cleaning brush 1 [6] Cleaning brush 2

[7] Transfer belt [8] 2nd transfer roller

A2WUT2C053DA

[5]

[6]

[8]

[9]

[1]

[4]

[7]

[2][3]


216 mm or less 1

Over 216 mm 2

8/21/2019 652 Service



99

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

14.3.4 Paper separation control

• The charge neutralizing needle is provided to prevent the paper from being wound

around the transfer belt.

• The charge neutralizing needle is located downstream of the 2nd transfer roller in the

paper feeding direction.

• A negative charge, which is the reverse polarity to the positive output from the 2nd trans-

fer roller, to the charge neutralizing needle to remove electric charge remaining on the

paper which has undergone the 2nd transfer stage.

• The output of the charge neutralizing needle is switched automatically using the high

voltage unit/2 according to the paper type and the environmental conditions, and whether

the print cycle is for printing the 1st side or 2nd.

• In order to separate thin paper or curled paper caused by 2-sided printing from the trans-

fer belt without fail after the 2nd transfer, transfer belt separator claws are mounted at 3

places.

[1] Paper separator claws [2] Transfer belt

[3] 2nd transfer roller [4] Charge neutralizing needle

A2WUT2C054DA

[2]

[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



100

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

14.3.5 Sensor protection

• The IDC sensor can be contaminated with toner since it is located under the transfer belt.

There is a shutter mechanism provided for the sensor to prevent it from being contami-

nated.

• The shutter is closed and opened in time with the 2nd transfer roller being pressed and

retracted. When the 2nd transfer roller is retracted, the pressure pin presses the shutter

holder, causing the shutter at the IDC sensor section to move to the front side.

• When the 2nd transfer roller is pressed, on the other hand, the shutter at the IDC sensor

section is moved to the rear by the spring force and closed.

2nd transfer roller Shutter

Retracted Open

Pressed Closed

[1] 2nd transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) [2] IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F)

[3] Shutter [4] Pressure pin

[5] Shutter holder [6] Shutter (Opened)

[7] Shutter (Closed)

A2WUT2C055DA

[2]

[7]

[6]

[5]

[1]

[3]

[2]

[4]

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION

101

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION

15.1 Configuration

• The toner collecting section is composed of the waste toner box and waste toner convey-

ing relay section.

A2WUT2C056DA

[4]

[10]

[8][9]

[1][2]

[2]

[15]

[14]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[13][12]

[11]

[3]

8/21/2019 652 Service


15. TONER COLLECTING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

102

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

[1] Waste toner box (Front view) [2] Waste toner collecting port (Drum unit)

[3] Transfer belt cleaning section [4] Waste toner conveying relay section

[5] Waste toner agitating motor lock sensor

(PS23)

[6] Agitating screw/1

[7] Agitating screw/2 [8] Paddle

[9] Waste toner collecting port (Transfer beltunit)

[10] Waste toner box (Rear view)

[11] Waste toner box set sensor (PS53) [12] Waste developer discharge port (Develop-

ing unit)

[13] Waste toner full sensor (PS54) [14] Waste toner relay screw

[15] Waste toner agitating motor (M20)

8/21/2019 652 Service



103

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

15.2 Drive

• The agitating paddle and waste toner relay screw in the waste toner conveying relay sec-

tion are driven and rotated by the waste toner agitating motor.

• The agitating screw 1/2 in the waste toner box is driven and rotated by the waste toner

agitating motor.

• The waste toner agitating motor lock sensor monitors the condition of the waste toner

agitating motor rotation.

[1] Paddle [2] Waste toner agitating motor (M20)

[3] Waste toner relay screw [4] Waste toner agitating motor lock sensor

(PS23)

[5] Actuator [6] Agitating screw/2

[7] Agitating screw/1 [8] Waste toner flow from developing unit

[9] Waste toner flow from waste toner convey-

ing relay section

A2WUT2C057DA

[2]

[3]

[6]

[5]

[4]

[7][9]

[9]

[9]

[1]

[8]

8/21/2019 652 Service



104

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

15.3 Operation

15.3.1 Waste toner collecting path to the waste toner box

• The waste toner collecting path is consist of the three following path.

[1] Waste toner collecting path from the drum

unit

[2] Waste developer collecting path from the

developing unit

[3] Waste toner collecting path from the trans-

fer belt unit

A2WUT2C058DA

[1]

[2]][2]

[3]

8/21/2019 652 Service



105

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

A. Waste toner collecting path from the drum unit• The toner collecting screw conveys toner collected from the drum unit to the waste toner

box.

[1] Toner collecting screw (Drum unit) [2] Toner flow


A2WUT2C059DA

[2]

[2]

[1]

[1]

[3]

[3]

8/21/2019 652 Service



106

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. Waste toner collecting path from the transfer belt unit• Waste toner conveyed by the waste toner collecting screw of the transfer belt is conveyed

to the waste toner conveying relay section.

• Waste toner conveyed to the waste toner conveying relay section is conveyed to the front

side of the machine by the waste toner relay screw.

• Waste toner is collected in the waste toner box through the toner collecting port located

at the front side of the waste toner relay screw.

• The toner collecting port is provided with a shutter mechanism. Mounting the waste tonerbox pushes the shutter at the toner collecting port, opening the toner collecting port.

Removing the waste toner box, on the other hand, closes the shutter and toner is thereby

prevented from spilling from the toner collecting port.

[1] Agitating screw/1 [2] Toner flow

[3] Paddle [4] Waste toner relay screw

A2WUT2C061DA

[2]

[1]

[2]

[4]

[3]

[4]

[3][1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



107

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

C. Waste developer collecting path from the developing unit• The conveying screw (supply screw) convey waste developer collected from the develop-

ing unit to the waste toner box. (For details, see “12.3.2 Auto refining developing system”

of “12. DEVELOPING UNIT SECTION”.

[1] Developer flow [2] Conveying screw (supply screw) (Develop-

ing unit)


A2WUT2C060DA[3]

[3]

[2]

[2]

[1] [1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



108

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

15.3.2 Toner path in the waste toner box

• The waste toner box consists of the waste toner collecting section and the waste devel-

oper collecting section.

• The waste toner collecting section and the waste developer collecting section are

arranged independently of each other, each storing waste toner and waste developer,

respectively.

[1] Waste toner collecting por t (Drum unit) [2] Waste toner flow

[3] Agitating screw/1 [4] Waste toner collecting port (Transfer belt

unit)

[5] Waste developer flow [6] Agitating screw/2

[7] Waste developer discharge port (Develop-

ing unit)

A2WUT2C062DA

[2]

[1]

[7]

[4]

[5]

[2]

[6]

[3]

8/21/2019 652 Service



109

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

A. Waste toner collecting section• Waste toner conveyed from the waste toner conveying relay section collecting port

(transfer belt unit) and the drum unit collecting port is stored in the waste toner collecting

section. When the waste toner stored reaches agitating screw/1, it is conveyed by agitat-

ing screw/1 to the center in the waste toner box to thereby even out waste toner in the

waste toner collecting section.

• The waste toner agitating motor operates when the “TCR sensor performs an automatic

adjustment (image stabilization control mode 1)”, “toner is forcefully replenished” or“transfer belt is driven”, and the agitating screw is rotated.

• The amount of waste toner accumulated in the waste toner collecting section is not mon-

itored. (The near-full/full detection inside the toner collecting section is not performed.)

[1] Waste toner collecting por t (Drum unit) [2] Agitating screw/1

[3] Waste toner collecting port (Transfer belt

unit)

[4] Waste toner collected

[5] Waste toner flow

[1]

[4][4]

[3]

[5] [5]

[2]

A2WUT2C063DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



110

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. Waste developer collecting section• Waste developer conveyed from the developing unit collecting port is stored in the waste

developer collecting section. The waste developer is conveyed by agitating screw/2 to the

left in the waste toner box to thereby even out waste developer in the waste developer

collecting section.

• There is the waste toner box near-full detection window provided at the left portion of the

waste toner box to monitor the amount of developer accumulated in the developer col-

lecting section. For the waste toner near-full/full detection, see “15.3.4 Waste toner fulldetection”.

• The waste toner agitating motor operates when the “TCR sensor performs an automatic

adjustment (image stabilization control mode 1)”, “toner is forcefully replenished” or

“transfer belt is driven”, and the agitating screw is rotated.

[1] Waste developer discharge port (Develop-

ing unit)

[2] Waste toner near-full detection window

[3] Waste toner full sensor (PS54) [4] Agitating screw/2

[5] Waste developer flow [6] Waste toner collected

A2WUT2C064DA

[5]

[6]

[4]

[3] [2]

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



111

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

15.3.3 Waste toner box set detection

• The waste toner box set sensor is provided to detect a waste toner box loaded in posi-

tion. Timing for this detection is when the power switch is turned ON, and the front door is

closed. If the waste toner box is found to be out of position, the machine inhibits the initi-

ation of a new print cycle.

[1] Waste toner box (Rear view) [2] Waste toner box set sensor (PS53)

[3] Waste toner box setting direction

A2WUT2C065DA[2]

[3]

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



112

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

15.3.4 Waste toner box full detection

• An interrupter-type photosensor is used to detect a waste toner box full condition.

• When the waste toner box near-full detection window located in the waste developer col-

lecting section of the waste toner box blocks the waste toner full sensor for a given period

of time or over, the machine determines that the waste toner box is nearly full of waste

toner.

• At this time, the waste toner box near-full warning is given on the control panel.

• The machine detects a waste toner box full condition after a predetermined number of

printed pages are produced after the detection of the waste toner box near full condition.

• At the same time that the waste toner box near full condition is detected, the counter

dedicated to the waste toner box inside the machine starts counting. When the count

reaches 64,000, the machine detects a waste toner box full condition and prohibits the

start of any new print cycle to be run thereafter. (The print job being run is also inter-

rupted.)

• The capacity of the waste toner box is equivalent to 160,000 printed pages as converted

at A4 size/image density 6% (1-sided prints). (The number of printed pages varies

depending on the image density of the printed pages.)

A2WUT2E087DA

Near-full condition warning display Full condition warning display

[1][2]

[2]

[3] [4]

[1]

[1] [2]

[3]

8/21/2019 652 Service



113

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

NOTE• The warning screen to be displayed is changed by specifying the person who replaces

the unit in the “System 2” → “Unit Change” in the Service Mode. The illustration showsthe message when “User” is selected.

• The default setting is “User”.


A. Count method• The counter value is incremented according to the image density information of the print

image sent from the MFP control board.

• Calculation is based on a solid image of A4 size that serves as 100% reference value

(e.g.: A3 solid image is 200%).

• Up to about 3,000 printed pages can be produced, as converted at A4 size/image den-sity 6% (1-sided prints). (The number of printed pages varies depending on the image

density of the printed pages.)

B. Reset the waste toner box full display• After the waste toner box has been replaced with a new one and the waste toner full sen-

sor has been unblocked for a given period of time, the machine cancels the printing-dis-

abled condition, while at the same time automatically clearing the counter exclusive for

waste toner.

[1] Waste toner full sensor (PS54) [2] Waste toner near-full detection window

[3] When the amount of developer is low [4] When the amount of developer is near-full

condition

Image density (%) Count value

0% to less than 3% 11

Over 3% up to 7% 20

Over 7% up to 10% 32

Over 10% up to 20% 64

Over 20% up to 50% 160

Over 50% up to 100% 320Over 100% up to 200% 640

Over 200% 1,280

8/21/2019 652 Service


16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

114

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)

16.1 Configuration

16.1.1 Major components

• Tray1 and 2 have same sensor position.

Tray2 sensor identification

A00JT2C286AA

Tray1 paper feed sensor (PS5)Tray1 device detection sensor (PS1)

Tray1 near empty sensor (PS3)

Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1)

Tray1 CD paper size sensor/1 (PS7)

Tray1 paper emptysensor (PS2)

Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4)

Tray1 upper limit sensor (PS6)

Tray1 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS8)

A00JT2C277AA

Tray2 upper limit sensor (PS14) Tray2 paper feed sensor (PS13)

Tray2 near empty sensor (PS11) Tray2 paper empty sensor (PS11)

Tray2 device detection sensor (PS9) Tray2 CD paper size sensor/1 (PS15)

Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2) Tray2 CD paper size sensor/2 (PS16)

Tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) Tray2 paper empty display board (PEIB/2)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 16. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY1, TRAY2)

115

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

16.1.2 Layout of sensors and rollers

A00JT2C213AA

Timing roller sensor (PS38)

Tray1 vertical transportsensor (PS4)

Tray1 paper feed roller

Tray2 vertical transport sensor(PS12)


Timing roller

Tray1 vertical transport roller

First sheet of paper

Second sheet of paper

Tray1 paper feed sensor (PS5)


8/21/2019 652 Service



116

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

16.2 Drive

• Drive parts are arranged in the same way in tray1 and 2.

• Take-up motor drives the tray1 and 2 paper feed rollers.

• Each paper feed roller has a clutch that is turned ON when it needs to be driven.

A00JT2C286AA

Tray1 lift-up motor (M6)


Take-up motor (M22)



Tray1 paper feed clutch (CL1)

A0P0T5C031DA

Tray1

Tray 2

Take-up motor (M22) Tray2 vertical transport roller





8/21/2019 652 Service



117

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

16.3 Operation

16.3.1 Up/down control

A. Up operation• Paper lifting plate B is located under paper lifting plate A.

• The lifting plate drive shaft of the tray1(2) lift-up motor is connected to paper lifting plate

2.

• When the drive shaft of the tray1(2) lift-up motor rotates, paper lifting plate B raises paperlifting plate A.

B. Down operation• When the tray is slid out of the machine, the coupling and the lifting plate drive shaft of

the tray1(2) lift-up motor are disconnected from each other.

• When the driving force of the tray1(2) lift-up motor is released from the lifting plate drive

shaft, the paper lifting plate starts lowering by its own weight.

A00JT2C314AA

A00JT2C315AA

Tray1 upper limit sensor (PS6)Tray2 upper limit sensor (PS14)

Tray1 lift-up motor (M6)Tray2 lift-up motor (M8)

Paper lifting plate B

Paper lifting plate A

Lifting plate drive shaft

8/21/2019 652 Service



118

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

C. Operation timing(1) When the tray is slid in• When the tray is slid into the machine, the tray1(2) device detection sensor is blocked.

The machine then determines that the tray is slid into position.

• The paper lifting plate is lowering when the tray is slid out, so that the tray1(2) upper limit

sensor is unblocked.

• Determining that the tray1(2) upper limit sensor is unblocked, the machine lets the

tray1(2) lift-up motor rotate to start the up operation of the paper lifting plate.• When the paper stack is raised to a predetermined height after the up operation of the

paper lifting plate has been started, the actuator blocks the tray1(2) upper limit sensor.

• Determining that the tray1(2) upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the lift-up

motor to complete the up operation of the paper lifting plate.

• Control is provided to make sure that only one tray performs the up operation at one

time.

• If the tray is slid out during the up operation of the paper lifting plate and accordingly the

tray1(2) device detection sensor is unblocked, the up operation of the paper lifting plate is

terminated.

(2) During a print cycle• When the amount of paper decreases as the unit keeps printing, the pick-up roller will

gradually come down to unblock the upper limit sensor. The lift-up motor will rotate again

to lift up the paper lifting plate.

• When the upper limit sensor is blocked, the lift-up motor will stop to stop lifting the paper

lifting plate.

• The sequence of these operations is repeated to keep constant the pressure between

the pick-up roller and paper stack (paper take-up pressure) regardless of the amount of

paper still available for use.

A0P0T5E108DA

Tray1 (Tray2) Set detection sensor

Tray1 (Tray2) Upper limit sensor

Tray1 (Tray2) Lift-up motor

Tray set

Lifting completed

Paper consumption

8/21/2019 652 Service



119

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

16.3.2 Paper feed control

• Tray1 and Tray2 are controlled in the same control procedure.

A. Pick-up control• The take-up motor is energized by the print start signal.

• The tray1(2) paper feed clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of

time after the print start signal.

• As the tray1(2) paper feed clutch is energized, the driving force of the take-up motor is

transmitted to the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller. As a result, the pick-up roller

picks up a sheet of paper and transports it onto the paper feed roller.

• The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the tray1(2) vertical transport roller.

• The take-up motor and the tray1(2) paper feed clutch are deenergized when the tray1(2)

vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray1(2) vertical transport roller

along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed off from the tray1(2) verti-

cal transport roller.

• The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller are driven by the moving paper, continuing to

rotate.

• The pick-up roller and the paper feed roller stop rotating as the paper moves past them.

A0P0T5C032DA

Take-up motor (M22)

tray1 paper feedclutch (CL1)

Pick-up rollerPaper feed roller

Paper separator roller

Torque limiter

8/21/2019 652 Service



120

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. Separation control• The paper separator roller is driven via a torque limiter in the direction opposite the paper

transport direction.

• The paper separator roller is pressed against the paper feed roller by the operating pres-

sure generated by pressure of the spring and torque of the torque limiter.

• The operating pressure of the paper feed roller, paper separator roller, and the torque

limiter serves as the limit torque for double feed prevention.

• If there is no sheet of paper or only one sheet of paper between the paper separatorroller and paper feed roller, the limit torque is exceeded, so that the paper separator roller

follows the rotation of the paper feed roller.

• If there are two or more sheets of paper between the paper separator roller and paper

feed roller, the limit torque is greater than the friction force of the paper, so that the paper

separator roller rotates backward.

• The backward rotation of the paper separator roller allows the lower sheet of paper in

contact with the paper separator roller to be returned back into the tray. This properly

separates the sheets of paper.

A0P0T5C033DA

Pick-up roller

Paper feed roller

Paper separator rollerPaper

8/21/2019 652 Service



121

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

C. Paper transport control• The tray1(2) vertical transport motor is energized after the lapse of a predetermined

period of time after the print start signal.

• The driving force of the tray1(2) vertical transport motor is transmitted to the tray1(2) ver-

tical transport roller. Rotation of the tray1(2) vertical transport roller transports the paper

onto the timing roller (registration roller).

• The tray1(2) vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray1(2) vertical trans-

port roller along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed off from thetray1(2) vertical transport roller.

• If the tray1(2) vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper

even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a

paper misfeed occurs at the vertical transport section.

• If the paper reaches earlier than the predetermined time, the tray1(2) vertical transport

motor is decelerated to correct the timing at which the paper reaches the timing roller

(registration roller).

(1) Operation timing• Tray1 and Tray2 are controlled in the same operation timing.

Take-up motor (M22)

Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1)




Start key ON Timing roller drive

A0P0T5E114DA

Vertical transport sensor ON

*Tray1 paper feed control timing

8/21/2019 652 Service



122

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

D. Paper feed speed reduction control• When paper reaches the tray1(2) paper feed sensor, if the interval between the paper

and the preceding paper is short, the take-up motor speed is reduced temporarily to

adjust the paper interval to the proper one.

• When paper reaches the tray1(2) vertical transport sensor, if the interval between the

paper and the preceding paper is short, the tray1(2) vertical transport motor reduces its

speed or stops in order to adjust the paper interval to the proper one.

• Paper from the tray1 and tray2 is transported at the same speed with the system speed.• If the second sheet of paper reaches the paper feed sensor during the paper take-up

sequence for the first sheet of paper, the system determines that there is a double feed

occurring and the speed of the paper feed roller (take-up motor) is reduced during the

take-up of the second sheet of paper to ensure that there is a good distance between the

two sheets of paper.

A00JT2C317AA

Preceding paper

Paper to be controlled

Sensor

Paper interval

8/21/2019 652 Service



123

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

E. Downstream exit control during multi-print cycle• The following terms are used for convenience’ sake throughout this chapter.

Upstream: Refers to the source side of paper supply relative to the paper feeding direc-

tion

Downstream: Refers to the destination side of paper transport relative to the paper feed-

ing direction

• If a paper misfeed occurs at the paper feed section which is upstream in paper transport,

the print cycle is not brought to an immediate stop; rather, the machine allows a sheet ofpaper, for which the print cycle is to be completed at a downstream side, to continue

undergoing the current print cycle and feeds the printed page out after completion of the

current print cycle.

(1) Types of paper misfeed governed by downstream exit control

(2) Paper pass

Misfeed at tray1 Misfeed at bypass paper feed section

Misfeed at tray2 Misfeed at LCT paper feed section

Misfeed at tray3 Misfeed at vertical transport section

Misfeed at tray4

A00JT2C245AA

Paper exit section

Switchback rollerADU transport roller 1

Timing roller

ADU transport roller 3

Transport sensor/2 (PS48)


ADU transport sensor/1 (PS47)


Duplex section

Fusing section

Registrationsection

Transfer section

Paper feed section

8/21/2019 652 Service



124

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

(3) 1-sided printing

Operation 1

• In consecutive 1-sided printing, 4th sheet causes a jam-

ming at the paper feed tray section.

• 1st sheet after an image transfer is remained at the fusing

section and the paper exit section.

• 2nd sheet before an image transfer is remained at the ver-

tical conveyance section and the registration section.

• 3rd sheet before an image transfer is remained at the

paper feed section and the vertical conveyance section.

Sheet before a 1-sidedimage transfer

Sheet after a 1-sidedimage transfer

JammingA0P0T5E110DA

Operation 2

• Feed and convey 4th sheet is stopped.

• Exit 1st sheet.

• Transfer/fuse images on 2nd sheet.

• Convey 3rd sheet to transfer images.

A0P0T5C078DA

Operation 2

• Exit 2nd sheet.

• Fuse 3rd sheet to exit paper.

A0P0T5C079DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



125

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

(4) 2-sided printing

Operation 4

• Open a cover over the duplex section to remove 3rd and 4th sheet remained in the

duplex section.

NOTE

• 3rd and 4th sheets are conveyed to the duplex section which allowed removing ajamming easily. 2-sided images are not printed on a sheet conveyed to the duplexsection.

Operation 1

• In consecutive 2-sided printing, 5th sheet causes a jam-

ming at the paper feed tray section.

• 1st sheet after a 2-sided image transfer is remained at the

paper exit section.

• 2nd sheet before a 1-sided image fusing is remained at the

duplex section.

• 3rd sheet before a 1-sided image fusing is remained at the

paper exit section.

• 4th sheet before an image transfer is remained at the verti-

cal conveyance section and the registration section.

Sheet before a 1-sidedimage transfer



A0P0T5E111DAJamming

Operation 2

• Feed and convey 5th sheet is stopped.

• Exit 1st sheet.

• Transfer/fuse 2-sided images on 2nd sheet.

• Convey 3rd sheet to the duplex section.• Transfer/fuse 1-sided images on 4th sheet to convey to the

paper exit section.

A0P0T5C081DA

Operation 3

• Exit 2nd sheet.

• Convey 3rd sheet to the duplex section to stop.

• Stop 4th sheet at the duplex section.

A0P0T5C082DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



126

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

16.3.3 Paper size detection control

A. Main scanning direction• The size in the main scanning direction is detected based on the combination of tray1(2)

CD paper size sensor/1 and tray1(2) CD paper size sensor/2 being unblocked or

blocked.

• Tray1(2) CD paper size sensor/1 and tray1(2) CD paper size sensor/2 are unblocked or

blocked by the paper width detection plate provided in the paper width guide plate.

B. Sub scanning direction• The size in the sub scanning direction is detected based on the combination of ON or

OFF position of switches 1 to 4 mounted on paper size detect board/1,/2.

• Each of switches 1 to 4 is turned ON or OFF by the paper length detection plate con-

nected to the paper length guide plate.

A0P0T5C007DA

Guide

Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1)Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2)

1234

8/21/2019 652 Service



127

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

C. Sheet size determination• Combination of the width of the main scanning and the length of the sub scanning will

decide a sheet size.

*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for FLS.

220 x 330 mm, 8 × 13, 81 / 8 × 131 / 4, 81 / 4 × 13, 81 / 2 × 13

Switch/sensor states

Detection switch/

Detection sensor

Paper size



Tray1 CD paper size

sensor/1 (PS7)

Tray2 CD paper size

sensor/1 (PS15)

Tray1 CD paper size

sensor/2 (PS8)

Tray2 CD paper size

sensor/2 (PS16)Switch 1 Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4

A3 H H/L H H H L

B4 H H H L H L

A4S L H/L H H L H

A4 L L L L H L

B5S L L H L L L

B5 H H L L H L

A5S L L L L L L

12 × 18 L H H L H L

11 × 17 H L H H H H81 / 2 × 14 H H H L L H

81 / 2 × 11S H L L H L H

81 / 2 × 11 L L L L H H

FLS *1 H H H H L H

8K (8 Open) S

(270 mm × 390

mm)

H H L H H H

16K (16 Open)

(270 mm × 195

mm)

H L L L H H

Switch/sensorPhysical state

HIGH signal LOW signal

Paper size detect board/1, 2 : Switches 1 to 4 ON OFF

Tray1 CD paper size sensor/1, 2 Blocked UnblockedTray1 CD paper size sensor/1, 2

8/21/2019 652 Service



128

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

16.3.4 Remaining paper detection control

A. Paper near-empty detection• The tray1(2) near empty sensor detects a paper near-empty condition of the tray.

• As paper is consumed, the position of the near empty detection actuator provided at the

lifting plate drive shaft of the lift-up motor is raised.

• When the near empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which the tray1(2) near

empty sensor is blocked, the machine detects a near-empty condition.

• A near-empty condition is detected when the amount of paper still available for use

becomes about 50 ± 30 sheets (about 50 sheets in terms of paper weighing 80 g/m2).

B. Paper empty detection• The tray1(2) empty sensor detects a paper empty condition of the tray.

• As paper is consumed, the position of the empty detection actuator provided beside the

paper feed roller is raised.

• When the empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which the tray1(2) empty

sensor is blocked, the machine detects a paper empty condition.

A00JT2C311AA

A near-empty condition

Tray1 near empty sensor (PS3)Tray2 near empty sensor (PS11)

Tray1 lift-up motor (M6)Tray2 lift-up motor (M8)

A00JT2C312AA

An empty condition

Tray1 paper empty sensor (PS2)Tray2 paper empty sensor (PS10)

8/21/2019 652 Service



129

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

C. Remaining paper level display• The amount of remaining paper is indicated by the LED on the right side of each tray and

by the screen of the control panel.

• The following shows how the level is displayed.

*1: LED turns OFF when Paper Remainder is set to Type 2: Service Mode − System 1 −

Machine State LED Setting − Paper Remainder.

16.3.5 Paper temperature detection control

• Paper temperature is detected as the machine interior temperature detected at the paper

feed section by the paper temperature thermistor located in the paper feed section.

• The machine interior temperature at the paper feed section is used as data for controllingthe fusing temperature during printing. For “temperature control during printing”, see the

fusing section.

Tray condition Empty Near emptyOther statuses

(Including during lift-up and no tray conditions)

LED ON Blinking *1 OFF

A00JT2C269AA

Tray1 paper empty indicator board (PEIB/1)


A0P0T5C009DA

Paper temperature thermistor (TH8)

8/21/2019 652 Service



130

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

17. PAPER FEED SECTION (TRAY3, TRAY4)

17.1 Configuration

17.1.1 Major components (tray3)

A0P0T5C073DA

A00JT2C300AA




Tray3 paper feed section

Tray3 paper empty sensor (PS19)

Horizontal transport section (upper section)

8/21/2019 652 Service



131

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

17.1.2 Major components (tray3 horizontal transport section)

Tray3 horizontal transport sectionTray4 paper feed section

A0P0T5C072DA

A0P0T5C011DA

Intermediate roller

Horizontal transport roller 1

Horizontaltransportroller 2

Horizontal transportclutch (CL3)

Transport motor (M25)

Vertical transport motor (M26)

8/21/2019 652 Service



132

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

17.1.3 Major components (tray4)

A00JT2C294AA



Tray4 near empty sensor (PS25) Tray4 paper empty sensor (PS24)

A00JT2C276AA

8/21/2019 652 Service



133

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

17.1.4 Layout of sensors and rollers

A00JT2C227AA

Intermediate roller

Tray2 verticaltransport roller


OHP detect sensor(PS40)

Timing roller sensor(PS38)

Timing roller

Intermediate roller sensor

(PS28)





Tray3 transport roller


Horizontal transport sensor (PS29)





8/21/2019 652 Service



134

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

17.2 Drive

17.2.1 Tray3

17.2.2 Tray3 horizontal transport

A00JT2C301AA


Tray3

Tray3 transport clutch (CL6)




Coupling


Tray3 take-up axis

A0P0T5C091DA


Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)


Intermediate roller



8/21/2019 652 Service



135

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

17.2.3 Tray4

A00JT2C295AA


Tray4





Coupling

Tray4 take-up axis


8/21/2019 652 Service



136

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

17.3 Operation

17.3.1 Up/down control

• The same control procedure applies to tray3 and tray4.

A. Up operation• A lifting cable is connected to the paper lifting plate and the paper plate is held in the hor-

izontal position by the take-up axis.

• When the tray3(4) lift-up motor is energized, the take-up axis takes up the cable tothereby raise the paper plate.

B. Down operation• When the tray is slid out of the machine, the coupling of the tray3(4) lift-up motor and the

take-up axis are disconnected from each other.

• When the driving force of the tray3(4) lift-up motor is released from the hoisting axis, the

paper lifting plate starts lowering by its own weight.

A00JT2C305AA

Tray3 lift-up motor (M23)Tray4 lift-up motor (M24) Coupling

Take-up axis

Paper lifting plate

8/21/2019 652 Service



137

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

C. Operation timing(1) When the tray is slid in• When the tray is slid in, the drawer connector of tray3(4) is connected. The machine then

determines that the tray is slid in position.

• The paper plate is lowering when the tray is slid out, so that the tray3(4) upper limit sen-

sor is unblocked.


tray3(4) lift-up motor rotate to start the up operation of the paper lifting plate.• When the paper stack is raised to a predetermined height after the up operation of the


• Determining that the tray3(4) upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the lift-up

motor to complete the up operation of the paper lifting plate.

• Control is provided to make sure that only one tray performs the up operation at one

time.

• If the tray is slid out during the up operation of the paper lifting plate and accordingly the

tray3(4) drawer connector is disconnected, the machine determines that the tray has

been slid out and terminates the up operation of the paper lifting plate.

A0P0T5C012DA

Tray3 upper limit sensor (PS22) Tray4 upper limit sensor (PS27)

Actuator

Actuator

A0P0T5C013DA

Drawer connector

4038T2C141AA

Tray3, Tray4 Drawer connector

Tray3, Tray4 upper limit sensor

Tray3, Tray4 Lift-up motor

Tray set

Lifting completed

Paper consumption

8/21/2019 652 Service



138

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

(2) During printing• As paper is consumed, the pick-up roller gradually lowers and the tray3(4) upper limit

sensor is unblocked.


tray3(4) lift-up motor rotate to start the up operation of the paper plate.

• When the paper stack is raised to a predetermined height after the up operation of the


• Determining that the tray3(4) upper limit sensor is blocked, the machine stops the lift-upmotor to complete the up operation of the paper lifting plate.

• The above operations are repeated, so that the pressure (paper feed pressure) of the

pick-up roller and paper are kept at a constant value at all times without being affected by

the amount of paper still available for use.

A00JT2C296AA



Actuator

Actuator

8/21/2019 652 Service



139

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

17.3.2 Paper Feed control

A. Pick-up control (tray3)• The transport motor is energized by the print start signal.

• The tray3 paper feed clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of


• As the tray3 paper feed clutch is energized, the driving force of the transport motor is



• The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the tray3 transport roller.

• The tray3 transport clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of time

after sending out the print start signal.

• As the tray3 transport clutch is energized, the driving force of the transport motor is

transmitted to the tray3 transport roller. As a result, the tray3 transport roller transports a

sheet of paper onto the horizontal transport roller.

• In consecutive printing, if the horizontal transport sensor has not detected the arrival of a

preceded paper, the tray3 transport roller will be stopped temporarily and the interval

between a preceded paper and a succeeding paper will be corrected.

• The tray3 paper feed clutch and tray3 transport clutch is deenergized after the lapse of apredetermined period of time after the tray3 paper feed sensor detects the leading edge

of the paper.


rotate.


8/21/2019 652 Service



140

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. Pick-up control (tray4)• The transport motor is energized by the print start signal.

• The tray4 paper feed clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of


• As the tray4 paper feed clutch is energized, the driving force of the transport motor is



• The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the tray4 vertical transport roller.• The tray4 paper feed clutch is deenergized after the lapse of a predetermined period of

time after the tray4 paper feed sensor detects the leading edge of the paper.


rotate.


A0P0T5C034DA

Vertical transportmotor (M26)

Horizontal transport clutch (CL3)


Intermediate roller

Intermediate transport rollersensor (PS28)

Horizontal transportsensor (PS29)

Horizontal transportroller 2

Paper feed roller (tray4)

Pick-up roller(tay3)

Paper separatorroller (tray4)

Pick-up roller (tray4)

Horizontal transport roller1

Transport motor(M25)

Tray3 paper feedclutch (CL5)

Paper feed roller (tray3)

Paper separator roller(tray3)

Tray3 Paper feed sensor (PS21)


Tray3transportclutch (CL6)

8/21/2019 652 Service



141

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

C. Separation control• The paper separator roller is driven via a torque limiter in the direction opposite the paper














A0P0T5C033DA

Pick-up roller

Paper feed roller


Drive connecting gear

Paper

8/21/2019 652 Service



142

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

D. Horizontal transport control (tray3)• The transport motor is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after

the print start signal.

• The horizontal transport clutch is energized after the lapse of a predetermined period of

time after the transport motor has been energized.

• When the horizontal transport clutch is energized, the driving force of the transport motor

is transmitted to horizontal transport roller 1 and horizontal transport roller 2. The hori-

zontal transport rollers 1 and 2 rotate to transport the paper onto the intermediate roller.• The horizontal transport sensor located downstream of the horizontal transport roller

along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed off from the tray3 trans-

port roller.

• The intermediate roller sensor located downstream of the intermediate roller along the

paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed off from horizontal transport roller 2.

• The horizontal transport clutch is deenergized after the lapse of a predetermined period

of time after the intermediate roller sensor has detected the leading edge of the paper.

• If the horizontal transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper even

after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a paper

misfeed occurs at the horizontal transport section.• If the intermediate roller sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper even


misfeed occurs at the vertical transport section.

E. Paper feed deceleration control• If the spacing between the current and preceding sheets of paper taken up from tray3 is

narrow, the tray3 transport clutch is temporarily deenergized, thereby achieving an ade-

quate spacing between the two sheets of paper.

• If there is only a narrow spacing from the preceding sheet of paper when the current one

reaches the intermediate roller, the vertical transport motor is temporarily deenergized to

achieve an adequate spacing between the two sheets of paper.

8/21/2019 652 Service



143

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

F. Operation timing(1) The tray3

A2WUT2E003DA



Tray3 transport clutch (CL6)


Horizontal Transport clutch (CL3)

Horizontal transport sensor (PS29)

Intermediate roller sensor (PS28)

vertical transport motor (M26)





Start key ON Timing motor ON

Plain paper: OHP detection sensor ONThick paper: Timing roller sensor ON

* When there is no preceding paper

8/21/2019 652 Service



144

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

(2) The tray4

G. Paper feed deceleration control• If a paper fed from the tray 3 has a narrow spacing with a preceded paper, the tray3

paper feed clutch is stopped temporarily to control to have a proper spacing between

papers.

• If a paper has a narrow spacing with a preceded paper when the paper reached to theintermediate roller, the vertical transport motor is stopped temporarily to control to have a

proper spacing between papers.

A00JT2E527DA




Intermediate roller sensor (PS28)






Start key ON Timing motor

ON

Plain paper: OHP detection sensor ON

Thick paper: Timing roller sensor ON* When there is no preceding paper

8/21/2019 652 Service



145

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N


• Tray3 and 4 don’t have paper size detection function.

• To set a different paper size, press keys as follows.

[Service mode] − [System setting 2] − [LCC size setting]

• In accordance with the set paper size, change positions of the guide plates (end guide

plate, paper guide plate/front, and paper guide plate/rear).

A00JT2E533DA

A00JT2C318AA

Paper guide plate/ rear

End guide plate

Paper guide plate/ front

8/21/2019 652 Service



146

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N


A. Paper near-empty detection• The tray3(4) near empty sensor detects a paper near-empty condition of the tray.

• As the amount of paper becomes small during printing, the paper lifting plate is raised.

(See “A. Up operation” of “17.3.1 Up/down control”.)

• As the paper lifting plate is raised, the position of the near empty detection actuator pro-

vided at the paper lifting plate is raised.

• When the near empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which it blocks the

tray3(4) near empty sensor, the machine detects a near-empty condition.

• A near-empty condition is detected when the amount of paper still available for use

becomes about 50 ± 30 sheets (about 50 sheets in terms of paper weighing 80 g/m2).

B. Paper empty detection (tray3)• The tray3 paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition of the tray.

• When the empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which it unblocks the tray3

paper empty sensor, the machine detects a paper empty condition.


A00JT2C306AA

A0P0T5C017DA


Actuator

Tray3 paper empty sensor(PS19)

8/21/2019 652 Service



147

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

C. Paper empty detection (tray4)• The tray4 paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition of the tray.

• When the empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which it blocks the tray4

paper empty sensor, the machine detects a paper empty condition.

D. Remaining paper detection• Paper supply level is detected by calculation of the paper remaining level based on the

time when the tray is lifted.

• Plain paper is used as the reference of the calculation for the paper supply level.

• When the thick paper is set, off set value is used to calculate the paper supply level.

Ex: When thick paper 2 is set, paper supply level is calculated as a half of the plain paperlevel.

• Lifting time is measured when the power is turned ON, save mode is released and a tray

is inserted.

A0P0T5C018DA



Actuator

Tray condition Paper full Paper near full Paper remained

Paper supply level 100 to 66% 65 to 33% 33% to 51 sheets

Tray3 paper supply level 1500 to 1000 sheets 999 to 501 sheets 500 to 51 sheets

Tray4 paper supply level 1000 to 666 sheets 665 to 334 sheets 333 to 51 sheets

8/21/2019 652 Service



148

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

E. Display of paper supply level• The amount of remaining paper is indicated by the LED on the right side of each tray and

by the screen of the control panel.

• The following shows how the level is displayed.



Tray condition Empty Near emptyOther statuses

(Including during lift-up and no tray conditions)

LED ON Blinking *1 OFF

A00JT2C269AA



8/21/2019 652 Service



149

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

17.3.5 Dehumidification heater control

• The machine has two dehumidification heaters mounted on its frame (except for the

North America and Europe area).

• When energized, the dehumidification heater generates heat to prevent the paper stack

loaded in the tray from becoming damp.

• The dehumidification heater is energized when the dehumidification heater switch

located on the lower part at the back of the main body is turned ON.

• When the dehumidification heater switch is ON, the dehumidification heater is energized

as long as the K PC drum motor remains deenergized (in the standby state; for details,

see the table below).

• While the K PC drum motor remains energized (during printing), the dehumidification

heater is deenergized to inhibit power consumption. (Photo conductor small amount rota-

tion control is worked in standby. If the K PC drum motor are rotated in short time, the

dehumidification heater has no OFF/ON operation but hold ON status.)

*: For details, see “Photo conductor section/Photo conductor small amount rotation control”

Dehumidification heater K PC drum motorFor the photo conductor small

amount rotation*

ON Halt OFFON - ON

OFF Halt OFF

OFF Running OFF

OFF Running OFF

A0P0T5C019DA

Tray4 dehumidifier heater (DH2)

Tray3 dehumidifier heater (DH1)

A00JT2C279AA

Dehumidifier heater transformer (T1)

Dehumidification heater switch(SW2)

8/21/2019 652 Service



150

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

17.3.6 Detection of tray3/4 slid out/in

• The connection state of the drawer connection located in the rear of the tray determines

whether the tray3(4) is slid out or in.

• When the tray3(4) is slid in, the tray3(4) drawer connector is connected and the machine

determines that the tray3(4) is slid in position.

• When the tray3(4) is slid out, the tray3(4) drawer connector is disconnected and the

machine determines that the tray3(4) is slid out.

A0P0T5C013DA

Tray4 drawer connector Tray3 drawer connector

8/21/2019 652 Service



151

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

17.3.7 Detection of horizontal transport unit slid out/in

• The horizontal transport sensor detects the horizontal transport unit that is being slid out

or in.

• By sliding out the horizontal transport unit, the horizontal transport guide for clearing

paper misfeed from the horizontal transport unit can be opened.

• There is no open/close mechanism provided for the horizontal transport guide. The hori-

zontal transport unit cannot, however, be slid into the machine with the horizontal trans-

port guide left opened.

• Slide out tray4 and, holding onto the lever of the horizontal transport unit, withdraw the

horizontal transport unit. This moves the light blocking plate for unit position detection

provided for the horizontal transport unit to the front.

• When the light blocking plate for unit position detection is moved to a position at which it

unblocks the horizontal transport sensor, the machine detects that the horizontal trans-

port unit has been slid out.

• When the horizontal transport unit is slid in, the light blocking plate for unit position detec-

tion blocks the horizontal transport sensor. The machine then detects that the horizontal

transport unit has been slid in.

A0P0T5C020DA

Horizontal transport set sensor (PS58)

Light blocking plate for

unit position detection

8/21/2019 652 Service


18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY) Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

152

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY)

18.1 Configuration

A00JT2C274AA

A00JT2C282AA

Bypass paperfeed roller

Multi FD size sensor/3 (PS33)Multi FD size sensor/1 (PS31)

Paper lifting plate

Bypass sub tray setsensor (PS37)

Bypass paper widthdetection resistor (VR)Bypass paper empty

sensor (PS34)

Multi FD size sensor/2 (PS32)

Bypass sub tray

Paper side guide plate

Bypass set sensor(PS30)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 18. PAPER FEED SECTION (BYPASS TRAY)

153

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

18.2 Drive

A00JT2C283AA

Bypass paper lower sensor (PS36)

Bypass paper feed motor(M27)

Bypass paper feed roller

Bypass paper limit sensor (PS35)

Paper lifting plate

Bypass tray up down motor (M28)

Bypass tray separator roller

8/21/2019 652 Service



154

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

18.3 Operation

18.3.1 Bypass paper lifting motion control

A. Up operation• The bypass tray up down motor rotates forward to drive the lifting gear, which raises the

paper lifting plate to the paper feed position.

B. Down operation• The bypass tray up down motor rotates backward to drive the lifting gear, which lowers

the paper lifting plate to the standby position.

C. Operation timing(1) Move to paper feed position (up)• When the bypass paper feeding starts, the bypass tray up and down motor makes a nor-

mal rotation to move the paper lifting plate up to the paper feeding position. When the

paper lifting plate is moved up, the bypass paper limit sensor turns ON to stops the

bypass tray up and down motor at the feeding position.

• When the paper supply level goes down during paper feeding and the bypass paper limitsensor turns OFF, the bypass tray motor rotates positively to move it up to the paper

feeding position.

(2) Move to standby position (down)• When there is no print request from the bypass tray and the paper fed from the bypass

tray turns OFF the exit sensor, the paper lifting plate is lowered.

• Though other jobs are being processed, if the above conditions are met, the paper lifting

plate is lowered.

• When the sensor detects the bypass paper empty at the feeding position, the paper lift-

ing plate is moved to the standby position.

• When paper jam occurs, the paper lifting plate stops at the paper feeding position. Afterpaper jam is resolved, the paper lifting plate moves to the standby position.

A00JT2C285AA

Bypass tray up down motor (M28)

Bypass paper lower limit sensor (PS36)

Bypass paper upper limit sensor (PS35)

Bypass paper empty detection

Paper lifting plate

8/21/2019 652 Service



155

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

18.3.2 paper feed control

A. Pick-up control• The bypass tray up down motor is energized by the print start signal to raise the paper to

the paper feed position.

• The bypass paper feed motor is energized after the paper has been raised to the paper

feed position.

• As the bypass paper feed motor is energized, the driving force of the bypass paper feed

motor is transmitted to the pick-up roller and the paper feed roller. As a result, the pick-up

roller picks up a sheet of paper and transports it onto the paper feed roller.

• The paper feed roller transports the paper onto the registration roller (timing roller).

• The bypass paper feed motor is deenergized when the paper fed from the bypass tray is

fed out.

• The bypass tray up down motor is energized to lower the paper down to the standby

position.

Bypass tray up

down motor (M28)Inverse rotation

Normal rotation


Bypass paper lower limit sensor (PS36)

Start key ON

Paper feeding positionStandbyposition

Occurrence of the event thatmoves to standby position

A0P0T5E115DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



156

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. Separation control• The paper separator roller is driven via a torque limiter in the direction opposite the paper














A0P0T5C021DA

Bypass paper feed motor(M27)

Drive connecting gear

Paper feed roller

Pick-up roller


Drive connecting gearPaper feed roller


Pick-up roller

Paper

A0P0T5C035DA

Bypass tray updown motor (M28)


Bypass paper feed motor (M27)

Start key ON

Paper feeding position Finish the paper feeding

Normal rotationInverse rotation

8/21/2019 652 Service



157

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N


A. Main scanning direction• The paper size in the main scanning direction is detected with 10-bit digital data detected

by the bypass paper width detection resistor.

• Rotation of the gear provided for the paper side plate and the detection gear mounted on

the rotation shaft of the bypass paper width detection resistor results in the voltage

obtained from the bypass paper width detection resistor being varied.

B. Sub scanning direction• The size in the sub scanning direction is detected based on the combination of multi FD

size sensors 1 to 3 being unblocked and blocked.

• The specific position of the paper length detection actuator determines whether each of

multi FD size sensors 1 to 3 is unblocked or blocked.

A00JT2C264AA



Bypass paper width detection resistor (VR)


8/21/2019 652 Service



158

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

C. Sheet size determination• Combination of the width of the main scanning and the length of the sub scanning will

decide a sheet size.

Metric area

*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for FLS.

220 x 330 mm, 8 × 13, 81

/ 8 × 131

/ 4, 81

/ 4 × 13, 81

/ 2 × 13

Multi FD size

sensor/1

Multi FD size

sensor/2

Multi FD size

sensor/3

Bypass paper width detection

resistor Paper detection size

Width (mm)

OFF OFF OFF

80 to less than 115 A6S

115 to 144 inclusive B6S

196 to 225 inclusive A5

242 to 268 inclusive B5

ON OFF OFF

133 to 164 inclusive A5S

169 to less than 196 B5S

196 to 225 inclusive A4S

255 to less than 288 11 × 81 / 2


ON ON OFF 188 to 235 inclusive FLS*

ON ON ON

201 to 231 inclusive 81 / 2 × 14

242 to less than 268 B4

268 to less than 288 11 × 17

288 to less than 301 A3

301 to 330 inclusive 12 × 18

8/21/2019 652 Service



159

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

Inch area

*: One of the following paper sizes can be selected to be set for Foolscap.

8 × 13, 81 / 8 × 131 / 4, 81 / 4 × 13, 81 / 2 × 13, 81 / 2 × 13

Multi FD size

sensor/1

Multi FD size

sensor/2

Multi FD size

sensor/3

Bypass paper width detection

resistor Paper detection size

Width (mm)

OFF OFF OFF

80 to less than 115 A6S

115 to 144 inclusive B6S

201 to 231 inclusive 51 / 2 × 81 / 2

242 to 282 inclusive 71 / 4 × 101 / 2

ON OFF OFF

125 to 155 inclusive 51 / 2 × 81 / 2 S

169 to less than 201 71 / 4 × 101 / 2 S

201 to 231 inclusive 81 / 2 × 11 S

225 to less than 288 81 / 2 × 11


ON ON OFF 188 to 235 inclusive Foolscap*

ON ON ON

201 to 231 inclusive 81

/ 2 × 14242 to less than 268 B4

268 to less than 288 11 × 17

288 to less than 301 A3

301 to 330 inclusive 12 × 18

8/21/2019 652 Service



160

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N


A. Paper near-empty control• The bypass tray is not mounted with any near-empty detection mechanism.

B. Paper empty control• The bypass paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition in the bypass tray.

• As the amount of paper in the bypass tray becomes small, the paper empty detection

actuator is raised.

• When the paper empty detection actuator is raised to a position at which it unblocks the

bypass paper empty sensor, the machine detects a paper empty condition in the bypass

tray.

• Paper empty is detected both at the standby and the paper feed positions.

A00JT2C217AA

When there is no paper

When there is paper

Bypass paper empty sensor (PS34)

8/21/2019 652 Service



161

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

18.3.5 Detection of bypass unit opened/closed

• The bypass unit is equipped with an open/close mechanism that facilitates misfeed clear-

ing procedure and access to the tray1 paper feed part.

• The bypass tray set sensor detects whether or not the bypass unit is opened or closed.

• Pull the bypass unit release lever and open the bypass unit. This actuates the open/close

detection actuator provided at the bypass unit.

• When the bypass unit is opened, the open/close detection actuator provided at the

bypass unit is actuated.

• When the open/close detection actuator is moved to a position at which it unblocks the

bypass tray set sensor, the machine determines that the bypass unit has been opened.

A00JT2C265AA

Bypass unit

Tray1 paper feed section Lock tab

A0P0T5C086DA

Open/close detection actuator

Release lever

Bypass set sensor (PS30)

Open/close detection actuator

Lock tab

Bypass set sensor (PS30)

8/21/2019 652 Service



162

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

18.3.6 Detection of bypass sub tray extended/retracted

• The bypass sub tray set sensor prevents erroneous detection by multi FD size sensors 2

and 3 when the bypass sub tray is retracted.

• The bypass tray set sensor detects whether or not the bypass sub tray is extended.

• When the bypass sub tray is extended until the light blocking plate mounted on the

bypass sub tray unblocks the bypass tray set sensor, the machine determines that the

bypass sub tray has been extended.

• When the bypass sub tray is in the fully retracted position, detection made by multi FD

size sensors 2 and 3 is not reflected.

A00JT2C264AA

Bypass sub tray set sensor(PS37)

Bypass sub tray

Multi FD size sensor/2(PS32)

Multi FD size sensor/3

(PS33)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 19. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION

163

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

19. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION

19.1 Configuration

A0P0T5C022DA

Registration motor(M2)

Timing roller

Tray1 verticaltransport sensor(PS4)


Tray1 paperfeed roller


Transport motor(M25) Tray4 paper feed clutch

(CL7)

Horizontal transportclutch (CL3)

Vertical transportmotor (M26)

Tray1 vertical transport motor(M5)

Tray2 verticaltransport motor(M7)

Tray2 paperfeed clutch(CL2)

Paper feed motor(M22)

Tray1 paperfeed clutch(CL1)


Actuator

OHP detection sensor (PS40)

OHP detection sensor(reflection unit) (PS40)

Tray1 paperfeed sensor(PS5)

IntermediaterollerIntermediatetransport rollersensor (PS28)

Horizontaltransport roller 2

Tray4 paper feed

sensor (PS26) Tray4 verticaltransport roller

Horizontal transport sensor(PS29)

Tray2 verticaltransportsensor (PS12)

Tray2 paperfeed sensor(PS13)

8/21/2019 652 Service


19. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

164

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

19.2 Drive

A0P0T5C023DA

Registration motor (M2)

Timing roller sensor(PS38)

Timing roller

OHP detection sensor (PS40)



Tray1 paper feed sensor(PS5)



Tray1 vertical transport motor(M5)


Paper feed motor (M22)


Tray2 vertical transportmotor (M7)

Intermediate roller

Intermediate transportroller sensor (M28)


Tray4 vertical transportroller



Horizontal transport sensor(M29)

Vertical transport motor(M26)

Tray1 paper feedsection


Tray3 horizontaltransport section



8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 19. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION

165

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

19.3 Operation

19.3.1 Vertical transport control

• The vertical transport section transports paper fed from tray1, 2, 3, or 4 onto the registra-

tion section.

• The paper fed from tray1 is transported onto the registration section by the tray 1 vertical

transport roller.

• The paper fed from the bypass tray is transported onto the registration section by the tray1 vertical transport roller.

• The paper fed from tray2 is transported onto the registration section by the tray2 vertical

transport roller and the tray 1 vertical transport roller.

• The paper fed from tray3 is transported onto the registration section by horizontal trans-

port roller 1, horizontal transport roller 2, the intermediate roller, the tray2 vertical trans-

port roller, and the tray 1 vertical transport roller.

• The paper fed from tray4 is transported onto the registration section by the intermediate

roller, tray2 vertical transport roller, and the tray 1 vertical transport roller.

19.3.2 Transport motor controlA. Tray1 vertical transport motor• The tray1 vertical transport motor is connected to the tray1 vertical transport roller. When

the tray1 vertical transport motor is energized, the tray1 vertical transport roller is rotated.

B. Tray2 vertical transport motor• The tray2 vertical transport motor is connected to the tray2 vertical transport roller. When

the tray2 vertical transport motor is energized, the tray2 vertical transport roller is rotated.

C. Vertical transport motor

• The vertical transport motor is connected to the intermediate roller and tray4 verticaltransport roller. When the vertical transport motor is energized, the intermediate roller

and tray4 vertical transport roller are rotated.

19.3.3 Operation timing

A. Tray1 vertical transport roller• The tray1 vertical transport roller starts rotating after the lapse of a predetermined period

of time after the print start signal.

• The tray1 vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray1 vertical transport

roller along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper that has moved past the

tray1 vertical transport roller.• If the tray1 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper

even after the lapse of the predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a


• If the tray1 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper



• If the tray1 vertical transport sensor detects paper earlier than the predetermined time,

the vertical transport motor is decelerated to correct timing at which the paper reaches

the timing roller.

• If the OHP detect sensor located upstream of the timing roller detects paper earlier than

the predetermined time, the vertical transport motor is decelerated to correct timing atwhich the paper reaches the timing roller.

8/21/2019 652 Service


19. VERTICAL TRANSPORT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

166

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. Tray2 vertical transport roller• The tray2 vertical transport roller starts rotating after the lapse of a predetermined period

of time after the print start signal.

• The tray2 vertical transport sensor located downstream of the tray2 vertical transport

roller along the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper that has moved past the

tray2 vertical transport roller.

• If the tray2 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper

even after the lapse of the predetermined period of time, the machine determines that apaper misfeed occurs at the vertical transport section.

• If the tray2 vertical transport sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper



• If the tray2 vertical transport sensor detects paper earlier than the predetermined time,

the tray2 vertical transport motor is decelerated to correct timing at which the paper

reaches the timing roller.

• If the OHP detect sensor located upstream of the timing roller detects paper earlier than

the predetermined time, the vertical transport motor is decelerated to correct timing at

which the paper reaches the timing roller.

C. Intermediate roller and tray4 vertical transport roller• The intermediate roller and the tray4 vertical transport roller start rotating after the lapse

of a predetermined period of time after the print start signal.

• The tray4 paper feed sensor located upstream of the tray4 vertical transport roller along

the paper path detects the leading edge of the paper fed by the tray4 paper feed roller.

• The intermediate roller sensor located upstream of the intermediate roller along the

paper path detects the leading edge of the paper that is about to advance onto the inter-

mediate roller.

• If the intermediate roller sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper fed off

from tray3 even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine deter-mines that a paper misfeed occurs at the tray3/4 horizontal transport section.

• If the intermediate roller sensor is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper fed off

from tray4 even after the lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine deter-

mines that a paper misfeed occurs at the tray3/4 intermediate roller section.

• If the intermediate roller sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper even


misfeed occurs at the tray3/4 intermediate roller section.

• If the intermediate roller sensor detects paper earlier than the predetermined time, the

vertical transport motor is deenergized to halt paper transport temporarily and thereby

correct timing at which the paper reaches the timing roller.

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 20. REGISTRATION SECTION

167

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

20. REGISTRATION SECTION

20.1 Configuration

20.2 Drive

A0P0T5C094DA

Timing roller

2nd transfer roller

A2WUT2C067DA

Timing roller

Registration motor (M2) Timing roller sensor (PS38)

OHP detection sensor(PS40) (Reflection unit)

IDC registration sensor/F(IDCS/F)

OHP detectionsensor (PS40)


Temperature/humidity sensor(TEM/HUMS)

Take-up motor (M22)

Tray1 vertical transportmotor (M5)

8/21/2019 652 Service


20. REGISTRATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

168

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

20.3 Operation

20.3.1 Registration control

• The registration motor is connected to the timing roller. When the registration motor is

energized, therefore, the timing roller is rotated.

• The paper will create a loop between the tray 1 vertical transport roller (or ADU transport

roller 4) and the timing roller when the paper is being conveyed in order to correct the

skew.• Timing roller is controlled in order to synchronize the timing the unit starts writing the

image and conveying paper.

• The amount of the loop of the paper can be adjusted in the “Service Mode - Machine -

Printer Reg. Loop Adj.”. Changing the adjustment value will change the amount of loop in

the paper.

A. Operation1. The paper is transported while the timing roller is stationary.

2. A paper loop is formed thus skew in the paper is corrected.

[1] Timing roller (stopped) [2] Timing roller sensor (PS38)

[3] Actuator [4] Paper

A2WUT2C068DA

[4]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1] Loop

A2WUT2C069DA

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



169

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

3. The timing roller rotates to transport the paper.

[1] Timing roller (rotated)

A2WUT2C070DA

[1]

A00JT2C222AA

Timing roller


OHP detection sensor (PS40)(reflection unit)

Loop creating


PaperTray1 paper feed roller

OHP detection sensor(PS40)

8/21/2019 652 Service


20. REGISTRATION SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

170

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

20.3.2 OHP detection

• OHP detection sensor checks to prevent printing on the paper other than OHP.

• OHP detection will be performed after paper made the loop at the timing roller. When the

OHP detection shows the different result from the setting on the control panel, printing

will stop to display “Error.”

Paper type set from

control panel

Results of OHP detection

sensor detection Operation

OHP Other than OHP Stops printing promptly based on the detec-

tion of paper type inconsistency.Other than OHP OHP

[1] OHP detection sensor (PS40) [2] Reflection unit

[3] LED remote [4] Sensor output

A2WUT2C071DA

[1]

[4]

[3]

[2]

[2][1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



171

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

20.3.3 Paper transport speed control

• It controls the timing the paper reaches to the timing roller sensor.

A. Operation• The tray1 vertical transport roller, the tray2 vertical transport roller and the intermediate

roller may speed up, slow down or stop temporarily during paper transportation in order

to adjust the paper interval.

A00JT2C228AA

Timing roller


Tray1 vertical transport roller (Speed increase, speedreduction, halt)

Tray2 vertical transport roller (Speed increase, speedreduction, halt)

Intermediate roller (Speed increase, halt)

8/21/2019 652 Service


21. FUSING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

172

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

21. FUSING SECTION

21.1 Configuration

A0P0T5C087DA

Soaking roller thermistor/1 (TH2)Soaking roller thermistor/2 (TH3)Soaking roller thermostat (TS2)

Brush roller

Soaking roller heaterlamp (FH2)

Soaking roller

IH coil unit(Fixed at the main body side)

Heating roller

IH coil (FH1)

Fusing unit (Periodicallyreplaced parts)

Fusing pressure roller

A00JT2C271AA

Fusing unit

Heating roller temperature sensor/1 (TEMS/1)Heating roller temperature sensor/2 (TEMS/2)Heating roller temperature sensor/3 (TEMS/3)(Fixed to the main body)

IH coil unit

Separator claw

A0P0T5C075DA

Loop amount detectionsensor 1 (PS41),Loop amount detectionsensor 2 (PS42)

Heating rollertemperature

sensor/3 (TEMS/3)

Heating rollertemperaturesensor/1 (TEMS/1)


Heating roller thermistor/1 (TH1)Heating roller thermostat (TS1)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 21. FUSING SECTION

173

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

(1) Configuration of the temperature detector element of fusing unit

A0P0T5C025DA

Heating roller thermistor/1(TH1)

Heating roller temperaturesensor/2 (TEMS/2)

Soaking roller thermistor/1 (TH2)

Heating roller temperature sensor/1(TEMS/1)

Soaking roller thermistor/2 (TH3)

Soaking roller thermostat (TS2)

Heating roller thermostat(TS1) Pressure home sensor

(PS55)

Loop amount detectionsensor/1 (PS41)

Loop amount detectionsensor/2 (PS42)

Heating rollerrotation sensor/1

(PS57)

IH coil/Main coil(FH1)

IH coil/2nd demagnetization coil(FH1): bizhub 652/602 only

IH coil/1stdemagnetizationcoil (FH1)


8/21/2019 652 Service



174

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

21.2 Drive

21.2.1 Heating roller drive

21.2.2 Fusing pressure roller pressure drive

[1] Fusing motor (M30) [2] Heating roller

[3] Fusing pressure roller

A2WUT2C005DA

[2]

[3]

[1]

[1] Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) [2] Fusing retraction position sensor (PS59)

[3] Fusing pressure roller [4] Pressure home sensor (PS55)

[5] Heating roller

A2WUT2C006DA

[1]

[2]

[5]

[3]

[4]

8/21/2019 652 Service



175

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

21.3 Operation

21.3.1 Fusing speed correction

A. Roller speed control• In order to avoid fusing error, the rotation speed of heating roller/fusing pressure roller is

exchanged according to the paper type or the print mode.

• Fusing speed is set to 80 mm/s during standby mode.

(1) bizhub 652 fusing speed

(2) bizhub 552/502 fusing speed

(3) bizhub 602 fusing speed

Paper type Fusing speed (mm/second)

Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) 310

Plain paper (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2) + Gloss mode 120

Thick paper 1/1+ (91 g/m2 to 157 g/m2) 155

Thick paper 2/3/4 (158 g/m2 to 300 g/m2)

Postcard, Envelopes, Label sheet 120

OHP







OHP







OHP

8/21/2019 652 Service



176

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. Adjustment of paper loop amount• By creating a paper loop, the speed difference between the fusing and paper convey-

ance at 2nd transfer section will be adjusted. It prevents the double transferred image or

brush effect.

• The fussing speed is controlled (speed up/speed down) according to the amount of

paper loop.

• The loop amount detection sensor/1, /2 turns ON in different timing according to the loop

amount so that the loop amount can be detected in three stages.

Loop amount detection

sensor/1 (Front side)

Loop amount detection

sensor/2 (Rear side)Loop amount Fusing speed

Unblocking Unblocking large Speed-up (High speed)

Unblocking Blocking average Speed-up (Low speed)

Blocking Blocking small Slowdown

[1] Fusing pressure roller [2] Paper[3] Heating roller [4] Loop amount: small

[5] Transfer belt [6] 2nd transfer roller

[7] Actuator [8] Loop amount: large

[9] Loop amount detection sensor/1 (PS41) [10] Loop amount detection sensor/2 (PS42)

A2WUT2C072DA

[4]

[7]

[9]

[10]

[8]

[3] [1]

[2]

[6]

[7]

[5]

8/21/2019 652 Service



177

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

(1) Operation timing• It starts controlling when the front-edge of the paper reaches to the predetermined posi-

tion before the fusing pressure roller.

• If the loop amount is “large” or “average”, the fusing speed is increased to reduce the

paper loop amount to an appropriate value.

• If the loop amount is “small”, the fusing speed is decreased to increase the paper loop

amount to an appropriate value.

• After the back-edge of the paper passes the 2nd transfer roller and a given period of timehas passed, the control will finish.

C. PPM control• PPM control, which allows for given paper transport intervals to reduce the number of

printed pages produced per minute, is performed to prevent fusing failure, faulty image,

or other related malfunctions from occurring due to decreased temperature at the center

of the heating roller and fusing pressure roller or increased temperature at edges of

these rollers.

• The PPM control can reduce productivity to about 40 to 90% against the ordinary 100%.

• Productivity of PPM control is determined according to the temperature of each sensor

and thermistor and the width of main scanning direction.

8/21/2019 652 Service



178

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

21.3.2 Fusing pressure/retraction control

• To ensure prolonged durability of the heating roller, the fusing pressure roller is retracted*

from the heating roller during any time other than printing. (The roller is, however,

retracted* during printing using envelopes.)

*: The fusing pressure roller does not completely retract but is slightly pressed to the

heating roller.

• The fusing pressure retraction motor is turned forward or backward to press the fusing

pressure roller up against, and retract it from, the heating roller. When the motor rotates,

the sector gear will rotate to change the pressure condition of the fusing pressure roller.

(Firmly pressed ⇔ Slightly pressed)

• The pressure condition of the fusing pressure roller is detected by the pressure home

sensor. The retraction position is detected with pulse number of the fusing retraction

position sensor.

• When there is no change in output of the fusing retraction position sensor even if the

given time has passed after the fusing pressure retraction motor started its rotation, it is

judged as abnormal spacing and “Trouble code C3101: fusing roller separation failure”

message appears.

A. Pressure/retraction timing

A2WUT2C099DA

A2WUT2C098DA

Heating rollerSector gear

Pressure operation (Firmly pressed) Retraction operation (Slightly pressed)

Fusing pressureroller

Pressed by theheating roller

Conditions Pressure/retraction operation

Warm-up

The fusing pressure roller is slightly pressed

until the heating roller reaches the predeter-mined temperature.

Retraction (Slightly pressed)

The fusing pressure roller is pressed against

the heating roller when the heating roller

reaches the predetermined temperature.

Pressure (Firmly pressed)

Standby Retraction (Slightly pressed)

PrintingFor envelopes Retraction (Slightly pressed)

For paper types other than envelopes Pressure (Firmly pressed)

Power save mode ON Retraction (Slightly pressed)

Heater OFF Retraction (Slightly pressed)

8/21/2019 652 Service



179

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

21.3.3 Heating roller heating control

A. Heating control• The inside surface of the heating roller is formed with Ni layer.

• The IH coil located beside the heating roller radiates magnetic flux to the heating roller

when energized.

• The IH coil consists of two different types of coil: main coil and demagnetization coil.

• The heating roller is heated by the main coil. The demagnetization coil controls the heat-

ing zone.

• Ni layer of the heating roller is the magnetic conducting layer in which eddy current is

generated with magnetic flux.

• The eddy current generated in the conducting layer produces joule heat to heat the heat-

ing roller.

• The main coil is provided only on one side of the heating roller, so that the heating roller

generates heat from a local surface of the heating roller close to the main coil. The heat-

ing roller is therefore rotated to ensure that the entire periphery of the roller is heated to

an adequate temperature.

• The heating roller temperature sensor/1, heating roller temperature sensor/2, and the

heating roller temperature sensor/3 measure the temperature of the heating roller.

A2WUT2C073DA

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1]

[5]

[5]

[4]

8/21/2019 652 Service



180

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. Whole area heating controlDuring a print cycle, the heating roller is rotated and, at the same time, heated by the main

coil, so that the entire area of the heating roller can be heated to, and maintained at, a pre-

determined temperature.

C. Center heating switch control• The temperature on ends of the heating roller is measured with the heating roller sensor/

3.

• When the temperature of ends of the heating roller exceeds a predetermined value dur-

ing printing using paper of a small size or in the standby state, the demagnetization coil

comes into play in inhibiting heating of roller ends and only the center portion in the main

scan direction of the roller is heated.

• When the demagnetization coil is energized, the demagnetization coil radiates magneticflux so as to cancel the magnetic flux radiated from the main coil. Canceling the magnetic

flux on the ends of the roller results in generation of heat on the roller ends being inhib-

ited.

• The heating roller of bizhub 652/602 is provided with two first demagnetization coils and

two second demagnetization coils, each provided on either side of the heating roller to

achieve even greater demagnetization effect.

• The heating roller of bizhub 552/502 are provided with two first demagnetization coils,

one on either side of the heating roller.

• Control is performed to turn ON or OFF each of these demagnetization coils according to

the paper width (CD: main scanning length) and the heating roller end temperature.

[1] Heating roller [2] Ni layer

[3] Surface section [4] IH coil (FH1)

[5] Magnetic flux

8/21/2019 652 Service



181

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

[1] Main coil [2] 1st demagnetization coil

[3] 2nd demagnetization coil [4] bizhub 652/602

[5] bizhub 552/502

A2WUT2C074DA

[1]

[4]

[5]

[1]

[1]

[3][2][3]

[3]

[2]

[3]

[3]

[2]

8/21/2019 652 Service



182

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

D. Detection of rotation of the heating roller• The heating roller is rotated while it is being heated to ensure that the entire periphery of

the roller reaches an adequate temperature.

• The heating roller is driven by the fusing pressure roller that is pressed up against the

heating roller (the heating roller follows the rotation of the fusing pressure roller even

while it is slightly pressed).

• If the heating roller does not rotate while the IH coil (main coil) is energized, the temper-

ature of the entire periphery of the roller cannot be measured and thus proper tempera-ture control cannot be provided. At this time, only the half surface of the heating roller is

heated. If the main coil is energized with the heating roller remaining stationary, the roller

can be damaged.

• Rotation of the heating roller results in the cam gear being rotated. The rotation of the

cam gear, in turn, actuates the actuator of the heating roller rotation sensor/1 periodi-

cally.

• As the heating roller rotation sensor/1 alternates between unblocked and blocked states

at regular intervals, the machine determines that the heating roller is rotating.

• If the heating roller rotation sensor/1 remains unblocked or blocked for a predetermined

period of time during printing, the machine determines that a paper misfeed occurs at theexit, displaying a corresponding message on the control panel.

• If the heating roller rotation sensor/1 remains unblocked or blocked for a predetermined

period of time during a warm-up cycle, standby state, or any other timing than a print

cycle, the machine displays the trouble code “C3102 fusing roller failure to turn” on the

control panel.

8/21/2019 652 Service



183

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

[1] Cam gear [2] Heating roller rotation sensor/1 (PS57)

[3] Heating roller [4] Actuator

A2WUT2C075DA

[1]

[2]

[1][4]

[2]

[3]

8/21/2019 652 Service



184

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

21.3.4 Heating control of the fusing pressure roller

• A heater for heating is not provided inside the fusing pressure roller.

• The fusing pressure roller has the soaking roller for heating the fusing pressure roller.

• The soaking roller is pressed constantly to the fusing pressure roller.

• The soaking roller is driven by the fusing pressure roller that is pressed up against the

soaking roller.

• The soaking roller has hollow structure. Inside of the roller has the soaking roller heater

lamp.

• The soaking roller heater lamp generates a heat after turning on electricity to heat the

soaking roller.

• Heated soaking roller heats the fusing pressure roller.

• Temperature of the soaking roller is measured by the soaking roller thermistor/1 and 2.

A0P0T5C028DA

Heating roller

Soaking roller

Fusing pressure roller

Soaking roller thermistor/1 (TH2)Soaking roller thermistor/2 (TH3)

Soaking roller heater lamp(FH2)

8/21/2019 652 Service



185

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

21.3.5 Fusing temperature control

• Fusing temperature control is performed to fuse toner image properly in the paper. The

surface temperatures of the heating roller and the soaking roller are detected. The power

of the IH coil is then varied and the soaking roller heater lamp in the soaking roller con-

trolled to thereby maintain the surface temperatures of the rollers at appropriate levels.

A. Temperature control chart

*: The heating roller does not control a temperature because IH heater is OFF.

[1] Warm-up [2] Controlled temperature at stand by

(normal operation)

[3] Printing (plain) [4] Standby (normal operation)

[5] Low power mode* [6] Sleep mode

A2WUT2E101DA0

[1] [2] [4] [5] [6][3]

Time

Temperature

Fusing pressureroller

Soaking roller

Heating roller

Enters low power modeStart key ON

Sub-powerswitch ON

Enters sleep modeWarm-up completed

8/21/2019 652 Service



186

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. IH coil temperature control• The IH coil is controlled to allow the heating roller temperature to fall within a predeter-

mined range during warm-up, printing, and in the standby state.

• Temperature of the heating roller is periodically measured with the temperature sensor,

and the temperature change (up/down) is monitored by comparing the current tempera-

ture with the previous value.

• When the temperature in the heating roller goes up beyond the upper limit, IH coil is

deenergized.• When the temperature in the heating roller goes down under the upper limit, IH coil is re-

energized.

A0P0T5C112DA

Temperature change of heating rollerTemperaturecheck cycle Temperature checked

Temperature

Upper limit

Target

temperature

Lower limit

ON

OFF

IH coil(FH1)

Time

8/21/2019 652 Service



187

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

C. Temperature control during warm-up• The warm-up control is started as soon as the main power switch and the sub power

switch are turned ON.

• If the fusing pressure roller presses the heating roller, the fusing pressure retraction

motor is energized to let the fusing pressure roller retract from the heating roller. (Slightly

pressed)

• The fusing motor is energized and, using the driving force of the fusing motor, the fusing

pressure roller, soaking roller and heating roller are rotated.• The main coil is energized to heat the heating roller to the specified temperature value*1.

• The soaking roller heater lamp is energized to heat the soaking roller. Heat of the soak-

ing roller heater lamp is transferred onto the fusing pressure roller and heat it.

• The soaking roller is heated to the specified temperature value*1.

• When the temperature of the heating roller reaches the predetermined value, the fusing

pressure retraction motor is energized to let the fusing pressure roller press the heating

roller. (Firmly pressed)

• When the temperatures of all rollers exceed the predetermined value, the print cycle can

now be started.

• A print cycle is started if so requested. If there is no print request, the machine enters the“temperature control under standby”.

(1) Warm-up time

*1: The temperature control is provided by varying the target temperature for each mode

according to the combination of the temperature of the soaking roller and the machine

interior absolute humidity*2 at the start of the warm-up cycle.

*2: Absolute humidity: water content contained as moisture in the air (1 m3) regardless of

the temperature*3: 110 sec. or less when the optional finisher is installed*4: 70 sec. or less when the image stabilization is executed

Image stabilization operating condition:

• The sub-power switch is turned ON after the lapse of 16 hours or more after the sub-

power switch has been turned OFF.

• The sub-power switch is turned ON after the lapse of 8 hours or more after the sub-

power switch has been turned OFF and in an ambience of the machine interior rela-tive humidity of 17% or less, or 69% or more.

Model Warm-up time Conditions

bizhub 65230 sec. or less*4 • At room temperature 23°C and rated voltage

• For the period from a stable condition of the main

power switch turned ON and sub power switch

turned OFF to a condition of being ready to print fol-

lowing turning ON of the sub power switch

bizhub 552

bizhub 602 90 sec. or less*3

bizhub 502 60 sec. or less*4

ModeCondition at the start of warm-up

Soaking roller temperature Machine inter ior absolute humidity

Low temperature

modeSpecified value or less Don’t care

High humidity

modeSpecified value or more Specified value or more

Normal mode Specified value or more Less than specified value

8/21/2019 652 Service



188

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

D. Temperature control in standby state• The machine enters the standby temperature control if no print requests are received

after the warm-up.

• The standby temperature control ensures that the temperature of each roller in the

standby state is not decreased.

• For a predetermined period of time after the machine has started to enter the standby

temperature control, control is provided with the target temperature of each of low tem-

perature, normal, and high humidity modes.• The temperature is controlled by normal mode, after predetermined time from standby

control start.

E. Temperature control during printing• Temperature control is provided in order to keep optimum fusing performance with vari-

ous factors, such as the type of paper, print mode, paper temperature*, use of paper of

small size, decreased temperature during paper passage, and warm-up carried out with

a cool fusing unit.

*: For paper temperature, “the machine interior temperature at the paper feed section”

detected by the paper temperature thermistor located in the paper feed section is used

as a data for controlling a fusing temperature.

[1] Paper temperature thermistor (TH8)

A2WUT2C076DA

[1]

8/21/2019 652 Service



189

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

F. Temperature control under low power mode• Temperature control is provided, in which the main coil and demagnetization coil are

deenergized to suspend heating of the heating roller in order to reduce power consump-

tion during the low power mode.

• The soaking roller heater is controlled by lowering the target temperature of the soaking

roller from the temperature under printing or standby.

• The fusing motor is deenergized to keep all rollers stationary.

• In the low power mode, the soaking roller remains stationary while the temperature con-trol of the soaking roller heater lamp is being provided. If the soaking roller is left to stand

under the abovementioned condition for a long time, the brush roller in contact with the

soaking roller is deformed and noise may occur when the roller is restarted. After the

machine has entered the low power mode, therefore, the soaking roller and the fusing

pressure roller are rotated at predetermined intervals to change the position of contact of

the brush roller with the soaking roller. The brush roller is thereby prevented from being

deformed.

• The temperature control under the low power mode is performed so that the temperature

reaches the printable level within 30 sec. at most.

G. Temperature control in sleep mode• The main coil, demagnetization coil, and the soaking roller heater lamp are deenergized

to stop heating the heating roller and the fusing pressure roller, thereby reducing power

consumption in the sleep mode.

• The fusing motor is also deenergized to keep all rollers stationary.

• The rollers are not heated in the sleep mode and, as a result, the roller temperature may

be reduced down to room temperature. The machine may therefore require the period of

time equivalent to the warm-up time until the rollers reach the printable temperatures.

8/21/2019 652 Service



190

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

21.3.6 Heating roller temperature sensor

• A non-contact type thermopile is used for heating roller temperature sensor/1 (hereinaf-

ter referred to as “temperature sensor”). The temperature sensor detects the tempera-

ture of the heating roller through infrared rays and controls the roller temperature.

• The temperature sensor is provided with a lens. For its structural reason, therefore, the

temperature sensor can be dirtied by dew condensation formed or foreign matter depos-

ited on the lens.

• The temperature sensor, if contaminated with dew drops or dirt on the lens, becomes

unable to detect the temperature accurately, since the contaminants blocks the infrared

rays that are otherwise detected by the sensor.

• If temperature control is provided under such conditions, the temperature sensor detects

a temperature that is lower than the actual temperature of the heating roller. Then, the

heating roller temperature is controlled based on a temperature higher than the target

one.

[1] Heating roller temperature sensor [2] Heating roller temperature sensor/3

(TEMS/3)

[3] Heating roller temperature sensor/1

(TEMS/1)

[4] Heating roller temperature sensor/2

(TEMS/2)

A2WUT2C077DA

[1]

[2] [3] [4]

8/21/2019 652 Service



191

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

21.3.7 Heating roller temperature sensor condensation detection

A. Detection of condensation on the heating roller temperature sensor• The control of detection of condensation on the heating roller temperature sensor is to

determine degradation of detection accuracy of the temperature sensor caused by con-

densation or dirt.

• When condensation on the temperature sensor is detected and the control is switched to

“alternative temperature control”, the machine displays the corresponding P code “P-32

Heating roller temperature sensor/1 temperature detection failure” on the control panel.

B. Condensation detection conditionsWhen any of the following conditions is detected, the machine determines that the heating

roller temperature sensor/1 lens has condensation on it and starts the heating roller alter-

native temperature control. (For details, see “21.3.8 Heating roller alternative temperature

control”.)

See P.192

(1) During warm-up• The difference in temperature between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and

that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 is equal to, or more than, a specifiedvalue and that condition lasts for 1 sec. or more.

(2) In standby state• Within 30 sec. after the completion of the warm-up, the difference in temperature

between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and that detected by heating roller

temperature sensor/1 is equal to, or more than, a specified value and that condition lasts

for 1 sec. or more.

(3) During printing• During printing, the difference in temperature between that detected by heating roller

thermistor/1 and that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 is equal to, or morethan, a specified value and that condition lasts for 1 sec. or more.

8/21/2019 652 Service



192

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

21.3.8 Heating roller alternative temperature control

A. Control start conditions• Temperature control for the heating roller is provided based on the temperature detected

by the heating roller temperature sensor/1.

• If condensation on the heating roller temperature sensor is detected, the heating roller

temperature control is provided based on the temperature detected by the heating roller

thermistor/1, instead of that detected by the heating roller temperature sensor/1. This

control is referred to as the heating roller alternative temperature control.

• When the control is switched to the alternative temperature control, the machine displays

the corresponding P code “P-32 Heating roller temperature sensor/1 temperature detec-

tion failure” on the control panel.

B. Control termination conditions• If the difference in temperature between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and

that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 becomes less than a specified value

during the alternative temperature control, the machine determines that condensation on

the heating roller temperature sensor/1 has been eliminated and resumes the tempera-

ture control based on the temperature detected by the heating roller temperature sensor/ 1.

• If the difference in temperature between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and

that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 is not improved even after the lapse

of 10 min. after the alternative temperature control has been initiated, the machine deter-

mines that the cause is not condensation, but contamination, on the lens and terminates

the heating roller alternative temperature control.

C. Print job during the alternative temperature control• If a print job is received during the heating roller alternative temperature control, control

is performed according to the settings made in “Enhunced Security” of “Service Mode”.

Reference: Service Mode – Enhunced Security – Engine FW DipSW – Switch No. 4 –Fusing unit alternative temperature control

• If “OFF” is selected, the machine disables any print job during the alternative tempera-

ture control.

• If “ON” is selected, the machine enables a print job during the alternative temperature

control.

• The print job during the alternative temperature control is processed at 50% productivity.

• The default setting is “OFF”.

21.3.9 Heating roller temperature sensor contamination detection control

A. Detection of contamination on the heating roller temperature sensor• The control of detection of contamination on the heating roller temperature sensor (here

in after referred to as “contamination detection control”) is to determine degradation of

detection accuracy of the heating roller temperature sensor/1 caused by contamination.

• The contamination detection control is performed only in the standby state. No control is

provided during the alternative temperature control initiated by condensation of the tem-

perature sensor.

• If contamination of the lens of the heating roller temperature sensor/1 is detected, the

machine displays the corresponding trouble code “C-392A Fusing sensor contamination

(NC sensor)” on the control panel. It then shuts down the circuit to the main coil and

soaking roller heater lamp and terminates fusing unit temperature control.

8/21/2019 652 Service



193

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

B. Contamination detection conditions(1) Control start conditions• The contamination detection control is started if, at any timing 30 sec. or more after the

completion of the warm-up, the difference in temperature between that detected by heat-

ing roller thermistor/1 and that detected by heating roller temperature sensor/1 is equal

to, or more than, a specified value and that condition lasts for 1 sec. or more.

(2) Control termination conditions• The contamination detection control is terminated if, at any timing within 10 min. after the

contamination detection control has been started, the difference in temperature between

that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and that detected by heating roller tempera-

ture sensor/1 is equal to, or less than, a specified value.

• The contamination detection control is terminated if the machine enters any mode other

than the current one, including the warm-up as initiated by the start of a print cycle or

restart, or the low power mode.

(3) Criteria for contamination• If, after the start of the contamination detection control, the difference in temperature

between that detected by heating roller thermistor/1 and that detected by heating rollertemperature sensor/1 is equal to, or more than, a specified value and that condition lasts

for 10 min. or more, the machine determines that the heating roller temperature sensor/1

lens is contaminated and displays the corresponding trouble code.

21.3.10 Protection against abnormal temperature

• The machine provides protection against abnormally high temperature of the fusing unit

in the following three steps.

A. Soft protection• When the temperature higher than the control range at each roller is detected more than

1 second, the temperature is judged to be abnormally high, and the trouble code

appears.

• When the trouble code is displayed, printing will be prohibited.

Roller name Sensor name: code

Detected

temperature

(Degrees

centigrade)

Trouble code

Heating roller

Heating roller temperature

sensor/1: TEMS/1225 C3725

Fusing abnormally high

temperature detection_

NC sensor





Center of the heating roller





Edge of the heating roller

Soaking rollerSoaking roller thermistor/1:

TH2185 C3724



Soaking side

8/21/2019 652 Service



194

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. Hard protection• Next level is provided when the first level (soft protection) cannot detect due to CPU over-

run.

• The heater relay, through the printer control board, is turned OFF in the second level

(hard protection) operation to block the power supply to the IH coil and soaking roller

heater lamp.

• When the controlled temperature of each roller is detected higher than the predeter-

mined value, the temperature is judged to be abnormally high, and the trouble codeappears.

• Through these control procedures, the power supply to the IH coil and soaking roller

heater lamp can be shut down before the thermostat is activated in the third level (over-

heat protection). It thereby suppresses damage to the fusing unit itself.

C. Overheat protection• If the abnormal high temperature of soft protection/hard protection cannot be detected

due to a faulty temperature sensor or thermistor, thermostat blocks the power supply to

each heater lamp.

• The thermostat rating is 210 degrees centigrade for both the heating roller thermostat

and the soaking roller thermostat. The ratings do not, represent the actual surface tem-

perature of the corresponding rollers, since the thermostats are installed in a non-contact

with respect to each of the rollers.

21.3.11 Sensor disconnection detection control

• If the temperature sensor/thermistor fails to reach the specified temperature in the givenperiod after the warm-up started, the sensor is judged to have disconnection, and the

trouble code will appear.

Roller name Sensor name: code

Detected

temperature

(Degrees

centigrade)

Trouble code

Heating roller

Heating roller thermistor/1:

TH1 195C3721

Fusing abnormally hightemperature detection_

Center of the heating rollerHeating roller temperature

sensor/2: TEMS/2260






Soaking rollerSoaking roller thermistor/2:

TH3185 C3724



Soaking side

Roller name Sensor name: code Trouble code

Heating roller

Heating roller temperature sensor/1:

TEMS/1C3925

Fusing sensor wire breaks detection_

NC sensor


TEMS/2C3921


Center of the heating roller


TEMS/3C3922



Soaking roller Soaking roller thermistor/1: TH2 C3924Fusing sensor wire breaks detection_

Soaking side

8/21/2019 652 Service



195

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

21.3.12 Brandnew detection

• The fusing unit is not provided with a new unit detection function.

• When the fusing unit is replaced with a new one, the counter must be reset to zero using

the function of “New Release” of the Service Mode.

Reference: Service Mode – Counter – Life – New Release

21.3.13 Fusing cooling control

[1] Paper cooling fan motor (FM13) [2] Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2)

[3] Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5) [4] Cooling fan motor (FM3)

A2WUT2C078DA

[1] [2]

[3]

[4]

8/21/2019 652 Service



196

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

A. Cooling of the IH coil unit• The machine is provided with the cooling fan motor for cooling the IH coil that heats the

heating roller and heat accumulated in and around the toner cartridge/K.

• Outside air is drawn into the inside of the machine through its backside and is blown

through a ventilation duct against the IH coil unit to let it cool down. The areas around the

toner cartridge/K is also cooled as the air flows through the ventilation duct.

• Heated air flowing through the IH coil unit is discharged through the slit in the upper sur-

face of the unit. It is then discharged to the outside of the machine by way of the exit sec-tion.

[1] Outside air [2] Cooling fan motor (FM3)

[3] Ventilation duct [4] IH coil (FH1)

A2WUT2C079DA

[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

8/21/2019 652 Service



197

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

B. Cooling of the fusing unit• The machine is provided with the fusing cooling fan motor/1, paper cooling fan motor and

fusing cooling fan motor/3 for cooling the fusing unit and the paper after the fusing pro-

cess and drawing smell of the fusing section.

• Outside air is drawn into the inside the machine and heated air in and around the fusing

unit is drawn and discharged to the outside of the machine through the ventilation duct.

• Outside air is drawn into the inside of the machine through the upper surface of the exit

section and is blown against the paper being transported through the exit section to let itcool down. It also cools the machine interior near the fusing section. The heated air is

discharged to the outside of the machine through the exit section.

[1] Discharge air [2] Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2)

[3] Outside air [4] Paper cooling fan motor (FM13)

[5] Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5)

A2WUT2C080DA

[3]

[4]

[2]

[1]

[5]

8/21/2019 652 Service


22. DUPLEX SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

198

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

22. DUPLEX SECTION

22.1 Configuration

A00JT2C291AA

A00JT2C275AA

ADU paper passage sensor/1 (PS47)

ADU door sensor (PS49)

ADU paper passage sensor/2(PS48)

A0P0T5C076DA

ADU transport roller 2 ADU transport roller 3

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 22. DUPLEX SECTION

199

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

22.2 Drive

A00JT2C291AA

ADU transport motor/1(M31)

ADU transport motor/2(M32)





8/21/2019 652 Service



200

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

22.3 Operation

22.3.1 Paper conveyance control

• Paper transported from the paper exit section is conveyed to the internal duplex section

by the ADU transport roller 1 and 2.

• Paper is conveyed to the vertical conveyance section by the ADU transport roller 3 and 4

to re-transport the paper.

A. Transport roller control• ADU transport roller 1 and ADU transport roller 2 are connected to ADU transport motor/

1. When ADU transport motor/1 is energized, these rollers start rotating to transport

paper.

• ADU transport roller 3 and ADU transport roller 4 are connected to ADU transport motor/

2. When ADU transport motor/2 is energized, these rollers start rotating to transport

paper.

A00JT2C245AA

Paper exit section

Switchback roller

Stop position 1


Stop position 2

Timing rollerADU transport roller 3


Stop position 3ADU transport roller 4

ADU paper passage sensor/1(PS47)


Duplex section

Fusing section

Registration

section

8/21/2019 652 Service



201

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

B. Paper entrance control• The switchback motor at the paper exit section is deenergized to stop transport of the

paper temporarily (stop position 1). The switchback motor thereafter rotates backward to

transport the paper into the duplex section.

• When the switchback motor is deenergized, ADU transport motor/1 is energized and

ADU transport roller 1 and ADU transport roller 2 start rotating.

• ADU transport roller 1 transports the paper transported from the paper exit section onto

ADU transport roller 2.• ADU paper passage sensor/1 located downstream of ADU transport roller 2 along the

paper path detects the leading edge of the paper transported from ADU transport roller

1.

• If there is, before the current sheet of paper, another sheet of paper being transported

through the duplex part and if that particular sheet of paper is yet to reach the specified

position before the timing roller, ADU transport motor/1 is deenergized to stop the sheet

of paper temporarily (stop position 2).

• When the advanced sheet of paper moves past the specified position, ADU transport

motor/1 is energized to resume the transport of paper.

• The paper is transported from ADU transport roller 2 to ADU transport roller 3.• If ADU paper passage sensor/1 is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper even

after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after it has detected the leading edge of

the paper, the machine determines that a paper misfeed occurs at the duplex transport

part.

• If ADU paper passage sensor/2 is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper even

after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after ADU paper passage sensor/1 has

detected the leading edge of the paper, the machine determines that a paper misfeed

occurs at the duplex transport part.

C. Duplex paper feed control

• When the leading edge of the paper reaches the specified position, ADU transportmotor/2 is energized and ADU transport roller 3 and ADU transport roller 4 start rotating.

• ADU transport roller 3 transports paper transported from ADU transport roller 2 onto

ADU transport roller 4.

• ADU paper passage sensor/2 located downstream of ADU transport roller 4 along the

paper path detects the leading edge of the paper transported from ADU transport roller

3.

• When the paper moves past ADU transport roller 4 and reaches the specified position,

ADU transport motor/2 is deenergized to stop the transport of the paper temporarily (stop

position 3). If, in this case, the paper has a length of 217 mm or more in the sub scanning

direction, ADU transport motor/1 is also deenergized.• At predetermined paper feed timing, ADU transport motor/2 is energized to resume the

transport of the paper. ADU transport motor/1 is also energized if it has been deener-

gized.

• The paper is fed from ADU transport roller 4 onto the timing roller at the vertical transport

part.

• If ADU paper passage sensor/2 is unable to detect the leading edge of the paper even

after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after ADU paper passage sensor/1 has

detected the leading edge of the paper, the machine determines that a paper misfeed

occurs at the duplex transport part.

8/21/2019 652 Service



202

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

22.3.2 Duplex circulation control

• The duplex circulation control is performed differently according to the sub scanning

direction length of the paper.

A. One-sheet circulation operation

Sub scanning direction paper lengthDuplex circulation control

Lower limit Upper limit

433 mm or more Less than 459 mm One-sheet circulation operation

217 mm or more Less than 433 mm Two-sheet circulation operation

- Less than 217 mm Three-sheet circulation operation

Operation 1

• One sheet of paper is supplied and the image of the sec-

ond page is printed.

2

A00JT2C236AA

A00JT2C237AA

2

Operation 2

• After the paper transported to the paper exit part stops at

the stop position 1, the switchback roller turns around to

send the sheet to the duplex part (paper reversed).

Stop position 1

A00JT2C238AA

2

Operation 3

• The paper transported to the duplex part is transported to

the stop position 3 (ADU transport roller 4) faster than the

system speed.

• It stops at the stop position 3 (ADU transport roller 4).

Stop position 3

8/21/2019 652 Service



203

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

• Steps 2 through 5 are repeated.

(1) Operation timing

Operation 4

• The image of the first page is printed on the paper re-sup-

plied from the duplex section.

A00JT2C239AA

1 2

Operation 5

• The first sheet of the paper is fed out.

• The image of fourth page is printed on the second sheet.

A00JT2C240AA

1

2

4


Exhaust sensor (PS39)

Gate switch solenoid (SD)

Exit motor (M4)

Switchback motor (M33)

Normal rotation

Inverse rotation

ADU transport motor/1 (M31)



Instruction form theoptimal paper position

A0P0T5E116DA

Stop before re-supplyof paper

One A4-size original for 2-sided

printing

8/21/2019 652 Service



204

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

B. Two-sheet circulation operation

Operation 1

• The first sheet of paper is supplied and the image of the

second page is printed.

2

A00JT2C236AA

Operation 2

• The first sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit sec-

tion and transported onto the duplex section.

• The second sheet of paper is supplied.

A00JT2C242AA

2

Operation 3

• The first sheet of the paper is sent trough the duplex sec-

tion and stops at the stop position 3 (ADU transport roller

4).• The image of the fourth page is printed on the second

sheet of paper.

A00JT2C243AA

4

2

Operation 4

• The first sheet of the paper is re-supplied and an image of

the first page is printed on.• The second sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit

part and transported onto the duplex section.

• The third sheet of paper is supplied.

A00JT2C244AA

1

4

6

2

8/21/2019 652 Service



205

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N


Operation 5

• The first sheet of paper is fed out.

• The second sheet of paper waits at stop position3 (ADU

transport roller 4).

• The image of the sixth page is printed on the third sheet of

paper.

A00JT2C246AA

1

4

2

6

Operation 6

• The second sheet of the paper is re-supplied.

• The third sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit sec-

tion and transported onto the duplex part.

A00JT2C247AA

1

4

2

6

Operation 7

• The image of the third page is printed on the second sheet

of paper.

• The third sheet of paper is transported in the duplex sec-

tion.• The fourth sheet of paper is supplied.

A00JT2C248AA

1

2

6

43

Operation 8

• The second sheet of the paper is fed out.

• The third sheet of the paper waits at stop position 3 (ADUtransport roller 4).

• The image of eighth page is printed on the fourth sheet of

the paper.

A00JT2C249AA

1

2

68

3

4

8/21/2019 652 Service



206

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

C. Three-sheet circulation operation

2

A0P0T5C040DA

Operation 1

• The first sheet of paper is supplied and the image of the

second page is printed.

A0P0T5C041DA

2

4

Operation 2

• The first sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit section

and transported onto the duplex section.

• The second sheet of paper is supplied and the image of the

fourth page is printed.

• The third sheet of paper is supplied.

A0P0T5C042DA

4

2

6

Operation 3

• The first sheet of the paper is transported onto, and stopped

at, stop position 3 (ADU transport roller part).

• The second sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit sec-

tion and transported onto the duplex part.

• The image of the sixth page is printed on the third sheet of

paper.

Operation 4

• The first sheet of paper is transported onto the vertical

transport section.

• The second sheet of paper is transported into the duplex

section.

• The third sheet of paper is transported onto the paper exit

section.

A0P0T5C043DA

6

2

4

Operation 5

• The first sheet of paper is re-supplied and the image of the

first page is printed on it.

• The second sheet of the paper is transported onto, and

stopped at stop position 3 (ADU transport roller 4).

• The third sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit part

and transported onto the duplex section.

• The fourth sheet of paper is supplied.

A0P0T5C044DA

1 2

4

6

8/21/2019 652 Service



207

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N


A00JT2C253AA

1

28

4

6

Operation 6

• The first sheet of paper is fed out.

• The second sheet of paper waits at stop position 3.

• The third sheet of the paper is transported onto, and

stopped at, stop position 2 (ADU transport roller 2).

• The image of the eighth page is printed on the fourth sheet

of paper.

A0P0T5C045DA

1

2

4

8

6

Operation 7

• The second sheet of paper is transported onto the vertical

transport section.

• The third sheet of paper is transported into the duplex sec-

tion.

• The fourth sheet of paper is transported onto the paper exit

section.

A2WUT2C102DA

1

2

3 46

8

Operation 8

• The image of the third page is printed on the second sheet

of paper.

• The third sheet of the paper is transported onto, and

stopped at, stop position 3 (ADU transport roller 4).

• The fourth sheet of paper is reversed at the paper exit sec-

tion and transported onto the duplex section.

• The fifth sheet of paper is supplied.

A0P0T5C047DA

3

4

10

6

8

1

2

Operation 9

• The second sheet of paper is fed out.

• The third sheet of paper waits at stop position 3 (ADU trans-

port roller 4).

• The fourth sheet of the paper is transported onto, and

stopped at stop position 2 (ADU transport roller 2).

• The image of the tenth page is printed on the fifth sheet of

paper.

A0P0T5C048DA

3

4

10

6

8

1

2

Operation 10

• The third sheet of paper is transported onto the vertical

transport section.

• The fourth sheet of paper is transported onto the duplex

section.

• The fifth sheet of paper is transported onto the paper exit

section.

8/21/2019 652 Service


23. PAPER EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

208

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

23. PAPER EXIT SECTION

23.1 Configuration

A00JT2C309AA

A00JT2C280AA

Paper exit sensor(PS39)

Paper exit roller 1

Paper exit roller 2

Switchback paper exit section

Switchback roller

Paper exit section

Paper exit switch gate

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 23. PAPER EXIT SECTION

209

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

23.2 Drive

• The paper exit and switchback roller are driven by the exclusive motor.

A00JT2C310AA

Paper exit motor (M4)

Switchback roller

Paper exit roller 2

Switchback Motor (M33)

8/21/2019 652 Service



210

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

23.3 Operation

23.3.1 Transport control

• The paper exit section feeds the paper transported from the fusing section out onto the

exit tray using paper exit roller 1 and paper exit roller 2.

• In the 2-sided print mode, the paper that has undergone the first print cycle is trans-

ported onto the switchback roller by changing the paper path after it has moved past

paper exit roller 1. The paper is transported onto the duplex section. The second printcycle is thereafter completed and the paper is fed from the fusing section and out onto

the exit tray by paper exit roller 1 and paper exit roller 2.

• If the machine is equipped with a finisher or other optional unit, the paper fed from the

fusing section is transported onto the optional unit by paper exit roller 1 and paper exit

roller 2.

A. Paper transport path

A00JT2C235AA

Paper exit sensor (PS39)

Switchback position

When the exit part are

transported

Duplex section

Fusingsection

Paper exit roller 1

Switchback roller


Paper exit section

When the switchbackare transported

Paper exit roller 2

Paper exit switch gate

2-sided transport

Paper exit

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 23. PAPER EXIT SECTION

211

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

B. Paper exit control• The paper exit roller 1 is connected to the fusing motor. When the fusing motor is ener-

gized, the paper exit roller 1 is synchronized with the fusing roller and the roller 1 starts

rolling.

• The paper exit roller 2 is connected to the paper exit motor. When the paper exit motor is

energized, the paper exit roller 2 starts rolling.

• When the paper transported from the fusing section reaches a specified position, the exit

motor is energized and the paper exit roller 2 starts rotating.• Paper exit roller 1 transports the paper onto the paper exit switch gate.

• The paper exit sensor located downstream of paper exit roller 1 along the paper path

detects the leading edge of the paper that has moved past paper exit roller 1.

• The paper is guided onto paper exit roller 2 by the paper exit switch gate in its upper

position (the paper exit switch gate is in its upper position in the initial state).

• Paper exit roller 2 feeds the paper out onto the exit tray outside the machine.


detects the trailing edge of the paper that has moved past paper exit roller 1.

• If the paper exit sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper even after the

lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a paper misfeedoccurs at the fusing section.

C. Switchback control• The switchback roller 1 is connected to the switchback motor. When the switchback

motor rotates forward, the switchback rollers rotate forward; when the switchback motor

rotates backward, the switchback rollers rotate backward.

• The paper exit switch gate is connected to the gate switch solenoid. When the gate

switch solenoid is energized, the paper exit switch gate is swung down to its lower posi-

tion (at which paper is transported toward the paper feed section).

• When the paper transported from the fusing section reaches a specified position, the

paper exit motor is energized and the paper exit roller 2 start rotating.• When the paper reaches the specified position, the switchback motor rotates forward and

the paper exit rollers start rotating forward.

• Paper exit roller 1 transports the paper toward the paper exit switch gate.


detects the leading edge of the paper that has moved past paper exit roller 1.

• When the paper reaches a specified position, the gate switch solenoid is energized to

swing down the paper exit switch gate to the lower position (at which paper is transported

toward the paper feed section).

• The paper exit switch gate swung into its lower position guides the paper toward the

switchback roller.• The paper exit sensor located downstream of paper exit roller 1 along the paper path

detects the trailing edge of the paper that has moved past paper exit roller 1.

• If the exhaust sensor is unable to detect the trailing edge of the paper even after the

lapse of a predetermined period of time, the machine determines that a paper misfeed

occurs at the fusing section.

• When the paper reaches a specified position, the switchback motor is deenergized and

then the switchback rollers start rotating backward.

• The switchback rollers rotate backward to transport the paper into the duplex section.

8/21/2019 652 Service



212

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

(1) Operation timing

Fusing motor (M30)

Exhaust sensor (PS39)

Gate switch solenoid (SD)

Switchback motor (M33)Nomal rotation

Inverse rotation


Instruction form theoptimal paper position

Switchback motorturns around

A00JT2E531DA

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL

213

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL

24.1 Overview

• The following controls are performed to ensure stabilized print image. We call this control

method “image stabilization control”.

Control Purpose Sensor

• IDC sensor adjustment control

• Dmax density adjustment control

• LD intensity adjustment control

• Gamma correction control

• To stabilize image density

• To stabilize gradation

• IDC sensor

• Temperature/humidity sensor

• TCR sensor/K automatic adjust-

ment control

• Toner replenishing control

• To stabilize toner density • TCR sensor

• 1st transfer output control

• 2nd transfer output control

(ATVC)

• To stabilize image transfer • Temperature/humidity sensor

8/21/2019 652 Service


24. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

214

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

24.1.1 Image stabilization control chart

A2WUT2E094DA

IN

OUT

Transfer ATVC control

IDC sensor

Temperature/ humidity sensor· To be set on control panel

D MAX density Background voltage margin ATDC toner supply

OUT/IN

Toner replenishingcontrol

TCR sensor Developing bias Vdc Grid voltage Vg

Image densityGradation controlGamma correction dataGradation correction table

PCdrum/ K

Toner supply motor 2nd transfer roller

8/21/2019 652 Service



215

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

24.1.2 Overview of each control

A. IDC sensor adjustment control• Inhibits changes in characteristics of the signal detected by the IDC sensor that occur

due to changes in different functions achieved by the “IDC sensor” and “transfer belt”

(part-to-part variations, change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of parts used over

time, and deterioration resulting from use over time).

• The intensity of the LED light-emitting section is corrected such that the output value of

the IDC sensor photo receiver is constant on the surface of the transfer belt, on which no

toner sticks.

B. Dmax density adjustment control• Inhibits changes in the print image density that occur due to changes in different func-

tions achieved by the “developing characteristics” and “photo conductor electrostatic

characteristics” (part-to-part variations, change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of

parts used over time, and deterioration resulting from use over time).

• Patterns are produced on the surface of the transfer belt and the IDC sensor detects the

amount of toner sticking to them. The developing bias (Vdc) and grid voltage (Vg) are

corrected.C. LD (laser diode) intensity adjustment control• Inhibits changes in reproducibility of fine lines and void areas that occur due to changes

in different functions achieved by the “photo conductor electrostatic characteristics”,

“developing characteristics”, and “image transfer characteristics” (part-to-part variations,

change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of parts used over time, and deterioration

resulting from use over time).

• A detection pattern of a toner image is produced on the surface of the transfer belt with a

laser beam (LD1/LD2) at a predetermined LD intensity emitted from the PH unit and the

output value of the IDC sensor photo receiver is detected.

• LD intensity (LD1/LD2) is corrected from the detected IDC sensor output data.

D. Gamma correction control• Inhibits changes in gradation characteristics that occur due to changes in different func-

tions achieved by the “photo conductor electrostatic characteristics” and “developing

characteristics” (part-to-part variations, change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of

parts used over time, and deterioration resulting from use over time).

• A gradation pattern of a toner image is produced on the surface of the transfer belt and

gradation characteristics of the pattern are detected by the IDC sensor. From the data

detected by the sensor, gamma correction data is calculated for printing linear gradations

and the LD intensity of the laser beam emitted from the PH unit is corrected to an opti-

mum value.

E. TCR control• Part-to-part variations are corrected using the TCR sensor of the new developing unit.

• A new developing unit is loaded with fresh developer. Toner and carrier in the developer

are mixed together at a predetermined ratio (mixing ratio of toner and carrier: T/C ratio).

The TCR sensor is automatically adjusted so as to detect a predetermined value for its

output with the fresh developer.

• The TCR control is performed only when the developing unit is replaced with a new one.

8/21/2019 652 Service



216

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

F. Toner replenishing control• The toner replenishing amount is determined and supplied based on data detected by

the TCR sensor and print information to thereby inhibit the T/C ratio from fluctuating due

to toner being consumed during the print cycle.

• Toner replenishing control is performed at regular intervals while the K developing motor

is being energized.

G. 1st transfer output control• Sets the 1st transfer current that is optimum for transferring toner image on the photo

conductor onto the transfer belt when the toner image is to be formed on the transfer belt.

• The 1st transfer current is determined according to the “process speed” and “machine

interior temperature/humidity”.

• The 1st transfer output control is performed each time a toner image is to be formed on

the surface of the transfer belt.

H. 2nd transfer output control (ATVC control)• Inhibits changes in 2nd transfer characteristics that occur due to changes in different

functions achieved by the “transfer belt unit” and “2nd transfer roller” (part-to-part varia-

tions, change in interior temperature/humidity, wear of parts used over time, and deterio-ration caused by use over time).

• A constant current is passed through the 2nd transfer roller and the resultant voltage is

measured. The measured voltage is corrected to calculate the 2nd transfer output volt-

age.

• The ATVC control is performed under any of the following conditions:

- Sub-power switch is turned ON.

- A predetermined range of change is detected in temperature/humidity from the tem-

perature/humidity detected during performance of the preceding ATVC control.

- The preceding ATVC control has not been normally terminated.

8/21/2019 652 Service



217

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

24.2 Image stabilization control operation sequence

• The following four types of modes are available for the image stabilization control.

• Each mode is executed in the specified sequence.

*: If data after the gamma correction exceeds a predetermined value when gamma correc-

tion of mode 3 is executed, mode 3 is selected and the gamma correction is executed in

the next image stabilization control mode even if conditions specify execution of mode 4.

If conditions specify execution of modes 1/2, modes 1/2 are executed.

Sequence

Image stabilization control mode

Mode 1

(New/Unit replace-

ment/Initialize +

image stabilization

control)

Mode 2

(Initialize + image

stabilization control)

Mode 3

(Normal image stabi-

lization control)

Mode 4

(Simplified image sta-

bilization control)

1IDC sensor adjust-

ment

IDC sensor adjust-

ment

IDC sensor adjust-

ment

IDC sensor adjust-

ment

2Dmax density adjust-

ment

Dmax density adjust-

ment


ment


ment

3LD light intensity

adjustment

LD light intensity

adjustment

LD light intensity

adjustmentNot executed

4


ment


ment Gamma correction* Not executed

5LD light intensity

adjustment

LD light intensity

adjustmentNot executed Not executed

6 Gamma correction Gamma correction Not executed Not executed

8/21/2019 652 Service



218

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

24.3 Image stabilization control operating condition

• When the operating condition for each image stabilization control is met, the image stabi-

lization control is performed in the mode that complies with the operating condition.

24.3.1 In standby state

Image stabilization controlmode

Operating condition

Mode 1

(New/Unit replacement/Ini-

tialize + image stabilization

control)

• Transfer belt is replaced with a new one

• Imaging unit/K is removed and reinstalled

• Imaging unit/K is replaced with a new one

• Drum unit/K is replaced with a new one

• Developing unit/K is replaced with a new one

Mode 2

(Initialize + image stabiliza-

tion control)

• “Initialize + Image Stabilization” is selected in the Service Mode

Mode 3

(Normal image stabilization

control)

• A change in temperature/humidity of a predetermined value is

detected since the performance of the preceding image stabilizationcontrol sequence

• A period of 24 hours or more elapses since the performance of the

preceding image stabilization control sequence

• The sub-power switch is turned ON after the lapse of 16 hours or more

after the sub-power switch has been turned OFF

• The sub-power switch is turned ON after the lapse of 8 hours or more

after the sub-power switch has been turned OFF and in an ambience

of the machine interior relative humidity of 17% or less, or 69% or

more

• P code “P-5 (IDC sensor failure)” or “P-9 (Drum/Development unit (K)

failure)” is detected• “Stabilization Only” is selected in the Service Mode

Mode 4

(Simplified image stabiliza-

tion control)

• Simplified image stabilization control is not executed in standby state

8/21/2019 652 Service



219

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

24.3.2 Before, during, and after a print cycle

*: The number of printed pages is counted such that a paper length (length in the sub-

scanning direction) equivalent to that of A4 is counted as one.

Image

stabilization

control mode

Operating condition

Execution timingTemperature/humidity

inside the machine after last

image stabilization opera-

tion

Number of print count after

last image stabilization

operation*

Mode 1 Image stabilization controls of mode 1 and 2 are not performed before, during, and after

a print cycle.Mode 2

Mode 3There is a change exceed-

ing a predetermined value.

Less than 2,000The control is executed at

the end of a current job

2,000 or moreThe control is started even

during an execution of a job

Mode 4

There is not a change

exceeding a predetermined

value.

Less than 2,000 The control is not executed

2,000 or moreThe control is started even

during an execution of a job


216 mm or less 1

Over 216 mm and up to 432 mm or less 2




Over 1080 mm 6

8/21/2019 652 Service



220

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

24.4 Utility/ Service Mode

24.4.1 Expert Adjustment

• Setting items as they relate to image stabilization control within the expert adjustment.


24.4.2 Service Mode

• Setting items as they relate to image stabilization control within the service mode.


Utility Remarks

Adminis-trator

Settings

SystemSettings

ExpertAdjust-

ment

ImageStabiliza-

tion

Initialize + Imagestabilization

Image stabilization control mode 2 isexecuted

Image stabiliza-

tion only

Image stabilization control mode 3 is

executed

Grada-

tion

Adjust-

ment

Image stabiliza-

tion only

Image stabilization control mode 3 is

executed

Print

Copy

Service Mode Remarks

Machine LD adjustment LD Timing Adj.

LD 1/2 Balance Adj.

Image Process

Adjustment

Max Image Den-

sity Adj.

Copy

Printer

Image Background Adj.

Stabilizer Initialize + Image stabili-zation

Image stabilization control mode 2 isexecuted

Image stabilization only Image stabilization control mode 3 is

executed

8/21/2019 652 Service



221

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

24.5 Image stabilization control operating time

• bizhub 652/602

• bizhub 552/502

States Time

Mode 1 (New/Unit replacement/Initialize + image stabilization control) 11.9 sec

Mode 2 (Initialize + image stabilization control) 11.9 sec

Mode 3 (Normal image stabilization control) 8.9 sec

Mode 4 (Simplified image stabilization control) 5.1 sec

States Time

Mode 1 (New/Unit replacement/Initialize + image stabilization control) 13.5 sec

Mode 2 (Initialize + image stabilization control) 13.5 sec

Mode 3 (Normal image stabilization control) 10.0 sec

Mode 4 (Simplified image stabilization control) 5.6 sec

8/21/2019 652 Service


25. IMAGE PROCESSING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

222

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

25. IMAGE PROCESSING

25.1 Scanner section image processing block diagram

• The following detail the image processing operations performed by the scanner section.

1. A reduction type CCD sensor is used to read the light reflected off the original and

convert the optical data to a corresponding electric signal. To make data process-

ing faster, data transfer and output are done through two channels, one for even-

numbered pixels and the other for odd-numbered pixels.2. The odd and even analog signals output from the CCD sensor chips are synthe-

sized to form a single string of signal data which is in turn converted to 10-bit digital

signals (1024 gradation levels).

• The image data is transmitted to MFP board on the write section through the interface

cable.

1. Photoelectric conversion

2. Analog-to-digital conversion

CCD board

To the MFP board

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 25. IMAGE PROCESSING

223

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

25.2 Write section image processing block diagram

From scanner section

1. Shading correction

2. Line-to-line variationcorrection/coloraberration correction

3. Detection of security pattern

4. Free erase

6. Image data editing

7. Image area discrimination

8. Monochrome data creation

9. Miscellaneous processing(improved reproduction ofblack text, edge emphasis,and

smoothing)

10. BTC compression

11. Input buffer memory

12. JBIG compression

13. File (code) memory RAM:2GB (standard)

HDD:250GB (standard)

14. JBIG expansion

15. Memory access coordinator

16. Frame memory

MFP board

Mode other thanphoto

17. Output buffer memory

18. BTC expansion

19. Resolution conversion

processing in the main scanning direction/move ment processing

20. Resolution conversion processing in the sub

scanning direction

21. Color conversion processing V to K

22. Embedment of security pattern

23. Area discrimination FEET

24. Interpolation

25. Gamma correctionGamma correction

26. Error diffusion (binary)

27. Screening

28. Main scanning positioncorrectionSpeed conversion

Modulation

To PH unit

5. AE processing

A2WUT2E095DA

8/21/2019 652 Service


25. IMAGE PROCESSING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

224

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

• The following describe details of image processing.

1. Correct variations in reading caused by pixel-to-pixel variations in sensitivity of the

CCD sensor and uneven light distribution by the exposure lamp. A peak-hold-type

shading correction is performed, in which the maximum value of two or more read-

ings of two or more lines is taken to prevent effect due to dust or dirt on the shading

sheet.

2. To correct differences in the position of each chip of CCD sensors R, G, and B,

FIFO memory is adopted to match the output timing. Also correct color aberrationof the lens.

3. The security pattern created during printing on this machine is detected and copy-

ing is enabled or disabled through a password (when the security kit SC-507 is

mounted).

4. If outer document elimination is selected from the control panel, document area

determination processing is performed for each line within the document area data

acquired during prescan. Then, the START and END positions of the document

area in the main scanning direction are detected and the area outside the START

and END positions is erased as the outside-the-document area.

5. A histogram of lightness for AE processing is generated. The AE level of the docu-ment is determined based on this histogram and AE processing is performed.

6. R, G, and B data are then converted to value and color component data for adjust-

ments of saturation, lightness, and hue.

7. Each image area, whether it is a color edge area, black edge area, dot area, or a

continuous gradation area, is discriminated.

8. Monochrome data is created.

9. Other types of processing performed are the improved reproduction of black text,

edge emphasis and smoothing.

10. Each Image data of R, G, and B is compressed to reduce the consumption of data

capacity.

11. Temporarily stores the BTC-compressed image data.12. The stored image data is compressed in the JBIG (Joint bi-level image experts

group) format.

13. Each Image data of R, G, and B in the copy, print, scan, and fax mode is stored. In

PS printing, multi-valued data of Y, M, C, and K is stored.

14. The image data read from the file memory is uncompressed through a method of

JBIG compression. At this time, image rotating or sorting processing is conducted.

15. JBIG image data are expanded in the frame memory.

16. Each Image data of R, G, and B is stored in frame memory.

17. Temporarily stores the image data output from the frame memory.

18. The image data is uncompressed through a method of BTC compression.19. FIFO memory is used to enlarge or reduce images in the main scanning direction.

The image is enlarged by increasing the number of data readings and reduced by

decreasing the number of data readings.

20. Reduction processing is conducted in sub scanning direction. No processing is

done at same size or zoom, but at reduction, the lines are thinned out.

21. When copying in a photo mode or making PC print, the V data is converted to the K

density data. Also, the masking processing, which compensates for the deviation in

the spectral reflection characteristics of the toner, and UCR/BP processing are per-

formed on the image data.

22. The security pattern is embedded in the image data. Either enabling copying

through a password or unconditionally prohibiting copying can be selected from thecontrol panel for the security pattern to be embedded (when the security kit SC-507

is mounted).

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 25. IMAGE PROCESSING

225

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

23. Edge of letter and lineal drawing gets area discrimination and FEET processing is

conducted according to the discrimination result.

24. When FEET processing is conducted, interpolation is done so that no influence is

given to continuous gradation portion.

25. Makes the necessary corrections so that the printed gradations have linear charac-

teristics, since the image density of the input image data is not directly proportional

to that of the printed image because of the changing developing and photo conduc-

tor characteristics.26. In photo mode during copying and PC print, the image is processed as multi-valued

data (8-bit data). In any mode other than photo, the error diffusion method is

employed to process the image as binary (1-bit) data.

27. Creates the density distribution of a predetermined pattern to enable outstanding

gradation reproduction.

28. Adjust the processing speed in the board (main scanning) to conform to the input

processing speed. The laser is emitted according to the laser intensity information.

8/21/2019 652 Service


26. POWER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

226

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

26. POWER SUPPLY SECTION

26.1 Parts energized when the main power switch is turned ON

26.1.1 Configuration

26.1.2 Operation• When the main power switch is turned ON, power is supplied from the DC power supply

unit to the following components.

A2WUT2C082DA

Main power switch(Power switch) (SW1)

Voltage Power supplied to

12V Fax board, control panel

5V MFP board, HDD, Fax board, Scanner section

3.3V Control panel

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 26. POWER SUPPLY SECTION

227

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

26.1.3 Auto power OFF system

• The main power switch is mounted with a function that automatically turns it OFF.

Using Utility - Administrator Settings - System Settings - Power Save Settings, the time of

day can be set at which to turn OFF the power (default setting: not turning OFF).

For details, see Field Service of the service manual.

[1] Main power switch (Power switch)

(Front view)

[2] Main power switch (Power switch)

(Rear view)

A2WUT2C083DA

[1]

[2]

8/21/2019 652 Service


26. POWER SUPPLY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

228

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

26.2 Parts energized when the sub power switch is turned ON


26.2.2 Operation

• When the sub power switch is turned ON, MFP board detects it and sends a control sig-

nal to the DC power supply through the printer control board.

• The DC power supply then supplies 3.3 VDC, 5VDC, 12VDC, 15VDC, and 24VDC to all

PWBs and options. It also turns ON the relays in the PWBs and power can be supplied to

the IH heater and the heater lamp.

NOTE• To turn OFF and ON the main power switch, first turn OFF the main power switch

and wait for 10 sec. or more before turning it ON again. If a setting value or valuesin the tech. rep. mode are changed, it takes 10 sec. or more to incorporate the set-ting changes properly in the machine.

A0P0T2E614AA

Sub power switch

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 26. POWER SUPPLY SECTION

229

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

26.3 Power cables


• bizhub 652/552/602/502

26.3.2 Operation

• bizhub 652/552/602/502:

The main body uses a single outlet.

A00HT2C304AA

Power supply:100V 15A110V 15A120V 16A127V 16A220-240V 10A

8/21/2019 652 Service


27. FAN CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

230

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

27. FAN CONTROL

27.1 Configuration

A2WUT2C001DA

Cooling fan motor (FM3)

IU cooling fan motor

(FM15)

Toner suction fanmotor (FM7)

IH cooling fan motor/1(FM10)

MFP controlboard coolingfan motor(FM17)

Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16)

Power supply coolingfan motor (FM9)

Writing cooling fan motor (M14)

Optical cooling fan motor (FM201)


Paper cooling fan motor (FM13)

Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6)


IH cooling fan motor/2(FM12)

Suction fan motor (FM1)

Intake air

Discharge air

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 27. FAN CONTROL

231

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

27.2 Operation

27.2.1 Function

Motor name Control conditions


• Paper will be sucked between transfer part and fusing part, so it will have

a stable behavior and go smoothly into the fusing roller.

• The air inside will be exhausted outside the unit.

Fusing cooling fan motor/

1 (FM2)

• Odor accumulated in the fusing part is absorbed by the odor filter to be

removed.

• Heat accumulated inside the unit will be discharged outside in order to

avoid temperature increase at the fusing part.

Cooling fan motor/1 (FM3)• Heat accumulated inside the unit will be discharged outside in order to

avoid temperature increase at the transfer part or the fusing part.

Fusing cooling fan motor/

3 (FM5)

• Toner with paper heated at the fusing part may adhere to another paper

on the paper exit tray when it will exit on the tray with remaining heat. In

order to avoid toner adhesion to other things, outside air is sent to

ejected paper and toner to cool it down.

Ozone ventilation fan

motor (FM6)

• A white belt may occur on the image because of the lower sensitivity of

the photo conductor due to ozone accumulated around the photo con-

ductor charge corona. In order to avoid this trouble, ozone filter removes

the ozone inside the photo conductor charge corona to keep the sensitiv-

ity of the photo conductor.

• Ozone accumulated around photo conductor charge corona will be

absorbed by ozone filter and be removed.

Toner suction fan motor

(FM7)

• Toner easily scattered around a developing roller is sucked. Sucked air

will be filtered and toner will be discharged outside.

Power supply cooling fan

motor (FM9)


avoid temperature increase at the power part.IH cooling fan motor/1

(FM10)


avoid temperature increase at the IH power used for fusing part.

IH cooling fan motor/2

(FM12)

• In order to avoid the temperature increase around IH power used for the

fusing part, the outside air is sucked into the unit to cool it.

Paper cooling fan motor

(FM13)

• In order to avoid toner adhesion to other things, outside air is sent to

ejected paper to cool it down.

PH cooling fan motor

(FM14)

• In order to avoid the temperature increase around PH, the outside air is

sucked into the unit to cool it.


(FM15)

• In order to avoid the temperature increase around TC part, IU part, trans-

fer unit, etc., the outside air is sucked into the unit to cool it.

Rear side cooling fan

motor (FM16)


avoid temperature increase at rear side of the unit, such as the board

box.

MFP control board cooling

fan motor (FM17)

• Heat accumulated inside the unit will be discharged in order to avoid tem-

perature increase at the MFP board.

Optical cooling fan motor

(FM201)

• Heat accumulated inside the IR part will be discharged in order to avoid

temperature increase at the scanner motor.

Exit cooling fan motor/1, /

2, /3 (FM101, FM102,

FM103)

• In order to avoid toner attachment while the exit plate kit is used, outside

air is applied to the paper to cool it.

• Fan motor for the exit plate kit (0T-503)

8/21/2019 652 Service



232

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

27.2.2 Control conditions

Motor name Control Control conditions (outline)


Stop • Any timing other than below

Full speed

• During print cycle

• During image stabilization performed during print cycle

• During transfer belt cleaning performed during print cycle

• Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjust-

ment.

Power supply cooling

fan motor/1 (FM2)


Full speed



ment.

Cooling fan motor (FM3)

Stop

• During warm-up cycle (in case that warm-up cycle is within

60 sec.)

• For 60 sec. after the start of warm-up cycle (in case that

warm-up cycle is within 60 sec. or more)

Half speed*1

• Other than stop and full speed

Full speed



ment.

Fusing cooling fan

motor/3 (FM5)

Stop• During predrive

• During fusing warm-up

Half speed

*1

• In standby state


Full speed


• Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjust-ment.


• Full speed rotation for 30 sec. after the above operations

Ozone ventilation fan

motor (FM6)


Half speed

• Half speed rotation for a predetermined period of time follow-

ing full speed rotation for 30 sec. after stop of the photo con-

ductor

Full speed


• During image stabilization

• During TCR automatic adjustment

• During auxiliary toner supply• Full speed rotation for 30 sec. after the completion of above

operations and stop of the photo conductor

Color toner suction fan

motor (FM7)

Stop • When the K developing motor is deenergized

Full speed• While the K developing motor remains energized at such tim-

ing as during print cycle or stabilization

Power supply cooling

fan motor (FM9)

Stop • In power OFF state

Half speed

*1• Any timing other than below

Full speed


• Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjust-ment.


8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 27. FAN CONTROL

233

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N


(FM10)


Half speed• Half speed rotation for 30 sec. after the end of following con-

ditions

Full speed



ment.• During fusing warm-up


(FM12)


Full speed



ment.

• During fusing warm-up

Paper cooling fan motor

(FM13)


Half speed• Half speed rotation for 110 sec. after the end of following

conditions

Full speed

• During print cycle• Function for putting through papers is diagnosed as adjust-

ment.

• Full speed rotation for 10 sec. after the end of above opera-

tion

Writing cooling fan

motor (FM14)


Half speed

*1• In standby

Full speed



• Full speed rotation for 10 sec. after print cycle or image stabi-

lization


(FM15)


Full speed• While the K PC motor remains energized at such timing as

during print cycle or stabilization

Rear side cooling fan

motor (FM16)


Full speed





ment.

• Full speed rotation for 10 sec. after the end of above opera-tion

MFP control board cool-

ing fan motor (FM17)

Stop

• When sub power switch is turned OFF

• In sleep state

• In low power state

Half speed • In standby state

Full speed • Any timing other than above

Optical cooling fan

motor (FM201)Full speed • While the exposure lamp (FL201) is ON

Exit cooling fan motor/1

(FM101)


Full speed • Full speed rotation for 30 sec. after paper exit following theend of print cycle


8/21/2019 652 Service



234

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

*1: Half speed control: When switching from stop to half speed control, the fan will rotate atfull speed and then will rotate at half speed.

Exit cooling fan motor2/

3 (FM102,FM103)

Stop• For printing a paper which size is B5 or less. Or other than

following.

Full speed

• Full speed rotation for 30 sec. after paper exit following the

end of print cycle. (For printing a paper which size is larger

that B5.


8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 28. COUNTER CONTROL

235

b i z h u b 6 5 2 / 5 5 2 / 6 0 2 / 5 0 2


O P E R A T I O N

28. COUNTER CONTROL

28.1 Configuration

28.2 Operation

NOTE• The counting modes can be selected at [billing setting] of service mode.

For details, see [Field service/adjustment/setting/billing setting].

A0P0T2C612AA

Total counter

Electronic counter

Key counter (option)

Printer control board(PRCB)

MFP board (MFPB)

Name Function/system

Total counter

• Displays the cumulative number of copies and prints of all jobs.

• A mechanical counter driven by an electric signal

• Counts one when an exit signal is applied to it

Electronic counter

• Number of total in copy/printer/fax/scan mode will be displayed on

the screen as described below.

• Black

• Total counter, large size counter, total (copy + printer), scan counter,

fax TX counter, fax RX counter, No. of originals counter, No. of prints

counter, total duplex counter

• Counts one when an exit signal is applied to it

Key counter (option)

• When charging prints by using the key counter, copies cannot be

made with out the key counter. However PC prints and fax TX/RX

service are available without the key counter.

• Displays the cumulative number of copies while the key counter is

being mounted.

• A mechanical counter driven by an electric signal

• Counts one when a paper take-up start signal or image forming start

signal, whichever occurs earlier, is applied to it

8/21/2019 652 Service


28. COUNTER CONTROL Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

236

bizhub652/552/602/502

O P E R A T I O N

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


D F - 6 1 8

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

DF-618

OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................ 1

2. SECTION CONFIGURATION.................................................................................. 5

3. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................5

CONFIGURATION/OPERATION4. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 6

5. DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 7

6. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 8

6.1 Paper feed section ................................................................................................ 8

6.1.1 Document feed tray ascent/descent mechanism .......................................... 8

6.1.2 Feeding the original....................................................................................... 9

6.1.3 Document set detection ................................................................................ 9

6.1.4 Original size detection................................................................................. 10

6.2 Transport section ................................................................................................ 11

6.2.1 Transfer mechanism.................................................................................... 11

6.2.2 Reading roller pressure/retraction control................................................... 116.3 Turnover/paper exit section................................................................................. 12

6.3.1 Transferring the original............................................................................... 12

6.3.2 Switching mechanism for turnover/paper exit .............................................12

6.3.3 Switch back roller pressure/retraction control ............................................. 14

6.4 Paper path .......................................................................................................... 15

6.4.1 1-sided mode .............................................................................................. 15

6.4.2 2-sided mode .............................................................................................. 16

6.4.3 Mixed original/AMS mode (2-sided) ............................................................ 17

6.5 Open/close detecting section.............................................................................. 19

6.5.1 DF 20 degree open/close detection ............................................................ 19

6.5.2 DF open/close detection ............................................................................. 19

6.6 Cooling inside the unit ........................................................................................20

8/21/2019 652 Service


D F - 6 1 8

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



1

O U T L I N E

D F - 6 1 8

OUTLINE


A. Type

B. Functions

C. Paper type

*1: For the combined original detection mode, refer to the mixed original feed chart.

Name Reverse automatic document feeder

Type

Paper feed section Paper feed from top of stack

Image reading section Sheet-through system

Turnover section Switchback system

Exit section Straight exit system

Installation Screw cramp to the main body

Document alignment Center

Document loading Face up

Modes Standard mode / Mixed original detection mode / FAX mode

Type of document

Standard mode

1-sided mode

35 to 210 g/m2 (9.25 to 55.75 lb)

2-sided mode

50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)

Mixed original detection mode1-sided / 2-sided mode

50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)

FAX mode

1-sided mode

35 to 210 g/m2 (9.25 to 55.75 lb)

2-Sided Mode

50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lb)

Detectable document

size*1Standard mode/FAX mode

Metric area: B6S to A3

Inch area: 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2 to 11 x 17

Capacity 100 sheets (80 g/m2) or stack of 14 mm and below

8/21/2019 652 Service



2

O U T L I N E

D F - 6 1 8

D. Paper feed prohibited originals• If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible.

E. Paper feed not guaranteed originals• If fed, paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible.

Type of original Possible trouble

Sheets stapled or clipped togetherPaper feed failure, damaged sheet, defective drive

mechanism due to jammed staples or clips

Sheets glued together Paper feed failure, damaged sheet

Book original Paper feed failure, damaged sheet

Original weighing less than 35 g/m2 (9.25 lb) or

210 g/m2 (55.75 lb) or morePaper feed failure, transport failure

Sheets folded, torn or wrinkledPaper feed failure, damaged sheet,

transport failure

Sheets severely curledSheets misfed due to being dog-eared or fed in

askew

OHP film (Transparency film) Paper feed failure, transport failure

Label paper Paper feed failure, transport failure

Offset master paper Paper feed failure, transport failureGlossy photographic paper or glossy enamel

paperTransport failure, damaged sheet

Sheets clipped or notched Damaged sheet, transport failure

Sheets patched Patched part folded or torn sheet

Type of Original Possible Trouble

Sheets lightly curled (Curled amount: 10 to 15 mm) Dog-eared, exit failure, transport failure

Heat sensitive paper Edge folded, exit failure, transport failure

Ink jet paper Paper feed failure, transport failure

Sheets with smooth surface (Coated paper) Paper feed failure, transport failure

Intermediate paper Paper feed failure, transport failure

Paper immediately after paper exit from the main unit Paper feed failure, transport failure

Paper with many punched holes (e.g., loose leaf) limited

to vertical feedingMulti-page feed due to flashes from holes

Sheets with 2 to 4 holes Transport failure

Sheets two-folded or Z-folded Transport failure, image deformation

Sheets with rough surface (e.g., letterhead) Paper feed failure

8/21/2019 652 Service



3

O U T L I N E

D F - 6 1 8

F. Mixed original feed chartFor metric

For inch

Max. original

size297 mm 257 mm 210 mm 182 mm 148 mm 128 mm

Mixed original size A3 A4 B4 B5 A4S A5 B5S A5S B6S

297 mm

A3 OK OK - - - - - - -

A4 OK OK - - - - - - -

257 mmB4 OK OK OK OK - - - - -

B5 OK OK OK OK - - - - -

210 mmA4S OK OK OK OK OK OK - - -

A5 NG NG OK OK OK OK - - -

182 mm B5S NG NG OK OK OK OK OK - -

148 mm A5S NG NG NG NG NG NG NG OK -

128 mm B6S NG NG NG NG NG NG NG OK OK

Max. original size 11 8 1 / 2 5 1 / 2

Mixed original size 11 x 17 8 1 / 2 x 11 8 1 / 2 x 14 8 1 / 2 x 11S 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2S

1111 x 17 OK OK - - - -

8 1 / 2 x 11 OK OK - - - -

8 1 / 2

8 1 / 2 x 14 OK OK OK OK OK -

8 1 / 2 x 11S OK OK OK OK OK -

5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2 NG NG OK OK OK -

51

/ 2 51

/ 2 x 81

/ 2S NG NG NG NG NG OK

OK Mixed original feed available (Tilted with in 1.5% or less)

NG No. mixed original feed

- Can not set original

8/21/2019 652 Service



4

O U T L I N E

D F - 6 1 8

G. Machine specifications

H. Operating environmentConforms to the operating environment of the main body.


Power requirementsDC 24 V (supplied from the main unit)

DC 5 V

Max. power

consumption60 W or less

Dimensions

618 mm (W) x 575 mm (D) x 130 mm (H)

24.33 inch (W) x 22.64 inch (D) x 5.12 inch (H)

Weight 16.0 kg (35.27 lb)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. SECTION CONFIGURATION

5

O U T L I N E

D F - 6 1 8


3. PAPER PATH

9J07T2C203c0

Transport section Paper feed section Paper exit section

Turnover section Paper exit turnover section

A0HTT2C001DA

Exit tray

Document read position

Feed tray

8/21/2019 652 Service


4. CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

6

D F - 6 1 8

O P E R A T I O N


4. CONFIGURATION

[1] Transportation cover [5] Original read section

[2] Document feed tray [6] Magnet

[3] Turnover cover

[4] Document guide

A0P0T5C052DA

[1] [2]

[4] [3] A01HT2C002AA[5] [6]

A0HTT4C001DA

Pick-up roller

Separation roller Switch back roller

Reading roller 1

Switch back registration roller

Reading roller 2

Exit switch back roller

Exit roller

Feed roller

Registration roller

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. DRIVE

7


O P E R A T I O N

D F - 6 1 8

5. DRIVE

A0HTT5C001DA

Reading motor (M1)

Exit motor (M3)Take-up motor (M2)

Regist motor (M7)

Lift-up motor (M6)

Switch back rollerpressure/retractionmotor (M5)

Reading roller pressure/ retraction motor (M4)

8/21/2019 652 Service


6. OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

8

D F - 6 1 8

O P E R A T I O N

6. OPERATION

6.1 Paper feed section

6.1.1 Document feed tray ascent/descent mechanism

• The document feed tray will move up to feed the original.

• Ascent/descent of the document feed tray will be performed by the lift-up motor.

A. Document feed tray ascent• The document feed tray will stay in the stand-by position when in stand-by status.

• Setting the original and pressing the start key will move the document feed tray up.

• The lift-up motor will rotate the drive cam through the gear. The lift up lever will move

above the cam, and the document feed tray will move up.

• The document feed tray will stop moving up when the lift up upper sensor is transmitted.

B. Document feed tray descent• When all the originals are fed and the empty sensor is interrupted, the lift-up motor will

reverse.

• The lift-up motor will rotate the drive cam through the gear. The lift up lever will move

above the cam, and the document feed tray will move down.

• The document feed tray will stop moving down when the lift up lower sensor is inter-

rupted.

9J07T2C202c0

Lift up lever

Lift-up motor (M6)

Lift up lowersensor (PS15)

Empty sensor (PS14)

Lift up uppersensor (PS16)

Descent position

Ascent position

Drive cam

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATION

9


O P E R A T I O N

D F - 6 1 8

6.1.2 Feeding the original

• The paper feed section consists of the pick-up roller, feed roller as well as the separation

roller, and is directly driven by the take-up motor.

• Pressing the start key will transfer the original to the registration roller by the pick-up

roller and the feed roller.

6.1.3 Document set detection

• To prevent a document set mistake, the document set sensor detects a document loaded

in the document feed tray.

A07HT2C002DB

Take-up motor (M2)

Pick-up roller

Separation roller

Feed roller

A0HTT6C001DA

Document feed tray

Document setsensor (PS20)

8/21/2019 652 Service



10

D F - 6 1 8

O P E R A T I O N

6.1.4 Original size detection

A. Detecting the width of the original 1• The width of the original will be detected by the document width detection variable resis-

tor under the document feed tray.

• Reference for setting the original on the document feed tray is its center.

B. Detecting the width of the original 2• Three mixed sensors are mounted to where the paper passes immediately after it is fed.

It is for detecting the width of the original for mixed original/AMS.

C. Detecting the length of the original 1

• The length of the original will be detected by the length sensor 1/2/3.• Length sensors 1 and 3 are mounted in this order with the length sensor 2 being closest

to the feed roller.

D. Detecting the length of the original 2• Length of the mixed original/AMS will be calculated by the time before read sensor is

interrupted.

A0HTT6C002DA

Length sensor 1(PS10)



Before readsensor (PS9)

Mixed sensor 1(PS19)



Document width detectionvariable resistor (VR1)

8/21/2019 652 Service



11


O P E R A T I O N

D F - 6 1 8

6.2 Transport section

6.2.1 Transfer mechanism

• The original transferred from the paper feed section will be transferred to the paper exit

section or turnover section by the registration roller, the reading roller 1 and 2, and the

switch back roller.

• The registration roller and the switch back roller are driven by the regist motor.

• Reading roller 1 and 2 are driven by the reading motor.

6.2.2 Reading roller pressure/retraction control• Document speed fluctuates as the trailing edge of the document moves past reading

roller 1. To inhibit these speed fluctuations, the reading roller pressure/retraction motor is

employed to retract reading roller 1.

A07HT2C003DB

Reading motor (M1)

Registrationsensor (PS3)

Reading roller 1

Reading roller 2

Switch back rollerRegist motor (M7)Registration roller

A0HTT6C003DA

Retract readingroller 1

Lever

Reading roller pressure/ retraction motor (M4)

8/21/2019 652 Service



12

D F - 6 1 8

O P E R A T I O N

6.3 Turnover/paper exit section

6.3.1 Transferring the original

• The original transferred from the transport section will switch back or exit by the exit

roller, the switch back roller, and the exit switch back roller.

• The exit roller and the exit switch back roller are driven by the exit motor.

• The switch back roller is driven by the regist motor.

6.3.2 Switching mechanism for turnover/paper exit

A. Turnover section• Pathway of the original will be switched and the original will turnover by the switch back

lever.

• Switch back lever is switched by ON/OFF of the switch back solenoid.

A0HTT6C004DA

Exit motor (M3)

Regist motor (M7)

Switch back rollerExit switch back roller

Exit roller

When in 1-sided mode:Switch back solenoid will be OFF

9J07T2C013DA9J07T2C012DA

When in 2-sided/ mixed original/AMS (1-sided, 2-sided) mode:Switch back solenoid will be ON

Switch back solenoid (SD1)

Exit roller Switch back roller

Switch back lever

8/21/2019 652 Service



13


O P E R A T I O N

D F - 6 1 8

B. Paper exit section• The exit lever will switch the pathway of the original to exit.

• The exit lever will be switched by ON/OFF of the exit switch back solenoid.

9J07T2C014DA

When in 1-sided mode: Exit switch back solenoid will be OFFWhen in 2-sided/mixed original/AMS (1-sided, 2-sided) mode: Exit switch back solenoid will be ON

Exit switch back solenoid (SD2)

Exit lever

Exit switch back roller

8/21/2019 652 Service



14

D F - 6 1 8

O P E R A T I O N

6.3.3 Switch back roller pressure/retraction control

• To enhance productivity in document scanning, control is performed at the turnover sec-

tion by narrowing the gap between two originals so that they pass each other properly at

the switch back roller. The switch back roller pressure/retraction motor provides the drive

for the pressure/retraction operations of the switch back roller.

• This control is performed during the mixed original AMS mode only.

A0HTT6C005DA

A0P0T5C114DA

Switch backroller pressure/ retraction motor(M5)

Switch backroller

8/21/2019 652 Service



15


O P E R A T I O N

D F - 6 1 8

6.4 Paper path

6.4.1 1-sided mode

1. Pressing the start key will lift up the feed tray and press the reading roller 1.

2. After the feed tray is lifted up, the feed motor is started and the pick-up roller and

the feed roller will start rotating to start feeding the first sheet of paper.

3. When the paper reaches the registration roller, a loop is formed in the paper. Then,the regist motor is started, so that the registration roller transfers the paper.

4. The take-up motor is deenergized when a predetermined period of time elapses

after the registration motor has been activated. The reading motor and the exit

motor will start running.

5. It starts reading from the front edge of the original when the before read sensor

turned ON and the specified period of time has passed.

6. Reading roller 1 will be retracted right before the back edge of the original passes

through the reading roller 1. The retracted reading roller 1 will be pressed again to

prepare for the next original.

7. The original will be exit by the reading roller 2 and the exit roller.8. All motors will turn OFF after the back edge of the original turns OFF the exit sen-

sor and the specified period of time is passed.

A0HTT6C007DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



16

D F - 6 1 8

O P E R A T I O N

6.4.2 2-sided mode

1. The first side of the original will be read.

2. The original will be transferred to the turnover section. (Switch back solenoid will be

ON)

3. In order to read the second side of the original which is transferred to the turnover

section, the switch back roller will reverse by the switch pack operation of the regist

motor, and transfer the original to the switch back registration roller.

4. The switch back registration sensor will turn ON and the switch back registration

roller will rotate by the exit motor to transfer the original to the original read section.

5. It starts reading from the front edge of the original when the before read sensor

turned ON and the specified period of time has passed.

6. The original will be transferred to the paper exit turnover section after it is read.

(switch back solenoid will be ON)

Exit switch back roller will reverse by the exit motor’s reverse operation.

7. In order to keep the proper order of the original, exit switch back roller will rotate for-

ward by the exit motor’s forward operation. The original will be turned over and be

discharged.

A0HTT6C008DA

A0HTT6C009DA

A0HTT6C010DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



17


O P E R A T I O N

D F - 6 1 8

6.4.3 Mixed original/AMS mode (2-sided)

• Paper path control will be the same as the 2-sided mode.

1. The original will be fed to detect the paper length. (It will not read the original)

The length of the original will be judged by the before read sensor ON time, and the

width of the original will be judged by the mixed sensor 1, 2, and 3.

2. The original will be fed without the 2nd side being read.

3. After reading the first side, the original will be transferred again to the switch backpart to read the second side.

A0HTT6C011DA

A0HTT6C012DA

A0HTT6C013DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



18

D F - 6 1 8

O P E R A T I O N

4. The original will be transferred to the paper exit turnover section after second side

is read. (Switch back solenoid will be ON)

Exit switch back roller will reverse by the exit motor’s reverse operation.

5. In order to keep the proper order of the original, exit switch back roller will rotate for-

ward by the exit motor’s forward operation. The original will be turned over and be

discharged.

A0HTT6C014DA

A0HTT6C015DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



19


O P E R A T I O N

D F - 6 1 8

6.5 Open/close detecting section

6.5.1 DF 20 degree open/close detection

• The lever actuator is provided to detect the original size when using the auto document

feeder as the original cover.

• When lowering the auto document feeder to 20 degree angle or lower, the angle detec-

tion lever for the original cover on the copier will be pressed to turn ON the 20 degree

sensor.

6.5.2 DF open/close detection

• The magnet is installed to detect the open/close of the auto document feeder on the

copier side.

• The original cover/DF open sensor on the copier will turn ON by the magnet when lower-

ing DF.

A0HTT2C501AAOriginal cover/DF open sensor (RS201)

MagnetLever

8/21/2019 652 Service



20

D F - 6 1 8

O P E R A T I O N

6.6 Cooling inside the unit

• The air will be blown inside the unit by the cooling fan in order to avoid the temperature

increase of the driving motor and the board.

A01HT2C004AA

Cooling fanmotor (FM1)

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


L U - 3 0 1

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

LU-301

OUTLINE1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION .................................................................................. 1


3. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2


5. DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 4

6. OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................... 5

6.1 Paper Feed and Transport Control ....................................................................... 5

6.2 Paper level detection ............................................................................................ 6

6.3 Paper empty detection.......................................................................................... 7

6.4 Paper level indicator ............................................................................................. 7

6.5 Tray lift-up control ................................................................................................. 8

6.5.1 Tray ascend/descend mechanism................................................................. 8

6.5.2 Paper size detection.................................................................................... 10

6.6 Dehumidification heater control .......................................................................... 10

8/21/2019 652 Service


L U - 3 0 1

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION

1

O U T L I N E

L U - 3 0 1

OUTLINE

1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION

A. Type

B. Paper type

*1: Images are out of guarantee.


C. Machine specifications

D. Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.


Name 3,000 sheets Large Capacity Unit

Type External option attached to the right side of the main body


Type Size Weight Capacity

Plain paper

A4, 8 1 / 2 x 11

60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2

16 lb to 24 lb3,000 sheets

Thick paper 191 g/m2 to 120 g/m2

24.25 lb to 32 lb2,500 sheets *2

Thick paper 1+121 g/m2 to 157 g/m2

32.25 lb to 41.75 lb1,750 sheets *2


42 lb to 55.5 lb1,550 sheets *2


55.75 lb to 68 lb1,300 sheets *1 *2

Power requirements DC 24 V, DC 5 V, DC 3.3 V (supplied from the main body)

Max. power


Dimensions367 mm (W) x 528 mm (D) x 405 mm (H)

14.5 inch (W) x 20.75 inch (D) x 16 inch (H)


8/21/2019 652 Service



2

O U T L I N E

L U - 3 0 1


3. PAPER FEED PATH

A03NT1C002AA

Paper feed sectionPaper storage sectionPaper transport section


A03NT1C001AA

Transportation to main body

LU-301Main body

Paper feed from the tray

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. CONFIGURATION

3


O P E R A T I O N

L U - 3 0 1


4. CONFIGURATION

A03NT2C213AA

A03NT2C204AA

Upper limit sensor (PS2)

Paper feed sensor (PS3)

Paper empty sensor (PS4)

Near empty sensor /1 (PS5)


Tray LED (LED)

Dehumidification heater(DH)

LU door switch (MS1)

LU drive board (LUDB)

Tray set sensor (PS1)

Lift-up motor (M1)

8/21/2019 652 Service


5. DRIVE Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

4

L U - 3 0 1

O P E R A T I O N

5. DRIVE

A03NT2C214AA



Transport roller

Feed roller

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. OPERATIONS

5


O P E R A T I O N

L U - 3 0 1

6. OPERATIONS

6.1 Paper Feed and Transport Control

• The feed roller rotates and feeds paper at a predetermined timing.

• The transport rollers rotate and convey paper at a predetermined timing.

• In consecutive print, when the interval between the preceding and following sheets is

below the specified value, the transport rollers temporarily stop to ensure a predeter-mined interval.

• The paper transport speed is faster than the system speed.

• Layout of sensors and rollers

System speed (mm/s) Paper transport speed (mm/s)

310 to 240 420

264 to 216 350

155 to 108 216

A03NT2C001AA




Start key ON



A03NT2C002AA



Feed roller


LU-301Main body

Transfer roller

8/21/2019 652 Service


6. OPERATIONS Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

6

L U - 3 0 1

O P E R A T I O N

6.2 Paper level detection

• The level of the paper still available for use is determined based on the outputs from near

empty sensor/1 and sensor/2.

• A near empty condition is detected when the amount of paper is about 50 sheets.

Reference data:

plain paperPaper full Paper near full Paper available Near empty

Paper level 3000 to 2000 sheets 2000 to 1000 sheets 1000 to 50 sheets 50 to 1 sheets

Near empty sensor /1 blocking blocking unblocking unblocking

Near empty sensor /2 unblocking blocking blocking unblocking

A03NT2C203AA


Paper level detection plate


NotchNotch

8/21/2019 652 Service



7


O P E R A T I O N

L U - 3 0 1

6.3 Paper empty detection

• The paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition.

6.4 Paper level indicator

• The amount of paper still available for use, or the paper level, is indicated by the LED

provided on the right-hand side of the unit as viewed from the front.

• Following describe different paper level conditions.



A03NT2C205AA

A03NT2C205AA


Paper empty condition

Paper still availableUpper limit sensor (PS2)

Paper condition Empty Near emptyOther than empty and near empty conditions,

during lift-up

LED display ON Blinking *1 OFF

A03NT2C204AA

LED

8/21/2019 652 Service



8

L U - 3 0 1

O P E R A T I O N

6.5 Tray lift-up control

6.5.1 Tray ascend/descend mechanism

• The tray is suspended by the wires at the front and rear.

• Rotation of the lift-up motor winds the wires, which causes the tray to go up.

• Opening the LU door disconnects the lift-up motor from the tray ascend/descend mecha-

nism, causing the tray to lower by its own weight.

• There is a drive assist spring used for bringing the tray to a stop at an appropriate height.If the tray lowers when paper is loaded, the height of loaded paper is almost the same as

the height of the tray when the tray is empty.

A03NT2C215AA

Coupling

Lift-up motor (M1)

Drive assist spring

LU door

Wire

Paper tray

Lift-up axis

8/21/2019 652 Service



9


O P E R A T I O N

L U - 3 0 1

A. Closing the LU door• The condition of the upper limit sensor signal is checked when the LU door is closed. If

the upper limit sensor is unblocked, the lift-up motor is energized so that lifting of the tray

is started.

• When the upper limit sensor is blocked after the lifting of the tray has been started, the

lift-up motor is deenergized to complete the lifting of the tray.

B. During a print cycle• As the paper is consumed for a number of print cycles carried out, the pickup roller grad-

ually lowers and eventually unblocks the upper limit sensor. The lift-up motor is then

energized again and the lifting of the tray is started.

• When the upper limit sensor is blocked, the lift-up motor is deenergized to complete the

lifting of the tray.

• The sequence of these operations is repeated. This maintains the pressure (paper take-

up pressure) between the pickup roller and the paper stack at a constant level regardless

of the level of the paper stack left.

A03NT2C216AA


Paper tray

A03NT2C207AA



Lift-up motor (M1)

LU door closed Lifting completed

A03NT2C208AA03NT2C209AA

Upper limit sensor (PS2)Pick-up Roller

8/21/2019 652 Service



10

L U - 3 0 1

O P E R A T I O N

6.5.2 Paper size detection

• The LCT is not capable of detecting the paper size.

• The paper size is set by Service Mode → System 2 → LCT Paper Size Setting.

6.6 Dehumidification heater control• The LCT is equipped with a dehumidification heater as standard.

• The control of the dehumidification heater is operatively associated with turning on or off

of the dehumidifier heater of the machine.

A03NT2E500DA

A03NT2C212AA

Dehumidificationheater (DH)

Right sidesurface

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


L U - 2 0 4

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

LU-204



3. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2


5. DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 4

6. OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................... 5

6.1 Paper feed and transport control .......................................................................... 5

6.2 Paper level detection ............................................................................................ 6

6.3 Paper empty detection.......................................................................................... 7

6.4 Paper level indicator ............................................................................................. 7

6.5 Tray lift-up control ................................................................................................. 8

6.5.1 Tray ascend/descend mechanism................................................................. 8

6.5.2 Paper size detection.................................................................................... 10

6.6 Dehumidification heater control .......................................................................... 11

8/21/2019 652 Service


L U - 2 0 4

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



1

O U T L I N E

L U - 2 0 4

OUTLINE


A. Type

B. Paper type

*1: Images are out of guarantee.


*3: Fixed size for European market

*4: Fixed size for North American market


D. Operating environment• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.


Name 2,500 sheets Large Capacity Unit

Type External option attached to the right side of the main body


Type Size Weight Capacity

Plain paper

A3, B4, A4, A4S,

A3 Wide *3

11 x 17 *4

8 1 / 2 x 14 *4

8 1 / 2 x 11S *4

8 1 / 2 x 11 *4

12 x 18 *4

60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2

16 lb to 24 lb2,500 sheets


24.25 lb to 32 lb2,000 sheets *2

Thick paper 1+ 121 g/m2 to 157 g/m2

32.25 lb to 41.75 lb1,450 sheets *2


42 lb to 55.5 lb1,250 sheets *2


55.75 lb to 68 lb1,000 sheets *1 *2

Power requirements DC 24 V, DC 5 V, DC 3.3 V (supplied from the main body)

Max. power





8/21/2019 652 Service



2

O U T L I N E

L U - 2 0 4


3. PAPER FEED PATH

A0TJT1C001DA

Paper feed section Paper storage sectionPaper transport section


A0TJT1C002DA

Transportation to main body

LU-204Main body

Paper feed from the tray

8/21/2019 652 Service



3


O P E R A T I O N

L U - 2 0 4


4. CONFIGURATION

A0TJT2C002DA

A0TJT2C001DA


Paper feed

sensor (PS3)




Tray LED (LED)

Dehumidification heater (DH)


LU drive board (LUDB)

Tray set sensor (PS1)

Lift-up motor (M1)

Tray set sensor/2 (PS7)

8/21/2019 652 Service



4

L U - 2 0 4

O P E R A T I O N

5. DRIVE

A0TJT2C003DA



Transport roller

Feed roller

8/21/2019 652 Service



5


O P E R A T I O N

L U - 2 0 4

6. OPERATIONS

6.1 Paper feed and transport control

• The feed roller rotates and feeds paper at a predetermined timing.

• The transport rollers rotate and convey paper at a predetermined timing.

• In consecutive print, when the interval between the preceding and following sheets is

below the specified value, the transport rollers temporarily stop to ensure a predeter-mined interval.

• The paper transport speed is faster than the system speed.

• Layout of sensors and rollers

System speed (mm/s) Paper transport speed (mm/s)

310 to 240 420

264 to 216 350

155 to 108 216

A03NT2C001AA




Start key ON



A0TJT2C004DA



Feed roller


LU-204Main body

Transport roller

8/21/2019 652 Service



6

L U - 2 0 4

O P E R A T I O N

6.2 Paper level detection

• The level of the paper still available for use is determined based on the outputs from near

empty sensor/1 and sensor/2.

• A near empty condition is detected when the amount of paper is about 50 sheets.

Reference data:

plain paperPaper full Paper near full Paper available Near empty

Paper level 2500 to 2000 sheets 2000 to 1000 sheets 1000 to 50 sheets 50 to 1 sheets

Near empty sensor /1 blocking blocking unblocking unblocking

Near empty sensor /2 unblocking blocking blocking unblocking

A0TJT2C005DA


Paper level detection plate


Notch

Notch

8/21/2019 652 Service



7


O P E R A T I O N

L U - 2 0 4

6.3 Paper empty detection

• The paper empty sensor detects a paper empty condition.

6.4 Paper level indicator

• The level of the paper still available for use is indicated by the LED provided on the right-

hand side of the unit as viewed from the front, and displayed on the control panel.

• Following describe different paper level conditions.



A0TJT2C006DA


Paper empty condition

Paper still available


Paper condition Empty Near emptyOther than empty and near empty conditions,

during lift-up

LED display ON Blinking *1 OFF

A0TJT2E017DA

LED Displayed on the Control panel

8/21/2019 652 Service



8

L U - 2 0 4

O P E R A T I O N

6.5 Tray lift-up control

6.5.1 Tray ascend/descend mechanism

• The tray is suspended by the wires at the front and rear.

• Rotation of the lift-up motor winds the wires, which causes the tray to go up.

• Opening the LU door disconnects the lift-up motor from the tray ascend/descend mecha-

nism, causing the tray to lower by its own weight.

• There is a drive assist spring used for bringing the tray to a stop at an appropriate height.If the tray lowers when paper is loaded, the height of loaded paper is almost the same as

the height of the tray when the tray is empty.

A0TJT2C008DA

Coupling

Lift-up motor (M1)Drive assist spring

LU door

Wire

Paper tray

Lift-up axis

8/21/2019 652 Service



9


O P E R A T I O N

L U - 2 0 4

A. Closing the LU door• The condition of the upper limit sensor signal is checked when the LU door is closed. If

the upper limit sensor is unblocked, the lift-up motor is energized so that lifting of the tray

is started.

• When the upper limit sensor is blocked after the lifting of the tray has been started, the

lift-up motor is deenergized to complete the lifting of the tray.

A0TJT2C013DA


Paper tray

A03NT2C207AA



Lift-up motor (M1)

LU door closed Lifting completed

8/21/2019 652 Service



10

L U - 2 0 4

O P E R A T I O N

B. During a print cycle• As the paper is consumed for a number of print cycles carried out, the pickup roller grad-

ually lowers and eventually unblocks the upper limit sensor. The lift-up motor is then

energized again and the lifting of the tray is started.

• When the upper limit sensor is blocked, the lift-up motor is deenergized to complete the

lifting of the tray.

• The sequence of these operations is repeated. This maintains the pressure (paper take-

up pressure) between the pickup roller and the paper stack at a constant level regardlessof the level of the paper stack left.

6.5.2 Paper size detection

• The LCT is not capable of detecting the paper size.

• The paper size is set by Service Mode → System 2 → LCT Paper Size Setting.

A0TJT2C010DA

Upper limit sensor (PS2)Pick-up Roller

A0TJT2E015DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



11


O P E R A T I O N

L U - 2 0 4

6.6 Dehumidification heater control

• The LCT is equipped with a dehumidification heater as standard.

• The control of the dehumidification heater is operatively associated with turning on or off

of the dehumidifier heater of the machine.

A0TJT2C012DA

Dehumidificationheater (DH)

8/21/2019 652 Service



12

L U - 2 0 4

O P E R A T I O N

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


Z U - 6 0 6

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

ZU-606



3. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................7

CONFIGURATION/OPERATION4. CONVEYANCE SECTION ...................................................................................... 9

4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................ 9

4.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 10

4.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 12

4.3.1 Conveyance path switching......................................................................... 12

4.3.2 Conveyance line speed switching ............................................................... 14

4.3.3 Registration control .....................................................................................17

5. PUNCH SECTION ................................................................................................ 18

5.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 18

5.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 18

5.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 195.3.1 Punch control .............................................................................................. 19

5.3.2 Punch position movement control............................................................... 21

5.3.3 Punch hole switching control....................................................................... 24

6. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION....................................................... 25

6.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 25

6.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 26

6.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 27

6.3.1 Punch scraps conveyance control............................................................... 276.3.2 Punch scraps control .................................................................................. 28

7. Z-FOLDING SECTION.......................................................................................... 29

7.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 29

7.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 30

7.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 31

7.3.1 1st folding control ........................................................................................31

7.3.2 2nd folding control....................................................................................... 33

8/21/2019 652 Service


Z U - 6 0 6

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



1

O U T L I N E

Z U - 6 0 6

OUTLINE


A. Type

B. Functions

Type Z-folding multi punching device

Punch Punching method Reciprocal punching method (punching each paper)

No. of holes Metric area : 2 holes/4 holes (switched automatically)

Inch area : 2 holes/3 holes (switched automatically)

Hole diameter Metric area : 6.5 ± 0.5 mm

Inch area : 8.0 ± 0.5 mm

Hole position

Folding method Buckle folding method with the roller pair

A109T1C001DA

Hole pitchMetric area : 80 ± 0.5 mmInch area : 70 ± 0.5 mm

Metric area : 11.0 ± 5 mmInch area : 9.5 ± 5 mm

Center of thepaper

Inch area : 9.5 ± 5 mm

Metric area : 11.0 ± 5 mm

Center of thepaper

Center of thepaper

Hole pitch 108 ± 0.5 mm





Center of thepaper




Metric area : 10.5 ± 5 mm

8/21/2019 652 Service



2

O U T L I N E

Z U - 6 0 6

Z-folding Folding length

Folding precision

Folding Folding length

Folding precision

A07TT1C010AA

a

L

Paper size L (mm) a (mm)

A3 209 or less

4 ± 2B4 181 or less

11 x 17 215 or less

8K *1 194 or less

A07TT1C011AA

1st folding 2nd folding

2 mm or less 2 mm or less

A07TT1C003AA

L

Paper size L (mm)

8-1 / 2 x 14 263 or less

A07TT1C004AA

2 mm or less

8/21/2019 652 Service



3

O U T L I N E

Z U - 6 0 6

*1: Only for the Taiwan market

Maximum tray capacity (80 g/m2) The maximum number of sheets for the FS main tray at

the Z-folding operation

• Z-folding continuous: Max. 30 sheets

• Z-folding/stapling: See the table below

No. of sheets per stapleNo. of set on

the main trayNo. of fold sheetsNo. of unfold

sheets

1 sheet1 to 40 sheets 20 set

41 to 90 sheets 10 set

2 sheets 1 to 80 sheets 10 set




6 sheets or greater Not guaranteed

8/21/2019 652 Service



4

O U T L I N E

Z U - 6 0 6

C. Type of paper

*1: Only for the Taiwan market

No punch mode Same as the main body.

Punch mode Paper size

• Combination with the folding/saddle stitching mode is not available.

Metric area 2holes:

A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S, A5, A5S,

8K *1, 16K *1, 16KS *1,8 x 13, 8-1 / 2 x 13, 8-1 / 4 x 13, 8-1 / 8 x 13-1 / 44holes:

A3, B4, A4, 8K *1, 16K *1

Inch area 2holes:

11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 14, 8-1 / 2 x 11, 8-1 / 2 x 11S,

5-1 / 2 x 8-1 / 2, 5-1 / 2 x 8-1 / 2S, 7-1 / 4 x 10-1 / 2, 7-1 / 4 x 10-1 / 2S

3holes:

11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 11

Type of paper 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) of the high-quality paper and the

plain paper

• Special paper is not guaranteed. The punching of labelpaper, tab paper, OHP paper, blueprint master and bind-

ing-holed paper are not allowed.

Z-folding mode Paper size A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 14, 8K

• For B4 paper (including the mix of the paper), the com-

bination with the stapling mode is not available.

Type of paper 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb) of the high-quality paper and the

plain paper

• Special paper is not supported. Label paper, tab paper,

transparency film, paper, holed paper, and low stiffness

paper are not supported in Z-folding mode.

Folding mode Paper size 8-1 / 2 x 14

Type of paper 60 to 90 g/m2 of the high-quality paper and the plain paper

• Special paper is not supported. Label paper, tab paper,

transparency film, paper, holed paper, and low stiffness

paper are not supported in folding mode.

Paper curling

a : Excluding the OHP paper : Amount of curl: 15 mm or less

OHP paper : Amount of curl: 10 mm or less

A07TT1C006AA

5 sheets of paper immediately after the printinga

8/21/2019 652 Service



5

O U T L I N E

Z U - 6 0 6

D. Maintenance

E. Machine specifications

F. Operating environment


Maintenance Same as the main body.

Machine service life Same as the main body.

Power requirements 100 to 240 VAC (automatic switching)

DC5 V (supplied from the main body)

Max. power

consumption

120 W or less

Dimensions 169 mm (W) x 660 mm (D) x 1027.5 mm (H)


Weight 45 kg (99.21 lb)

Temperature 10 to 30 °C

Humidity 15 to 85 % RH (with no condensation)

8/21/2019 652 Service



6

O U T L I N E

Z U - 6 0 6


A07TT1C009AA

Punch section

Punch scraps conveyance section

Z-folding section Conveyance section

Main bodyZU-606Finisher

8/21/2019 652 Service



7

O U T L I N E

Z U - 6 0 6

3. PAPER PATH

A. Straight mode/punch mode (for the small size paper : A5, 5-1 / 2 x 8-1 / 2)

B. Punch mode (excluding the small size paper)

A07TT1C005AA

A07TT1C007AA

8/21/2019 652 Service



8

O U T L I N E

Z U - 6 0 6

C. Z-folding mode/punch + Z-folding mode

A07TT1C013AA

From the main body to the 1st folding

From the 2nd folding to the paper exit

From the 1st folding to the 2nd folding

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. CONVEYANCE SECTION

9


O P E R A T I O N

Z U - 6 0 6


4. CONVEYANCE SECTION

4.1 Configuration

A07TT2C001AA

Conveyance sensor (PS601)

Gate solenoid/Lw (SD601)

Exit sensor (PS609)

Gate solenoid/Up (SD602) Conveyance encoder sensor (PS610)

8/21/2019 652 Service


4. CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

10

Z U - 6 0 6

O P E R A T I O N

4.2 Drive

A. Conveyance drive

A07TT2C002AA

Main motor (M606)

2nd folding roller

Gate/Up

Registration roller

Conveyance roller

1st folding roller

Gate/Lw

Exit roller


8/21/2019 652 Service



11


O P E R A T I O N

Z U - 6 0 6

B. Gate drive

A07TT2C003AA

Gate/Up

Gate/Lw


Gate solenoid/Up (SD602)

8/21/2019 652 Service



12

Z U - 6 0 6

O P E R A T I O N

4.3 Operation

4.3.1 Conveyance path switching

• The gates/Lw and /Up switch the conveyance path.

• The gate solenoid/Lw and the gate solenoid/Up drive the gate/Lw and the gate/Up

respectively.

A. Gate/Lw• The gate/Lw switches the paper path between the straight conveyance path and the

upper conveyance path.

• The gate/Lw is set to the straight conveyance path when the gate solenoid/Lw turns OFF.

• The gate/Lw is set to the upper conveyance path when gate solenoid/Lw turns ON.

A07TT2C004AA

<Gate solenoid/Lw : OFF> <Gate solenoid/Lw : ON>

Gate/Lw

Straight conveyance path Upper conveyance path


8/21/2019 652 Service



13


O P E R A T I O N

Z U - 6 0 6

B. Gate/Up• The gate/Up switches the paper path of the paper that was conveyed to the upper con-

veyance path by the gate/Lw.

• The gate/Up is set to the paper path to the exit side when the gate solenoid/Up turns

OFF.

• The gate/Up is set to the paper path to the 1st folding stopper when gate solenoid/Up

turns ON.

C. Operation timing(1) Z-folding mode

1. In the Z-folding mode for the all paper size, the gate solenoid/Lw and the gate sole-

noid/Up turn ON when the paper size detect board detects the leading edge of the

paper.

2. The gate/Lw is set to the upper conveyance path and the gate/Up is set to the con-

veyance path to the 1st folding stopper.

3. The gate solenoid/Lw and the gate solenoid/Up turn OFF a specified period of time

after the last paper turns OFF the exit sensor.

A07TT2C006AA

<Gate solenoid/Up : OFF> <Gate solenoid/Up : ON>

Gate/Up

Conveyance path to the exit side Conveyance path to the 1st folding stopper

Gate solenoid/Up (SD602) 1st folding stopper

A07TT2E035AA

Leading edge of the paper detectedby the paper size detect board

Gate solenoid/Lw and gatesolenoid/Up turned OFF

Paper size detect board (PSDTB)

Exit sensor (PS609)


Gate solenoid/Up (SD602)

8/21/2019 652 Service



14

Z U - 6 0 6

O P E R A T I O N

(2) Punch mode for the small size paper (A5, 5-1 / 2 x 8-1 / 2)• Gate solenoids/Lw and gate solenoids/Up always remain OFF, and never turn ON.

• The gate/Lw remains being set to the straight conveyance path.

(3) Punch mode for the large size paper (other than the small size paper)• The gate solenoid/Lw turns ON when the paper size detect board detects the leading

edge of the paper, and then the gate/Lw is set to the upper conveyance path. The gate

solenoid/Up remains OFF and the gate/Up remains being set to the paper path to the exitside.

• The gate solenoid/Lw turns OFF a specified period of time after the last paper turns OFF

the exit sensor.

(4) Straight exit mode• Gate solenoid/Lw and gate solenoid/Up always remain OFF, and never turn ON.

• The gate/Lw remains being set to the straight conveyance path.

4.3.2 Conveyance line speed switching

• The main motor drives the conveyance drive roller, the 1st folding roller, and the 2nd fold-

ing roller, which perform the folding operation, as well as the conveyance roller and theexit roller.

• The paper size detect board, the conveyance sensor, and the exit sensor detect the

paper.

A07TT2C007AA

1st folding roller2nd folding roller

Conveyance roller

Exit roller

Registration roller

Exit sensor (PS609)

Paper size detect board(PSDTB)


Conveyance drive roller

8/21/2019 652 Service



15


O P E R A T I O N

Z U - 6 0 6

A. Operation timing(1) Z-folding

1. Transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer, the main motor

turns ON and rotates in high speed.

2. The main motor rotates in low speed and perform the 1st and 2nd folding opera-

tions a specified period of time after the paper size detect board detects the leading

edge of the paper.

3. The main motor rotates in high speed to perform the paper exit operation of the 1stpaper and to convey the 2nd paper in sync with the paper exit speed of the main

body when the conveyance sensor detects the leading edge of the paper and turns

ON after the 2nd folding operation.

4. The main motor turns OFF when the exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the last

paper.

A109T2C001DA



Exit sensor (PS609)

Main motor (M606)High speed

Low speed

Paper pass signal fromthe horizontal transfer

Main motor driven in low speed

1st and 2nd folding operations Main motor driven in high speed

Paper exit operation

1st paper 2nd paper 3rd (last) paper

Main motor turned OFF when the trailingedge of the last paper is detected

8/21/2019 652 Service



16

Z U - 6 0 6

O P E R A T I O N

(2) Punch + Z-folding1. Transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer, the main motor

turns ON and rotates in high speed.

2. The main motor rotates in low speed and perform the 1st folding operation a speci-

fied period of time after the paper size detect board detects the leading edge of the

paper.

3. The main motor turns OFF for the punching operation a specified period of time

after paper size detect board detects the trailing edge of the paper.4. After the punching operation, the main motor turns ON and perform the 2nd folding

operation.

5. The main motor rotates in high speed to perform the paper exit operation of the 1st

paper and to convey the 2nd paper in sync with the paper exit speed of the main

body when the conveyance sensor detects the leading edge of the paper and turns

ON after the 2nd folding operation.

6. The main motor turns OFF when the exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the last

paper.

A109T2C002DA



Exit sensor (PS609)

Main motor (M606)High speed

Low speed

Paper pass signal fromthe horizontal transfer 1st paper 2nd paper 3rd (last) paper

Main motor driven in low speed

Main motor stopped for the punching operation

2nd folding operation

Main motor driven in high speed

Paper exit operation

Main motor turned OFF when the trailingedge of the last paper is detected

8/21/2019 652 Service



17


O P E R A T I O N

Z U - 6 0 6


• The registration control corrects paper skew in the Z-folding mode and the punch mode.

• The paper exited from the main body is pressed against the stopped registration roller

and forms a loop to correct skew of the paper, and then the paper is conveyed with its

leading edge nipped.

• The registration motor drives the registration roller.

A. Operation timing(1) Punch + Z-folding

1. Transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer, the registration

motor turns ON.

2. The registration motor stops a specified period of time after the paper size detect

board detects the leading edge of the paper conveyed from the main body.3. The paper is pressed against the registration roller and forms a loop to correct

paper skew.

4. The registration motor turns ON and the conveyance is restarted a specified period

of time after the paper contacts with the registration roller.

5. The registration motor turns OFF a specified period of time after the paper is

exited.

• No registration control is conducted in the straight mode.

A07TT2C009AA

Leading edge of the paper

Registration roller


Loop

A109T2C003DA


Registration motor(M601)

High speed

Low speed

Paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer

Registration motor stopped

A loop formed

Conveyance restarted

8/21/2019 652 Service


5. PUNCH SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

18

Z U - 6 0 6

O P E R A T I O N

5. PUNCH SECTION

5.1 Configuration

5.2 Drive

A07TT2C014AA


Punch home sensor (PS606)

Punch switchover switch (MS601)

A07TT2C013AA

Punch clutch (CL601)

Punch switchover motor (M608)

Cam cover

Eccentric camPunch motor (M604)Cam holder

Punch switchover cam

<Top side view> <Rear side view>

<Right side view>

Eccentric cam (Metric type: 4 piece) (Inch type : 5 piece)

Cam cover

Front direction



Punch edges Rack

Belt

Punch shift motor (M605)

Punch clutch (CL601)Punch motor (M604)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. PUNCH SECTION

19


O P E R A T I O N

Z U - 6 0 6

5.3 Operation

• The punch operation is conducted for every paper.

• The controls related to the punch operation is the punch control, the punch position

movement control, and the punch hole switching control.

5.3.1 Punch control

• The punch operation is conducted by transmitting the rotation of the punch motor to theeccentric cam by the punch clutch and reciprocating the punch edges connected to the

cam holder once.

• The punch motor drives the eccentric cam and performs the punch operation when

punch clutch turns ON.

• The punch motor rotates clockwise from the view of the rear.

• The punch motor keeps rotating during the punch operation.

• The punch home sensor detects the home position of the punch edges.

A07TT2C015AA

Eccentric camPunch clutch (CL601)

Cam holder

Front direction

<Home position> <Punching position>

Upper positionLower position

Eccentric cam

Punch edges

Paper

Punch motor (M604)

Punch home sensor (PS606)

Cam holder

8/21/2019 652 Service



20

Z U - 6 0 6

O P E R A T I O N

A. Operation timing• The registration motor and the main motor turn OFF to stop the conveyance during the

punch operation.

1. The punch motor turns ON when the paper size detect board detects the leading

edge of the paper.

2. The punch clutch turns ON and performs the punch operation a specified period of

time after the paper size detect board detects the trailing edge of the paper.3. The punch clutch turns OFF after a specified period of time.

4. The punch motor turns OFF a specified period of time after the punch clutch turns

OFF.

5. After the punch operation, the registration motor and the main motor turn ON to exit

the paper.

A109T2C004DA


Punch motor (M604)

Punch clutch (CL601)

Leading edge of the paper detected Punch clutch turned ON Punch clutch turned OFF

8/21/2019 652 Service



21


O P E R A T I O N

Z U - 6 0 6

5.3.2 Punch position movement control

• The punch shift motor moves the punch unit to move the punch hole position in the main

scan direction.

• The registration motor controls the punch position in the sub scan direction by its stop

position.

• 5 sensors of the paper size detect board detects the punch hole position.

• The front side sensor among 5 sensors detects the leading/trailing/side edge of the

paper and the other 4 sensors detect the side edge of the paper. The different sensor is

used depending on the paper size.

• The punch shift home sensor detects the home position.

A07TT2C017AA


Leading/trailing/side edge sensor

Punch unit


Side edge sensors

Front direction Punch shift home sensor (PS605)

Belt

8/21/2019 652 Service



22

Z U - 6 0 6

O P E R A T I O N

A. Standby position movement of the punch unit• In the punch mode, the punch unit is set to the standby position in accordance with the

paper size before the paper is conveyed.

• The punch shift motor moves the punch unit so that the sensor corresponding to the

paper size among 5 sensors of the paper size detect board (in case of A4 paper, the sen-

sor is used) is positioned 5 mm inward from the side edge of the paper.

• This operation is not conducted in the no punch mode.

A07TT2C018AA


Standby position

Punch unit


Side edge of the paper

Paper conveyance direction

Ex. : The sensor used at A4 paper

Paper

Punch blade

5 mm

8/21/2019 652 Service



23


O P E R A T I O N

Z U - 6 0 6

B. Punch position correction• The punch unit positioned 5 mm inward from the side edge of the paper conducts the

punch position correction operation by moving the punch unit back and forth while con-

veying the paper to correct the misalignment between the conveyed paper and the punch

position.

1. Move the punch unit backward until the certain side edge sensor (in case of A4

paper) detects the side edge of the paper.2. Then, move the punch unit forward until the side edge sensor detects the side edge

of the paper (the side edge reference position detection).

3. Move the punch unit forward further so that the center of the punch edges is posi-

tioned to the center of the paper.

A07TT2C019AA


Standby position

Punch unit

Center of the paper

Paper conveyance direction

Ex. : The sensor used at A4 paper

Paper

Punch edges Center of the punch

Moves backward

Moves forward

Side edge of the paper

8/21/2019 652 Service



24

Z U - 6 0 6

O P E R A T I O N

5.3.3 Punch hole switching control

1. Transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer, the punch switcho-

ver motor switches the number of holes in the punch mode.

2. The punch switchover motor rotates the punch switchover cam clockwise and

moves the eccentric cams and back and forth via the cam cover.

3. When switching between the 2 holes punching and the 4 holes punching in Metric

Type, 2 eccentric cams in the middle remain being held in the cam holders because

they are shared in both cases.

4. When the cam cover moves forward, the eccentric cams at the outside for the 4

holes punching are held in the cam holder so that the total of 4 eccentric cams are

driven.

5. When the cam cover move backward, 2 outside eccentric cams are disengaged.

6. For the switchover between the 2 holes punching and the 3 holes punching in Inch

Type, the 2 holes eccentric cams and the 3 holes eccentric cams work exclusively.

7. When the cam cover moves forward, the 3 holes eccentric cams are held in the

cam holder and the 2 holes eccentric cams are disengaged.

8. This operation is not conducted if the number of holes is same with the previous

printing.

A07TT2E034AA


<Upper side view>

Cam cover

Front side direction Punch switchover switch (MS601)

Cam holder


Eccentric cam (2 holes/4 holes)

Eccentric cam (4 holes)<Right side view>

Eccentric cam (2 holes/4 holes)Eccentric cam (4 holes)


Punch switchover switch (MS601)

Front side direction

Moves backward

Moves forward

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION

25


O P E R A T I O N

Z U - 6 0 6

6. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION

6.1 Configuration

A07TT2C001DA

Punch scraps full sensor(PS608)

Punch scraps box set sensor (PS607)

Punch scraps conveyance motor (M607)

8/21/2019 652 Service


6. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

26

Z U - 6 0 6

O P E R A T I O N

6.2 Drive

A07TT2C021AA

Punch scraps conveyance screw gear

Punch scraps conveyance motor (M607)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION

27


O P E R A T I O N

Z U - 6 0 6

6.3 Operation

6.3.1 Punch scraps conveyance control

• The punch scraps are conveyed by the punch scraps conveyance screw driven by the

punch scraps conveyance motor.

• They are conveyed to the punch scraps box via the punch scraps collective duct.

• The punch scraps conveyance motor turns ON to rotate the punch scraps conveyance

screw a specified period of time after the paper edge sensor detects the trailing edge ofthe paper in the punch mode.

• The punch scraps are sent to the forward by the rotation of the screw and collected in the

punch scraps box via the punch scraps collective duct.

A07TT2C022AA

Punch scraps collective duct

Punch scraps box

Punch scraps conveyance motor (M607)Punch scraps conveyance screw

8/21/2019 652 Service


6. PUNCH SCRAPS CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

28

Z U - 6 0 6

O P E R A T I O N

6.3.2 Punch scraps control

• The punch scraps box set sensor and the punch scraps full sensor monitor the punch

scraps box.

A. Punch scraps full detection• The punch scraps full sensor detects whether the punch scraps box is full or not.

• The punch scraps full sensor turns ON and transmits the punch scraps full signal to themain body when the punch scraps box becomes full of punch scraps, and then the main

body displays the message on its operation panel.

B. Punch scraps box detection• The punch scraps box set sensor detects whether the punch scraps box is housed or

not.

• The punch scraps box set sensor turns ON and transmits the “no punch scraps box” sig-

nal to the main body when the punch scraps box is not set, and then the main body dis-

plays the message on its operation panel.

A07TT2C023AA

Punch scraps box

Punch scraps full sensor (PS608)

Punch scraps box set sensor (PS607)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. Z-FOLDING SECTION

29


O P E R A T I O N

Z U - 6 0 6

7. Z-FOLDING SECTION

7.1 Configuration

A07TT2C024AA

2nd folding stopper home sensor (PS604)

Conveyance sensor (PS601)1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603)

Exit sensor (PS609)

8/21/2019 652 Service


7. Z-FOLDING SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

30

Z U - 6 0 6

O P E R A T I O N

7.2 Drive

A07TT2C026AA

A07TT2C025AA


1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603)


1st folding stopper motor (M602)

<1st folding stopper drive>

<2nd folding stopper drive>

1st folding stopper

2nd folding stopper

2nd folding stopper motor (M603)


8/21/2019 652 Service



31


O P E R A T I O N

Z U - 6 0 6

7.3 Operation

7.3.1 1st folding control

1. The registration roller, the conveyance roller, and the 1st folding roller convey the

paper to the 1st folding stopper section via the gate/Up.

2. A loop is formed between the 1st folding roller and the conveyance drive roller

when the leading edge of the paper is pressed against the 1st folding stopper.

3. The loop grows, and then it is caught by these rollers and the 1st folding is con-ducted.

4. The paper is then conveyed to the 2nd folding stopper section.

5. The position of the 1st folding depends on the position of the 1st folding stopper.

6. The 1st folding stopper motor sets the position in accordance with the number of

steps from the 1st folding stopper home sensor.

7. In the Z-folding mode with the punch mode, the registration motor and the main

motor stops to conduct the punch operation after the 1st folding operation, and then

the registration motor and the main motor turns ON to conduct the 2nd folding

operation.

A07TT2C027AA

1st folding stopper

1st folding stopper home sensor (PS603)

Registration roller

2nd foldingdirection

1st folding

Front side


Conveyance roller

Gate/Up

Loop

1st folding roller

8/21/2019 652 Service



32

Z U - 6 0 6

O P E R A T I O N

A. Operation timing1. The 1st folding stopper motor turns ON to drive the 1st folding stopper to the appro-

priate position in accordance with the paper size a specified period of time after

transmitting the paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer.

2. Transmitting the termination signal from the main body, the 1st folding stopper

motor replaces the 1st folding stopper to the home position.

A109T2C005DA

1st folding stopper home sensor(PS603)

1st folding stopper motor (M602)

Exit sensor (PS609)

Paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer1st folding stopper moving to the paper size

1st folding stopper returning to the home position

Termination signal

8/21/2019 652 Service



33


O P E R A T I O N

Z U - 6 0 6

7.3.2 2nd folding control

1. The paper conveyed from the 1st folding section to the 2nd folding section is

stopped by the 2nd folding stopper and forms a loop between conveyance drive

roller and the 2nd folding roller.

2. The loop grows, and then it is caught by these rollers and the 2nd folding is con-

ducted.

3. The 2nd folding stopper motor turns ON to move the 2nd folding stopper to the

evacuation position for the paper conveyance when the leading edge of the paper

(2nd folding) conveyed to the paper exit direction passes the conveyance sensor.

4. The 2nd folding is not conducted for 8.5 x 14 paper.

A07TT2C029AA

2nd folding stopper*Folding position

2nd folding stopper home sensor(PS604)

Paper exit direction

2nd folding

Front side



Loop

1st folding roller

Exit sensor (PS609)

Paper exit direction

2nd folding roller

2nd folding stopper*Home position

8/21/2019 652 Service



34

Z U - 6 0 6

O P E R A T I O N

A. Operation timing1. The 2nd folding stopper motor turns ON to drive the 2nd folding stopper to the

appropriate position in accordance with the paper size when the paper size detect

board detects the leading edge of the paper.

2. The 2nd folding stopper motor rotates in the reverse direction to move the 2nd fold-

ing stopper to the home position when the conveyance sensor detects the leading

edge of the paper after the 2nd folding. It opens the paper exit path.

3. The 2nd folding stopper motor turns ON to replace the stopper to the original posi-tion for the subsequent Z-folding when the exit sensor detects the trailing edge of

the paper.

A109T2C006DA



Exit sensor (PS609)

2nd folding stopper motor (M603)


Paper pass signal from the horizontal transfer

Moving to the 2nd folding position

Moving to the home position

Moving to the 2nd folding positionfor the subsequent paper

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


F S - 5 2 6

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

FS-526


2. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 4

2.1 Main tray ............................................................................................................... 4

2.2 Sub tray ................................................................................................................ 5

2.3 Stapling................................................................................................................. 6


4. HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION ................................................................. 8

4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................ 8

4.2 Horizontal transport mechanism........................................................................... 9

4.2.1 Paper transport ............................................................................................. 9

4.2.2 Fan motor.................................................................................................... 10

5. TRANSPORT SECTION.......................................................................................11

5.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 11

5.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 125.2.1 Route change gate......................................................................................12

5.2.2 Bypass gate ................................................................................................ 13

6. EXIT TRAY SECTION ........................................................................................... 15

6.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 15

6.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 16

6.2.1 Tray lift.........................................................................................................16

6.2.2 Exit roller motor........................................................................................... 17

6.2.3 Main tray transport ...................................................................................... 186.2.4 Sub tray exit ................................................................................................ 19

7. ALIGNMENT SECTION ........................................................................................20

7.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 20

7.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 21

7.2.1 Alignment plate ........................................................................................... 21

7.2.2 Shift control ................................................................................................. 22

7.2.3 Alignment section transport mechanism..................................................... 24

8. STAPLER .............................................................................................................. 25

8.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 25

8/21/2019 652 Service


F S - 5 2 6

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

8.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 26

8.2.1 Stapler movement....................................................................................... 26

8.2.2 Stapler control............................................................................................. 27

8/21/2019 652 Service



1

O U T L I N E

F S - 5 2 6

OUTLINE


A. Type

B. Functions

C. Stapling

*1: The stapling capacity for colored paper and enamel paper is 35 sheets (recommended

paper).

*2: And the stapling thickness is 10 mm or less and the stack thickness including curl is 25

mm or less.

Name Flat-stapling finisher: 100 sheets staple

Type Staple finisher attached to the side of the main body

InstallationIncluding horizontal transport unit (Built-in finisher that is mounted from the left of

the main body)

Document

alignmentCenter

Consumables Staples

Modes Non-sort, sor t, offset, group offset, sort staple

Max. flat-stapling

capacity

60 to 80 g/m2: 100 sheets or 94 sheets + 2 sheets (209 g/m2) *2

81 to 90 g/m2: 30 sheets or 28 sheets + 2 sheets (209 g/m2) *1

91 g/m2 or more: 2 sheets of thick paper or more not guaranteed

Max. stapling

capacity for differ-

ent paper sizes

100 sheets B5 to A4S, 8 1 / 2 x 11S (Paper length: 150 to 300 mm)

70 sheets B5 recycled paper 1-sided mode

65 sheets B4S/8 1 / 2 x 14S (Paper length: 389 mm or less)

50 sheetsPaper sizes other than the above (Paper length: 150 mm or less,

390 mm or more) *1, *2

Stapling position Back of the corner (0 to 45 degrees)

Front of the corner (0 to 45 degrees)

Center staple two points (Staple interval is fixed to 145 mm.)

Stapling method Bypass flat clinch

8/21/2019 652 Service



2

O U T L I N E

F S - 5 2 6

D. Max. paper capacity

E. Type of paper

Main tray

(80 g/m2)

Non-sort, sort, offset,

group offset,

3,000 sheets :A4/A4S, B5/B5S, 8 1 / 2 x 11/

8 1 / 2 x 11S, 16K/16KS,

7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2 /7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2 S

1,500 sheets :A3, B4, 8 x 13, 8 1 / 4 x 13,

8 1 / 2 x 13, 8 1 / 2 x 13 1 / 4,

8 1 / 2 x 13 1 / 2, 12 x 8, 11 x 17,

8 1 / 2 x 14, 8K

Wide size paper (Max. : 320 mm X 450 mm)

500 sheets :A5/A5S, B6S, A6S, 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2 /

5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2 S

No. of sheets in

offset mode

Size in the sub

scan direction is

150 to 417 mm

or longer

The others

1 sheet Equivalent to the above capacity

Set of 2 to 9

sheets

300 copies 150 copies

Set of 10 sheets 150 copies 150 copies

Main tray sort staple

No. of sheets

per stapling

Size in the sub

scan direction is

150 to 417 mm

or longer

The others

2 to 9 100 copies 50 copies





51 to 60 15 copies -

61 to 100 10 copies -

Sub tray (80 g/m2) 100 sheets

Size A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5/B5S, A5/A5S, B6S, A6S, postcardS, 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2, 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2 S,

8 x 13, 8 1 / 4 x 13, 8 1 / 2 x 13, 8 1 / 8 x 13 1 / 4, 11 x 17, 8 1 / 2 x 14, 8 1 / 2 x 11, /8 1 / 2 x 11S,

7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2, 7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2 S, 8K, 16K/16KS

Custom size paper, wide size paper, standard size index paper (Upon paper exit,only the leading edge side but not the trailing edge side is guaranteed.)

Min. : 100 mm x 139 mm (4 inch x 5.5 inch)

Max. : 311 mm x 488 mm (12.2 inch x 19.2 inch)

Type Plain paper, bond paper, colored paper, coated paper, speciality paper defined in

the main body specifications, and recommended paper are guaranteed.

Weight 60 to 300 g/m2

8/21/2019 652 Service



3

O U T L I N E

F S - 5 2 6

F. Machine specifications

*: Size when the paper output tray is pulled out

G. Operating environment• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

Power

requirements

DC 24 V (supplied from the main body)


Max. power


Dimensions

723.8 (W) x 709.5 (D) x 1025 (H) mm

28.45 (W) x 27.88 (D) x 40.28 (H) inch848.8 (W) x 709.5 (D) x 1025 (H) mm *

33.35 (W) x 27.88 (D) x 40.28 (H) inch *


8/21/2019 652 Service


2. PAPER FEED PATH Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

4

O U T L I N E

F S - 5 2 6

2. PAPER FEED PATH

2.1 Main tray

A11PT1C001DA

Alignment platePaper output roller Bypass gate

Main tray

Paper path from the horizontaltransport unit

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 2. PAPER FEED PATH

5

O U T L I N E

F S - 5 2 6

2.2 Sub tray

A11PT1C002DA

Sub tray change gateSub tray Bypass gate

Paper path from the horizontaltransport unit

8/21/2019 652 Service



6

O U T L I N E

F S - 5 2 6

2.3 Stapling

A11PT1C003DA

Sub tray change gatePaper output roller Bypass gate

Main tray

Paper path from the horizontaltransport unitStapler

Alignmentsection

8/21/2019 652 Service



7


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 6


3. CONFIGURATION

• The following sections are combined in a single unit: the horizontal transport section,

transport section, alignment section, exit tray section (main tray), and stapler section.

A11PT2C001DA

Alignment section Horizontal transport section

Stapler section

Transport section

Exit tray section(Main tray)

8/21/2019 652 Service


4. HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

8

F S - 5 2 6

O P E R A T I O N

4. HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION

4.1 Configuration

• The horizontal transport section is composed of the transport control board, transport

motor, fan motor, door open/close sensor, and paper pass sensor.

A11PT2C002DA

Fan motor/1 (FM1)

Fan motor/2 (FM2)

Door open/close sensor (PS201)Transport control board (TRCB)


Paper pass sensor (PS202)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION

9


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 6

4.2 Horizontal transport mechanism

4.2.1 Paper transport

• The horizontal transport section transfers paper fed out from the main body to the fin-

isher.

• The transport motor provides drive for the transport rollers.

• On the finisher side, drive from the transport motor transfers the paper into the finisher.

A11PT2C003DA


Finisher side Main body side

Transport roller

Horizontal transport section

Transport roller

8/21/2019 652 Service


4. HORIZONTAL TRANSPORT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

10

F S - 5 2 6

O P E R A T I O N

4.2.2 Fan motor

• The fan motor cools the paper fed out from the main body.

(1) Function

(2) Fan control

A11PT2C002DA

Fan motor/1 (FM1)

Fan motor/2 (FM2)

Motor name Function

Fan motor/1 (FM1)Fan motor/2 (FM2)

• In order to avoid toner attachment while the finisher is used, outside air isapplied to the paper to cool it.


Fan motor/1 (FM1)

Fan motor/2 (FM2)Full speed

• The interior temperature of the main body is 18 °C or more dur-

ing paper exit.

• Continues rotating for a 30-sec. period following the stop of a

print cycle.

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. TRANSPORT SECTION

11


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 6

5. TRANSPORT SECTION

5.1 Drive

A11PT2C005DA

Transport roller/1

Entrance roller

Transport motor/2 (M2)

Sub tray exit roller/2


Bypass roller


Sub tray gatesolenoid (SD3)

Bypass transport motor (M3)

Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)

Saddle gate

Switch back solenoid (SD4)

Route change gate solenoid (SD1)

Stacker entrancemotor (M10)

PF transportroller

Z-fold punchregist sensor(PS2)

Bypass gate

8/21/2019 652 Service


5. TRANSPORT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

12

F S - 5 2 6

O P E R A T I O N

5.2 Operation

5.2.1 Route change gate

• The route change gate switches paper to different routes that go to individual trays and

SD-508.

• The FS control board controls the route change gate solenoid.

• The FS operation signal from the main body makes the route change gate move up or

down.

A. Route change gate operation• The route change gate solenoid drives the route change gate.

A11PT2C006DA

Route change gate solenoid (SD1)

Route change gate

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. TRANSPORT SECTION

13


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 6

5.2.2 Bypass gate

• The bypass route is provided to eliminate loss of time spent for the subsequent paper

and to increase productivity during stapling.

• The bypass gate is provided at the place where the regular route and the bypass route

join.

A. Bypass gate operation• The bypass gate solenoid drives the bypass gate.

• Paper sizes subject to this operation are 8 1 / 2 x 11, A4, 16K, Executive, and ISO-B5.

The bypass gate operates only for the 1st page of the 2nd and following copies to trans-

fer paper to the bypass route.

• The 2nd page of the 2nd and following copies is transferred to the regular route and then

the transferred to the alignment section.

A11PT2C007DA

Regular route

Bypass route

Bypass gate Bypass gate

Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)

8/21/2019 652 Service


5. TRANSPORT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

14

F S - 5 2 6

O P E R A T I O N

B. Bypass gate control• The bypass gate only operates for the paper (8 1 / 2 x 11, A4, 16K, Executive, B5, and ISO-

B5).

• The FS control board controls the bypass gate solenoid.

• When stapling two sheets of paper for three copies, the bypass gate solenoid operates

as follows.

(1) For the 1st copy• When the paper for the 1st copy is transferred, the bypass gate solenoid does not oper-

ate.

(2) For the 2nd copy• At the moment when the z-fold punch regist sensor detects the leading edge of the 1st

paper of the 2nd copy, the bypass gate solenoid is turned ON to transfer the 1st paper of

the 2nd copy to the bypass route.

• The bypass gate solenoid turns OFF after a specified period of time since the z-fold

punch regist sensor detects the trailing edge of the 1st paper of the 2nd copy.

(3) For the 3rd and following copies• The same operation as the one for the 2nd copy is repeated.

A11PT2E004DA



Z-fold punch regist sensor (PS2)

Bypass gate solenoid (SD2)

The 1st copy The 2nd copy The 3rd copy

Trailing edge ofthe 1st paper ofthe 2nd copy

Leading edge ofthe 1st paper ofthe 2nd copy

Transferring 1st paper ofthe 2nd copy to the bypass

Trailing edge ofthe 1st paper ofthe 3rd copy

Leading edge of the 1st paperof the 3rd copy

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. EXIT TRAY SECTION

15


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 6

6. EXIT TRAY SECTION

6.1 Drive

A11PT2C009DA

Main tray

Lift pulley /Up

Lift wire

Lift pulley /Lw

Main tray lift motor (M5)

8/21/2019 652 Service


6. EXIT TRAY SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

16

F S - 5 2 6

O P E R A T I O N

6.2 Operation

6.2.1 Tray lift

A. Tray lift operation• The worm gear installed in the shaft of the main tray lift motor winds up the lift wire.

• It lifts up or down the main tray depending on the winding direction.

• Rotating the lift pulley /Lw clockwise and counterclockwise in view of front, the main tray

is lifted up and down respectively.

B. Paper detection• The main tray top surface sensor and the staple paper exit top surface sensor keep the

specified distance between the upper surface of the paper exited to the main tray and the

paper exit opening to eliminate the misalignment of the exited paper.• During the consecutive printing operation, FS counts the number of exited paper and

stops the printing when it reaches the maximum capacity.

• If the exited paper is ejected during the printing operation, the tray moves up and the

main tray empty sensor turns ON and resets the counter. It makes possible to exit paper

with no limitation.

• The main tray lower limit sensor detects the lower limit of the tray.

• During the intermittent printing operation, the main tray lower limit sensor controls the

capacity of the paper exit because the counter does not integrate the total number of

exited paper.

A11PT2C010DA

Main tray

Main tray top surface sensor (PS4)

Main tray emptysensor (PS6)

Main tray lower limitsensor (PS5)

Main tray lift motor (M5)

Lift pulley /Lw

Staple paper exit top surface

sensor (PS7)

Lift pulley /Up

8/21/2019 652 Service



17


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 6

6.2.2 Exit roller motor

• The exit roller motor is driven by the signal from the FS control board.

• The main tray exit roller is driven by the exit roller motor.

A. Exit roller motor operation• When the 2 staples stacker sensor detects the leading edge of paper, the exit roller

motor rotates.

• After a specified period of time since the 2 staples stacker sensor detected the trailing

edge of paper, the exit roller motor rotates in the reverse direction.

• At the moment when the paper output roller motor is turned OFF, i.e. it finishes moving

down, the exit roller motor starts rotating at high speed. After a specified period of time,

the exit roller motor switches to low speed. After a specified period of time, the exit roller

motor stops.

A11PT2C011DA

Exit roller motor (M4)

Main tray exit roller

<Store paper into alignment section>

<Exit paper into main tray>


Paper


2 staples stackersensor (PS3)

8/21/2019 652 Service



18

F S - 5 2 6

O P E R A T I O N

6.2.3 Main tray transport

• After the process in the alignment section, the exit roller motor and paper output roller

motor are driven to transfer paper to the main tray.

A. Transport operation• When the paper output roller motor is driven, the paper output roller assy moves down to

be pressed against the main tray exit roller and the paper output roller rotates.

• After paper is transferred to the main tray, the paper output roller assy moves up.

A11PT2C022DA

Paper output roller

Paper output roller motor (M6)


Exit roller motor (M4)

8/21/2019 652 Service



19


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 6

6.2.4 Sub tray exit

• The sub tray change gate is provided to transfer paper conveyed from the horizontal

transport section to the sub tray.

• The sub tray change gate transfers the paper to the sub tray by moving up and down.

• The sub tray gate solenoid drives the sub tray change gate.

A. Sub tray exit roller/1 drive• The sub tray exit roller/1 is driven by the bypass transport motor.

B. Sub tray exit roller/2 drive• The sub tray exit roller/2 is driven by the transport motor/2.

• The transport motor/2 rotates in high speed when the sub tray exit sensor detects the

leading edge of the paper.

• The sub tray exit roller/2 rotates in low speed after a specified period of time since the

FNS pass sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper.

• The transport motor/2 stops after a specified period of time since the sub tray exit sensor

detects the trailing edge of the paper.

C. Sub tray full detection• When the exited paper on the sub tray reached to a specified thickness, the sub tray full

sensor turns ON and the sub tray full information is sent to the main body. Then, the main

body displays the message on its display panel.

A11PT2C026DA

Sub tray

Sub tray exit sensor(PS8)

Sub tray change gate

Bypass transportmotor (M3)

Sub tray gate solenoid (SD3)

Sub tray fullsensor (PS9)

Sub tray exitroller/1


Transport motor/2(M2)

8/21/2019 652 Service


7. ALIGNMENT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

20

F S - 5 2 6

O P E R A T I O N

7. ALIGNMENT SECTION

7.1 Drive

A11PT2C015DA

Alignment plate/F

Alignment plate motor/R (M12)

Alignment plate belt/F

Alignment plate motor/F (M11)

Alignment plate belt/R

Alignment plate/R

Trail edge stopper

2 staples trail edge stopper motor (M19)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. ALIGNMENT SECTION

21


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 6

7.2 Operation

7.2.1 Alignment plate

• After sheets of paper are aligned and stapled inside the finisher, they are transferred to

the main tray. With the exit roller separated, each copy set is stored in the alignment sec-

tion at a time.

• The alignment plate motor/F and /R rotate in the forward/reverse direction to open/close

the alignment plate/F and /R to perform the alignment of the paper transferred to thealignment section.

A. Alignment plate operation• The alignment plate motor/F rotates to open/close the alignment plate/F via the align-

ment plate belt/F.

• The 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/F detects the home position of the align-

ment plate/F.

• The alignment plate motor/R rotates to open/close the alignment plate/R via the align-

ment plate belt/R.

• The 2 staples alignment motor home sensor/R detects the home position of the align-

ment plate/R.

A11PT2C016DA

Alignment plate/R

Alignment plate/F



2 staples alignment motor home sensor/R (PS18)

2 staples alignment motorhome sensor/F (PS17)

8/21/2019 652 Service



22

F S - 5 2 6

O P E R A T I O N

7.2.2 Shift control

• In normal print and staple mode, the paper is fed into the tray at its center position. If no

stapling is involved in the sort or group copy mode, the alignment plate shifts 15 mm to

the front or rear from the center. This stacks copy sets/stacks in a saw tooth manner,

each being offset by about 30 mm with respect to the others.

A11PT2C027DA

<Normal/ Staple> <Shift operation>

30 mm

Alignmentplate/R

Alignmentplate/F

8/21/2019 652 Service



23


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 6

A. Shift operation• Under sort/group copy mode, after a specified period of time the 2 staples stacker sensor

detected the trailing edge of paper, the alignment plate motor/R and /F are turned ON to

shift the alignment plate/R and /F.

• At the moment when the paper output roller motor is turned OFF, i.e. it finishes moving

down, the alignment motor/F is turned ON. After a specified period of time, the alignment

motor/R is turned ON to open the alignment plate/F and alignment plate/R.

• These operations are repeated for every paper to shift it.

A11PT2C018DA

To the main tray

To the main tray



Alignment plate/F Alignment plate/R

Alignment plate/F

Alignment plate/R

8/21/2019 652 Service



24

F S - 5 2 6

O P E R A T I O N

7.2.3 Alignment section transport mechanism

• When the paddle motor is driven, it makes the rewind paddle and paddle 1/2 rotate to

transfer paper conveyed from the main body to the alignment section.

• The paper conveyed from the main body drops under its own weight and the paper is

transferred to the alignment section. However, as the paper conveyance performance is

incomplete, the rewind paddle motor is driven to push the rewind paddle downward and

transfer the paper to the alignment section.

A11PT2C021DA

Paddle motor (M16)

Paddle 1

Rewind paddle

Rewind paddle motor(M18)

Paddle 2

Paddle 2

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 8. STAPLER

25


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 6

8. STAPLER

8.1 Drive

A11PT2C023DA

2 staples stapler movement motor (M13) Stapler drive rack

Stapler position sensor/1 (PS50)

Stapler position sensor/2 (PS51)Stapler position sensor/3 (PS52)


8/21/2019 652 Service


8. STAPLER Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

26

F S - 5 2 6

O P E R A T I O N

8.2 Operation

8.2.1 Stapler movement

A. Stapler movement operation• The 2 staples stapler movement motor moves the stapler.

• The rotation of the 2 staples stapler movement motor makes the belt rotate the gear,

causing the stapler drive rack to operate with the stapler.

• The stapler position sensor/4 becomes the stapler’s home position. In 2 staples mode,the stapler stops at the stapler position sensor/3 and stapler position sensor/2 to staple

sheets. In the one-corner stapling mode, the stapler stops at the stapler position sensor/

1 to staple sheets.

B. Stapler movement control• With the FS start signal from the main body, the 2 staples stapler movement motor is

turned ON and the stapler moves to the standby position and stops.

A11PT2C024DA

2 staples stapler movement motor (M13) Stapler drive rack


Stapler position sensor/2 (PS51)Stapler position sensor/3 (PS52)


8/21/2019 652 Service



27


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 6

8.2.2 Stapler control

• The stapling operation is performed by the 2 staples stapler motor.

A. Stapling operation• In the stapling operation, the 2 staples stapler motor drives the clincher side to press the

paper. Then, the staple is pushed out from the stapler side and bent at the clincher side.

A11PT2C025DA

Paper

Stapler (clincher side)

Stapler (stapler side)

2 staples staplermotor (M14)

8/21/2019 652 Service



28

F S - 5 2 6

O P E R A T I O N

B. Staple control(1) Stapling• After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the 2 staples stapler

motor performs the stapling operation.

• The stapling operation is completed when the stapler position sensor/4 in the stapler

detects the home position and turn ON.

(2) Clogged staple detection• During the stapling operation, it is determined that the staple has been clogged and the 2

staples stapler motor turns OFF if the stapler position sensor/4 does not turn ON after a

specified period of time since they turn OFF.

(3) Cartridge detection• The cartridge set switch detects the presence of a cartridge or the incorrect setting of a

cartridge.

• When no cartridge is set or it is set incorrectly, the main body displays the error message

on its display panel.

(4) Staple detection control• When the staples run out, the staple empty switch turns ON and the main body displays

the error message on its display panel.

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


S D - 5 0 8

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

SD-508


2. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 3

2.1 Folding/saddle stitching ........................................................................................3

2.2 Tri-folding .............................................................................................................. 4


4. ALIGNMENT SECTION .......................................................................................... 6

4.1 Drive ..................................................................................................................... 6

4.2 Operation..............................................................................................................7

4.2.1 Alignment ...................................................................................................... 7

4.2.2 Stopper ......................................................................................................... 9

5. STAPLER .............................................................................................................. 13

5.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 13

5.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 14

5.2.1 Stapler movement ....................................................................................... 145.2.2 Stapling ....................................................................................................... 16

6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING .................................................. 18

6.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 18

6.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 19

6.2.1 Folding knife................................................................................................ 19

6.2.2 Folding transfer ........................................................................................... 20

6.2.3 Tri-folding gate............................................................................................. 21

7. EXIT SECTION ..................................................................................................... 227.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 22

7.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 23

7.2.1 Exit .............................................................................................................. 23

8/21/2019 652 Service


S D - 5 0 8

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



1

O U T L I N E

S D - 5 0 8

OUTLINE


A. Type

B. Paper(1) Saddle stitching

(2) Folding

(3) Tri-folding

*: It is not guaranteed when folding together more than 2 sheets.


Name Saddle sticher SD-508

Type Built into the finisher

Installation Screwed to the finisher


Stapling function Center parallel two points

Type Plain paper, Thick paper 1, Thick paper 2

Size

A3, B4, A4S, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 14, 8-1 / 2 x 11S, 8KS

Min: 210 mm x 279 mm , 8-1

/ 4 x 11Max: 314 mm x 458 mm, 12-1 / 4 x 18

Max. saddle stitching capacity

20 sheets (60 g/m2 to 80 g/m2 ,16 to 21.25 lb)

16 sheets (81 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ,21.5 to 24 lb)

19 sheets 80 g/m2 ,21.25 lb) + 1 sheet (209 g/m2 , 55.5 lb)

Type Plain paper

Size

A3, B4, A4S, 12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 14, 8-1 / 2 x 11S, 8KS

Min: 210 mm x 279 mm , 8-1

/ 4 x 11Max: 314 mm x 458 mm, 12-1 / 4 x 18

Max. number of sheets folded together 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ,16 to 24 lb)

Type Plain paper

Size A4S, 8-1 / 2 x 11S, 16KS

Max. number of sheets folded together 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 ,16 to 24 lb) *

Power requirementsDC 24 V (supplied from the finisher)

DC 5 V

Max. power consumption 40 W or less

Dimensions281.3 mm (W) x 596.4 mm (D) x 529.8 mm (H)


WeightApprox. 22.6 kg + 3.8 kg (Exit tray)

Approx. 49.75 lb + 8.5 lb (Exit tray)

8/21/2019 652 Service


1. PRODUCT SPECIFICATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

2

O U T L I N E

S D - 5 0 8


E. Consumables• Staples 5000 (MS-5C)


8/21/2019 652 Service



3

O U T L I N E

S D - 5 0 8

2. PAPER FEED PATH

2.1 Folding/saddle stitching

A11RT1C001DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



4

O U T L I N E

S D - 5 0 8

2.2 Tri-folding

A11RT1C002DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



5


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 8


3. CONFIGURATION

A11RT2C001DA

Exit section

Alignment section

Stapler

8/21/2019 652 Service



6

S D - 5 0 8

O P E R A T I O N


4.1 Drive

A11RT2C002DA

Center staple alignmentmotor/F (M20)

Center staple alignmentmotor/R (M21)

Alignment plate/FAlignment plate/R

Leading edge stopper

Leading edge stopper motor (M22)

Leading edgestopper

8/21/2019 652 Service



7


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 8

4.2 Operation

4.2.1 Alignment

• In the folding/saddle stitching/tri-folding mode, the center staple alignment motor/F and

/R aligns paper.

• The center staple alignment motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to move the

alignment plates and align paper.

• The leading edge stopper motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to make theleading edge stopper oscillate and align paper in the sub scanning direction.

A. Alignment operation• The center staple alignment motor/F and /R rotate to open/close the alignment plates via

the alignment belts.• The center staple alignment motor home sensor/F and /R detect the home position of the

alignment plates.

• The leading edge stopper motor rotates to make the leading edge stopper oscillate via

the belt.

A11RT2C003DA

Center staple alignment motor/F (M20)

Center staple alignment motor/R (M21)

Alignment plate/F

Alignment plate/R



Center staple alignmentmotor home sensor/F(PS30)

Center staple alignmentmotor home sensor/R(PS31)

8/21/2019 652 Service



8

S D - 5 0 8

O P E R A T I O N

B. Alignment control• Transmitting the FNS signal from the main body, the center staple alignment motor/F and

/R rotate to close the alignment plates, and then they stop the alignment plates at the

standby position that is a little wider than the paper width.

• The center staple alignment motor/F and /R perform the alignment operation by rotating

in the forward and reverse direction to move the alignment plate back and forth after a

specified period of time since the center staple pass sensor detects the trailing edge of

the paper.• The leading edge stopper motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to make the

leading edge stopper oscillate and align paper in the sub scanning direction. (This is

made from the 11th sheet of paper.)

• The alignment operation is performed for every paper.

A11RT2E019DB

Center staple alignment motorhome sensor/R (PS31)

Center staple alignment motorhome sensor/F (PS30)

Center staple pass sensor(PS12)Center staple alignmentmotor/R (M21)


Leading edge stopper motor(M22)

Closing the alignmentplate (FNS signal)

Standby position ofthe alignment plate

Alignment operation forevery paper

8/21/2019 652 Service



9


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 8

4.2.2 Stopper

• At the leading edge stopper, papers in sub scanning direction are aligned, and papers

conveyed to the aligning section are conveyed to the specified position.

• The exit grip holds the paper when shifting it to the specified position and when stapling

papers.

• The stopping position in vertical direction of paper conveyed to the alignment section is

different among the folding mode, the saddle stitching mode, and the tri-folding mode.

A. Stopper operation• The leading edge stopper motor moves the leading edge stopper up and down in accor-

dance with the paper size. The leading edge stopper home sensor detects the home

position.

A11RT2C005DA


Exit grip


Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS32)

Exit grip

Exit grip solenoid (SD6)

8/21/2019 652 Service



10

S D - 5 0 8

O P E R A T I O N

B. Stopper control(1) Folding mode• After a specified period of time since the last sheet of paper was aligned, the exit grip

solenoid is turned ON and the sheets of paper are held in place.

• After the sheets are held in place, the leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the

leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the folding position.

• After a specified period of time since the center fold knife home sensor was turned ON,

the transport motor is turned ON and it starts rotating at low speed. At the moment whenthe transport motor is accelerated to high speed, the leading edge stopper motor starts

rotating to move the leading edge stopper up to the alignment position in accordance

with the paper size and stand by for the paper of the subsequent copy.

A11RT2E020DA



Center fold knife motor (M32)

Center fold knife home sensor (PS34)




High speed

Low speed

Last paper of the copy aligned Moving to the foldingposition for the papersize

Moving to stand by for thepaper of the subsequent copy

8/21/2019 652 Service



11


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 8

(2) Saddle stitching mode• After a specified period of time since the last sheet of paper was aligned, the exit grip



leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the saddle stitching position.

• After a specified period of time since stapling operation was completed, the center staple

alignment motor/F and /R opens the alignment plates and the leading edge stopper

motor starts rotating to move the leading edge stopper further down and lower the paperto the folding position.

• After a specified period of time since the center fold knife home sensor was turned ON,

the transport motor is turned ON and it starts rotating at low speed. At the moment when

the transport motor is accelerated to high speed, the leading edge stopper motor starts

rotating to move the leading edge stopper up to the alignment position in accordance

with the paper size and stand by for the paper of the subsequent copy.

A11RT2E021DA

Center staple alignment motor/R(M21)Center staple alignment motor/F(M20)



Center staple motor (M23)

Staple motor (M24)


Center fold knife home sensor(PS34)


High speed

Low speed

Last paper of the copy aligned

Moving to the saddle stitchingposition for the paper size

Stapling operation Moving to the foldingposition for the paper size

Moving to stand by for thepaper of the subsequent copy

8/21/2019 652 Service



12

S D - 5 0 8

O P E R A T I O N

(3) Tri-folding mode• After a specified period of time since the last sheet of paper was aligned, the exit grip



leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the 1st folding position in the tri-fold-

ing.

• At the moment when the center fold knife home sensor is turned ON, the transport motor

is turned ON to start rotating at low speed. At the moment when the transport motor isaccelerated to middle speed, the leading edge stopper motor starts rotating to move the

leading edge stopper up to the alignment position in accordance with the paper size and

stand by for the paper of the subsequent copy.

A11RT2E022DA



Leading edge stopper motor(M22)Tri-folding change solenoid(SD5)


Center fold knife home sensor(PS34)


High speed

Low speed

Middle speed

Last paper of the copy aligned

Moving to the 1st foldingposition for the paper size

Moving to the alignment positionfor the subsequent copy

8/21/2019 652 Service



13


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 8

5. STAPLER

5.1 Drive

A11RT2C009DA

Timing belt

Stapler home sensor (PS33)

Stapler

Clincher


8/21/2019 652 Service



14

S D - 5 0 8

O P E R A T I O N

5.2 Operation


A. Stapler movement operation• The center staple motor moves the stapler.

• The stapler and the clincher are mounted at the timing belt.

• The stapler home sensor detects the distance between the stapler and the clincher.

A11RT2C009DA

Timing belt

Stapler home sensor (PS33)

Stapler

Clincher

Center staple motor (M23)Staple motor (M24)

8/21/2019 652 Service



15


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 8

B. Stapler movement control• At the moment when the center staple alignment motor /F is turned OFF, the center sta-

ple motor starts rotating to move the stapler to the front side.

• After a specified period of time since the staple motor was turned OFF, the center staple

motor starts rotating and moves the stapler to the rear side.

• After a specified period of time since the center fold knife motor was turned OFF, the cen-

ter staple motor starts rotating to move the stapler to the paper passage center position.

A11RT2E023DA




Staple motor (M24)


Moving to the stapling position(front size) for the paper size

Moving to the stapling position (rear size) for the paper size

Moving to the paper passagecenter position for the paper size

8/21/2019 652 Service



16

S D - 5 0 8

O P E R A T I O N

5.2.2 Stapling

• The stapling operation is performed by the stapler motor and the clincher motor.

A. Stapling operation• In the stapling operation, the stapler motor in the stapler pushes out the paper press sec-

tion to the clincher by the cam mechanism to hold the paper and punch out the staple.

Then, the clincher motor in the stapler bends the staple.

A11RT2C012DA

Stapler Paper

Clincher

Staple

Paper press

section

Cammechanism

Staple

8/21/2019 652 Service



17


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 8

B. Staple control(1) Stapling• After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the staple motor per-

forms the stapling operation.

• After a specified period of time, the clincher motor bends the staple.

• The stapling operation is completed when the stapler home sensor detects the home

position and turn ON.

(2) Clogged staple detection• During the stapling operation, it is determined that the staple has been clogged and the

center staple motor rotates in the reverse direction to replace the stapler to the home

position if the stapler home sensor does not turn ON after a specified period of time

since it turn OFF.

(3) Cartridge detection• The cartridge set switch detects the presence of a cartridge or the incorrect setting of a

cartridge.

• When no cartridge is set or it is set incorrectly, the main body displays the error messageon its display panel.

(4) Staple detection control• When the staples run out, the staple empty switch turns ON and the main body displays

the error message on its display panel.

8/21/2019 652 Service


6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

18

S D - 5 0 8

O P E R A T I O N

6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING

6.1 Drive

A11RT2C013DA

Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5)

Tri-folding gate

Folding roller

Tri-folding roller

Folding knife



8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING

19


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 8

6.2 Operation

6.2.1 Folding knife

• The center fold knife motor drives the folding knife.

• The folding knife is used in the folding/saddle stitching/tri-folding mode.

• In the tri-folding mode, it is used at the 1st folding.

A. Folding knife operation• The center fold knife motor rotates the crank shaft a half turn via the gear and pushes the

paper to the nip section with the folding knife.

• The folding rollers draw and fold the paper.

• The position of the leading edge stopper controls the folding position.

B. Folding knife control• The center fold knife motor turns ON and sticks out the folding knife to the paper after a

specified period of time since the leading edge stopper stops at the folding position.

• The center fold knife motor stops when the folding knife reciprocates and the center fold

knife home sensor turns OFF.

A11RT2C014DA

Fold knife

Paper

Folding roller


Center fold knifehome sensor (PS34)

8/21/2019 652 Service


6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

20

S D - 5 0 8

O P E R A T I O N

6.2.2 Folding transfer

• The transport motor drives the folding roller.

• Then, the folding roller drives the tri-folding roller.

A. Folding transfer control• The center fold knife motor turns ON after a specified period of time since the leading

edge stopper stops at the folding position.

• When the center fold knife motor turns ON the center fold knife home sensor, the trans-

port motor turns ON and drives the folding roller to perform the 1st folding and the tri-fold-

ing roller to perform the 2nd folding at the tri-folding operation, and then it exits the paper

to the exit tray.

• The transport motor stops after a specified period of time since the fold sensor detects

the trailing edge of the paper bundle.

A11RT2E024DA

Center fold knife motor (M32)Center fold knife home sensor (PS34)



Fold sensor (PS27)

High speed

Low speed

Leading edge stopper moved

Paper pressed to the folding roller by the folding knife

Paper fold

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING/TRI-FOLDING

21


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 8

6.2.3 Tri-folding gate

• The tri-folding gate switches between the folding/saddle stitching path and the tri-folding

path.

• The tri-folding change solenoid drives the tri-folding gate.

A. Tri-folding 2nd folding operation• The tri-folding change solenoid drives the tri-folding gate to switch the paper path to the

tri-folding path for leading the paper exited from the folding roller to the tri-folding stopper.

• To perform the 2nd folding, the loop formed when the paper contacts with the tri-folding

stopper are drawn between the folding roller and the tri-folding roller. Then the paper is

exited to the exit tray.

• The position of the tri-folding stopper determines the folding position in the 2nd folding.

B. Tri-folding gate control• After the leading edge stopper stops at the tri-folding position, the tri-folding change sole-

noid turns ON and drives the tri-folding gate to switch the paper path to the tri-folding

stopper.• The tri-folding change solenoid turns OFF after a specified period of time since the fold

sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper bundle.

A11RT2C016DA

Fold sensor (PS27)

Tri-folding roller

Exit tray

Tri-foldingroller

Loop

Folding roller

Tri-folding stopper Tri-folding change solenoid (SD5)

8/21/2019 652 Service


7. EXIT SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

22

S D - 5 0 8

O P E R A T I O N

7. EXIT SECTION

7.1 Drive

A11RT2C017DA

Lift up switch (SW3)

Exit motor (M34)

SD exit upper limit sensor (PS41)

SD exit full sensor(PS35)

Belt

SD exit sensor/PR (PS29)

SD exit sensor/LED (PS28)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. EXIT SECTION

23


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 8

7.2 Operation

7.2.1 Exit

• Turn ON the exit motor to drive the belt and convey papers by each copy set.

• Press the lift up switch of ahead of the exit tray to covey papers to ahead of the exit tray

randomly.

A. Exit drive• The exit motor rotates the belt and conveys exited papers.

B. Exit control• After a specified period of time since the SD exit sensor/LED and /PR was turned ON,

the exit motor starts rotating to turn the belt.

• After a specified period of time since the SD exit full sensor was turned OFF, the exit

motor stops.

C. Exit tray full detection

• The SD exit upper limit sensor and the SD exit full sensor detect the exit tray paper full.• It determines the exit tray is full if the exited paper shields the SD exit upper limit sensor

and the SD exit full sensor for the specified period of time.

A11RT2C018DA

SD exit upper limit sensor (PS41)

SD exit full sensor (PS35)

Paper

Belt

8/21/2019 652 Service



24

S D - 5 0 8

O P E R A T I O N

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


P K - 5 1 6

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

PK-516


2. UNIT CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... 2

3. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................3

CONFIGURATION/OPERATION4. PUNCH SECTION .................................................................................................. 5

4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................ 5

4.2 Drive ..................................................................................................................... 6

4.2.1 Punch shift drive ........................................................................................... 6

4.2.2 Punch drive ................................................................................................... 7

4.3 Operation..............................................................................................................9

4.3.1 Punch standby position movement control ................................................... 9

4.3.2 Punch position correction control................................................................ 10

4.3.3 Punch control .............................................................................................. 11

5. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION ........................................................................ 15

5.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 155.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 15

5.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 15

5.3.1 Punch scraps box control............................................................................ 15

8/21/2019 652 Service


P K - 5 1 6

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



1

O U T L I N E

P K - 5 1 6

OUTLINE


A. Type

B. Functions

C. Paper type

D. Machine specifications

E. Operating environment

• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.NOTE• These specifications are subject to change without notice.

Name Punch unit

Type FS-integrated type punching operation device

Punching method Stops and punches every paper

No. of holes 2-3 holes / 2-4 holes / 4 holes

Hole diameter/pitch

2 holes / φ 8.0 mm / 70 mm pitch - 3 holes / φ 6.5 mm / 108 mm pitch


4 holes / φ 6.5 mm / 70 mm, 21 mm pitch

Supported mode Punch mode, through mode

Applicable post processingmode Sort, group, staple

Size

2 hole/Sweden 4 hole punch setting:

A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5/B5S, A5/A5S,

8 x 13, 8 x 13S, 8-1 / 4 x 13, 8-1 / 2 x 13, 8-1 / 8 x 13-1 / 4, 11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 14,

8-1 / 2 x 11/8-1 / 2 x 11S, 5-1 / 2 x 8-1 / 2, 5-1 / 2 x 8-1 / 2S, 8K, 16K/16KS

7-1 / 4 x 10-1 / 2, 7-1 / 4 x 10-1 / 2S, 8-2 / 3 x 13S, 8-1 / 2 x 13S, 8-1 / 4 x 13S,

8-1 / 8 x 13-1 / 4S, 8-1 / 2 x 13-1 / 2S

3 hole/4 hole punch setting:A3, B4, A4, B5

11 x 17, 8 1 / 2 x 11, 7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2, 8K, 16K

Supported paperPlain paper, bond paper, colored paper, coated paper

(Main unit specifications prioritized)

Weight 60 to 300 g/m2 (16 to 80 lb)

Punch prohibited paper

Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, 2nd base paper, holed paper,

and the other paper that may interfere with the operation of the punch unit

or the punch blade

Power requirementsDC 24 V (supplied from the main body)


Max. power consumption 30 W or less

Dimensions146.2 mm (W) x 639.2 mm (D) x 233.8 mm (H)



8/21/2019 652 Service


2. UNIT CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

2

O U T L I N E

P K - 5 1 6

2. UNIT CONFIGURATION

A11TT2C001DA

Punch section

Punch scraps box section

8/21/2019 652 Service



3

O U T L I N E

P K - 5 1 6

3. PAPER PATH

A11TT2C002DA

Punch scraps box

Paper path fromthe main body

Punch unit

8/21/2019 652 Service



4

O U T L I N E

P K - 5 1 6

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



5


O P E R A T I O N

P K - 5 1 6


4. PUNCH SECTION

4.1 Configuration

NOTE• North America, Europe andSweden are same configuration except for a number of

blades.

A11TT2E011DA

Punch unit

Entrance roller

Punch blade

Punch blade

Punch unit

Front

8/21/2019 652 Service



6

P K - 5 1 6

O P E R A T I O N

4.2 Drive

4.2.1 Punch shift drive

A11TT2E012DA

Guide shaft

Rack

Punch oscillating motor (M302)

Belt

Punch unitFront

Punch blade

8/21/2019 652 Service



7


O P E R A T I O N

P K - 5 1 6

4.2.2 Punch drive

A. North America (2 to 3 holes)

B. Europe (2 to 4 holes)

A11TT2E013DA

Punch drive motor (M301)

Punch blades forthe 3-hole punch


Slot

Punch drive plateFront

A11TT2E014DA


Punch blades for the2 and 4-hole punch


Slot

Punch drive plateFront

8/21/2019 652 Service



8

P K - 5 1 6

O P E R A T I O N

C. PK-516 for Sweden (4 holes)

A11TT2E015DA


Punch blades for the 4-hole punch

FrontPunch drive plate

Slot

8/21/2019 652 Service



9


O P E R A T I O N

P K - 5 1 6

4.3 Operation

4.3.1 Punch standby position movement control

Turning ON the device, the punch oscillating motor rotates to move the punch unit to the

home position until the PK punch oscillating home sensor turns ON.

After selecting a punch mode, one of five sensors corresponded to each paper size detects

a paper and the punch unit is shifted.

The punch unit returns to the home position at the end of the job.

NOTE• The paper size detect board is positioned on the front side and its operation is

contrary to that in the above illustration on the right and left sides.

A11TT2E016DA

Punch blade

Side edge reference position


Punch unit

Paper transfer direction

Paper

<Example: A4 size>

8/21/2019 652 Service



10

P K - 5 1 6

O P E R A T I O N

4.3.2 Punch position correction control

For the punch unit positioned from the side edge of the paper to the inside, the punch posi-

tion is adjusted in the following procedure so that punching is made to the center of paper

at all times. The punch position correction is operated by moving the punch unit back and

forth while conveying the paper.

• When the FNS pass sensor detects the leading edge of the paper, the punch unit is

moved to the front side until the paper size detect board detects the side edge of the

paper.

Then, the punch unit is moved to the rear side until the paper size detect board detects

the side edge of the paper (the side edge reference position detection).

• Once it detects the side edge reference position, the punch unit is moved further so that

the center of the punch blade is positioned to the center of the paper. The moving dis-

tance and its direction are depending on the paper size.

NOTE• The paper size detect board is positioned on the front side and its operation is

contrary to that in the above illustration on the right and left sides.

A11TT2E017DA

Punch blades

Punch unit

Center of the punch blade


Side edge reference position

Rear sideFront side

Punch unit moving direction

Center of the paper Paper

Paper

transferdirection

<Example: A4 size>

8/21/2019 652 Service



11


O P E R A T I O N

P K - 5 1 6

4.3.3 Punch control

A. Registration loop controlThe transport motor/1 turns OFF temporarily to stop conveyance of paper when the speci-

fied time has passed since paper exit sensor detected the leading edge of the paper. Thus

the paper is pressed against the entrance roller forming a loop to correct the bend. When

the specified time has passed, the transport motor/1 turns ON to restart conveying the

paper.

The above operation is not performed when conveying a large paper and in the non-punch-

ing mode.

A11TT2C008DA

Entrance roller Entrance roller

PK

Loop

8/21/2019 652 Service



12

P K - 5 1 6

O P E R A T I O N

B. Punch controlTransmitting the start signal from the main body, the transport motor/1 rotates.

In the punch mode, the transport motor/1 stops temporarily a specified period of time after

the FNS pass sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper.

At the same time, the punch drive motor is driven to move the punch drive plate horizon-

tally. The punch drive plate has slots to shift punch blades up and down. Punch blades

moving downward conduct the punch operation. The punch drive motor stops and the

punch operation is completed when the PK punch home sensor turns ON.The transport motor/1 rotates again to convey the paper a specified period of time after it

stops temporarily.

North America (2 to 3 holes)

A11TT2E018DA

Punch driver motor (M301)

Punch blade

Punch unit

Slot Punch drive plate

Front

PK punch homesensor (PS301)

8/21/2019 652 Service



13


O P E R A T I O N

P K - 5 1 6

Europe (2 to 4 holes)

A11TT2E019DA

Punch driver motor (M301)Punch blade

Punch unit


Front


8/21/2019 652 Service



14

P K - 5 1 6

O P E R A T I O N

Sweden (4 holes)

A11TT2E020DA

Punch driver motor (M301)

Punch blades

Punch unit


Front


8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 5. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION

15


O P E R A T I O N

P K - 5 1 6

5. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION

5.1 Configuration

5.2 Drive

• The punch scraps box section comprises no moving parts.

5.3 Operation

5.3.1 Punch scraps box control

A. Punch scraps box full detectionThe punch scraps generated by the punch operation falls in the punch scraps box. The PK

punch scraps box full sensor turns ON and transmits the “no punch scraps box” information

to the main body when the punch scraps box becomes full of punch scraps.

B. Punch scraps box detectionThe PK punch scraps box set sensor detects whether the punch scraps box is set or not.

The PK punch scraps box set sensor turns OFF and transmits the “no punch scraps box”

information to the main body if the punch scraps box is not set.

A11TT2E021DA

PK punch scraps boxfull sensor (PS302)

PK punch scraps boxset sensor (PS304)

Punch scraps box

Front

8/21/2019 652 Service


5. PUNCH SCRAPS BOX SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

16

P K - 5 1 6

O P E R A T I O N

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


J S -

6 0 2

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

JS-602



3. CENTER CROSS SECTION................................................................................... 4

4. MECHANICAL OPERATION................................................................................... 5

4.1 Job tray paper transport mechanism.................................................................... 5

8/21/2019 652 Service


J S - 6 0 2

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



1

O U T L I N E

J S - 6 0 2

OUTLINE


A. Type

B. Functions

C. Paper type


E. Operating environmentConforms to the operating environment of the main body.


Name Job separator

Type Add-on finishing device externally mounted on top of finisher

Installation Fixed to finisher


Modes Group, Sort (during copy, print, or fax mode)

Type Size Weight Tray capacity

Plain paper

A5S to A3

5-1/2 × 8-1/2S to

11 × 17

60 to 90 g/m2

16 to 24 lb

100 sheets:

A4, 8-1/2 × 11 (80 g/m2, 21.25 lb)

50 sheets:

except A4, 8-1/2 × 11 (80 g/m2, 21.25 lb)

(Height: up to 28 mm, 1.1 inch)

Power requirements DC 5 V, DC 24 V (supplied from finisher)

Dimensions 341 mm (W) × 537 mm (D) × 149 mm (H)13.43 inch (W) × 21.14 inch (D) × 5.87 inch (H)


8/21/2019 652 Service



2

O U T L I N E

J S - 6 0 2

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



3


O P E R A T I O N

J S -

6 0 2


2. CONFIGURATION

A01CT2C001DA

Job tray Job separator cover

8/21/2019 652 Service


3. CENTER CROSS SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

4

J S - 6 0 2

O P E R A T I O N

3. CENTER CROSS SECTION

A01CT2C002DA

Job separator exit roller

Job separator exit roll Job separator transport roller

Job separator transport roll

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. MECHANICAL OPERATION

5


O P E R A T I O N

J S -

6 0 2

4. MECHANICAL OPERATION

4.1 Job tray paper transport mechanism

• The job separator transport roller and job separator exit roller turn to transport the paper

into the job tray as the motor is energized.

• The 3rd entrance switching solenoid is energized to select the paper path into the job

tray.

Job separator transport roller

Job separator exit roller

Bypass transport motor(M3-FN)

3rd entrance switching solenoid(SD404)

Paper

SD404

8/21/2019 652 Service


4. MECHANICAL OPERATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

6

J S - 6 0 2

O P E R A T I O N

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


P I - 5 0 5

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

PI-505


2. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2

2.1 Auto sheet feeding (online operation) ...................................................................2

2.2 Manual sheet feeding (offline operation) .............................................................. 2


4. PAPER FEED SECTION.........................................................................................4

4.1 Drive ..................................................................................................................... 4

4.1.1 Paper feed drive............................................................................................4

4.1.2 Tray lift drive .................................................................................................. 5

4.2 Operation..............................................................................................................6

4.2.1 Tray lift mechanism ....................................................................................... 6

4.2.2 Pick-up mechanism....................................................................................... 7

4.2.3 Separation mechanism ................................................................................. 8

4.2.4 Registration control ....................................................................................... 94.2.5 Paper size detection control........................................................................ 10

8/21/2019 652 Service


P I - 5 0 5

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



1

O U T L I N E

P I - 5 0 5

OUTLINE


A. Type

B. Functions

C. Paper type


E. Operating environment• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.


Name Post inserter

Type Torque limiter separation type seat feeding device

Auto sheet feeding

(online operation)

Feeds the sheet to finisher automatically under the instruction from the main

body.

Manual sheet feeding

(offline operation)

Feeds the sheet to finisher under the instruction from the operation panel of PI.

You can select the following 5 post processing modes:

• 1 staple/back mode

• 2 staples (flat-stapling) mode

• Punch mode (when PK-516 is installed on finisher)

• Saddle stitching mode (when SD-508 is installed on finisher)• Tri-folding mode (when SD-508 is installed on finisher)

Size Tray /Up A4/A4S, B5/B5S, A5

8 1 / 2 x 11, 8 1 / 2 x 11S, 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2, 7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2S, 16K, 16KS

Custom paper (Max. 311.1 x 297 mm, Min. 182 x 139 mm)

Tray /Lw A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5/B5S, A5

8 x 13S, 8 1 / 4 x 13S, 8 1 / 2 x 13S, 8 1 / 8 x 13 1 / 4S, SRA4S, 12 x 18,

11 x 17, 8 1 / 2 x 14, 8 1 /

2 x 11, 8 1 /

2 x 11S, 5 1 /

2 x 8 1 /

2, 8K, 16K,

16KS, 7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2, 7 1 / 4 x 10 1 / 2S

Custom paper (Max. 311.1 x 457.2 mm, Min. 182 x 139 mm)

TypePlain paper, recycle paper, color paper, special paper, coated paper,

high-quality paper

Weight 60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 (16 to 55.5 lb)

Capacity Tray /Up 200 sheets (80 g/m2) and 30 mm or less in height

Tray /Lw 200 sheets (80 g/m2) and 30 mm or less in height

Power requirements DC 24 V, DC 5 V (supplied from the main body)

Max. power


Dimensions 511 mm (W) x 635 mm (D) x 220 mm (H)

20.12 inch (W) x 25 inch (D) x 8.66 inch (H)


8/21/2019 652 Service



2

O U T L I N E

P I - 5 0 5

2. PAPER FEED PATH

2.1 Auto sheet feeding (online operation)

2.2 Manual sheet feeding (offline operation)

A10AT1C001DA

Paper path from the tray /Up

Paper path from the tray /Lw

A10AT1C002DA

Paper path from the tray /Lw

8/21/2019 652 Service



3


O P E R A T I O N

P I - 5 0 5


3. CONFIGURATION

A10AT2C001DA

Tray /Up section Pick-up /Up section

Separation /Upsection

Transfersection

Separation /Lw section

Pick-up /Lw section

Tray /Lw section

8/21/2019 652 Service


4. PAPER FEED SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

4

P I - 5 0 5

O P E R A T I O N

4. PAPER FEED SECTION

4.1 Drive

4.1.1 Paper feed drive

A10AT2C002DA

Transfer clutch /Lw (CL202)

Pick-up roller /Up and /Lw

Paper feed roller /Up and /Lw

Pick-up solenoid /Up, /Lw(SD201, SD202)

Front

Pick-up roller /Lw

Pick-up roller /Up

Pick-up solenoid /Up (SD201)

Paper feed roller /Up

Transfer clutch /Up (CL201)

Separation roller /Up

Transfer roller /Up

Registrationclutch (CL203)

Paper feed roller /Lw

Transfer roller /Lw

Separation roller /Lw

Pick-up solenoid /Lw (SD202)

Transfer motor (M203)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. PAPER FEED SECTION

5


O P E R A T I O N

P I - 5 0 5

4.1.2 Tray lift drive

A10AT2C003DA

Tray lift motor /Up (M201)

Tray lift motor /Lw (M202)

Front

8/21/2019 652 Service



6

P I - 5 0 5

O P E R A T I O N

4.2 Operation

4.2.1 Tray lift mechanism

• The tray lift motors /Up and /Lw move up and down the trays /Up and /Lw by rotating in

the forward and reverse direction to drive the lift arms /Up and /Lw and move up and

down the lift plates /Up and /Lw, respectively.

• At the upper limit positions, the tray upper limit sensors /Up and /Lw detect the actuators

lifted up by the lift plates.• At the lower position of the tray, the tray lower limit sensors /Up and /Lw detect the actua-

tors coupled with the lift arms /Up and /Lw.

A10AT2C004DA

Tray upper limit sensor /Up (PS204)

Tray lift motor /Up (M201)

Tray upperlimit sensor

/Lw (PS209)

Lift arm /LwTray lower limit sensor /Lw (PS210)

Tray lift plate /Lw


Tray lift plate /Up

Tray lower limit sensor /Up (PS205) Lift arm /Up

8/21/2019 652 Service



7


O P E R A T I O N

P I - 5 0 5

4.2.2 Pick-up mechanism

• The pick-up solenoids /Up and /Lw turn ON to pick up the paper.

• The release arm held upward by the spring lifts up the pick-up roller mounting plate to

release the pick-up roller.

• When the pick-up solenoids /Up and /Lw turn ON, the release arm moves backward, and

then the pick-up roller mounting plate and the pick-up roller fall down by their own weight.

• The pick-up roller driven by the transfer motor presses the paper and picks it up to trans-

fer it to the separation section.

A10AT2C005DA

Spring

Pick-up solenoid /Up (SD201)Pick-up roller

Pick-up roller mounting plate Release arm

8/21/2019 652 Service



8

P I - 5 0 5

O P E R A T I O N

4.2.3 Separation mechanism

• The separation roller is driven to rotate in the opposite direction from the paper transfer

direction. When transferring no or 1 sheet of paper, the separation roller rotates in the

paper transfer direction to transfer the paper to the paper transfer section because the

frictional force between the paper feed roller or the paper and the separation roller is

stronger than the frictional force of the torque limiter.

• When transferring 2 or more sheets of paper, the separation roller rotates in the reverse

direction to prevent the bottom sheet from being transferred because the frictional force

between the sheets is stronger than the frictional force of the torque limiter.

A10AT2C006DA

Paper feed roller

Paper transferdirection

Torque limiter

Separation roller

2nd sheet

1st sheet

Pick-up roller

8/21/2019 652 Service



9


O P E R A T I O N

P I - 5 0 5


• Transmitting the FS start signal, the transfer motor rotates in low speed and the pick-up

solenoids /UP and /Lw turn ON. At the time, the tray lift motors /Up and /Lw rotate in the

forward direction to lift up the trays /Up and /Lw.

• The tray lift motors /Up and /Lw stop when the tray upper limit sensors /Up and /Lw turn

ON, and after a specified period of time, the transfer clutches /Up and /Lw turn ON and

the paper is picked up from the tray. Only 1 sheet of paper is transferred by the transfer

roller because of the separation roller.

• The transfer motor rotates in high speed when the paper reaches the paper entrance

sensors /Up and /Lw. At the time, the paper is pressed against the transfer roller and

forms a loop because the registration clutch is OFF. After a specified period of time, the

registration clutch turns ON and the transfer motor drives the paper to FS.

• The transfer motor switches to rotate in low speed to feed the subsequent paper since

the paper passed the paper entrance sensors /Up and /Lw, and then the registration

clutch turns OFF after a specified period of time.

A10AT2C007DA

FS start signal turned ON Tray reached at the upper limit

Paper reached the paper entrance sensors /Up and /Lw

Registration clutch turned ON

Trailing edge of the paper passed the paper entrance sensors /Up and /Lw

Transfer motor(M203)

Transfer clutch /Lw (CL202)


Tray upper limit sensor /Lw (PS209)

Pick-up solenoid /Lw (SD202)

Paper entrance sensor /Lw (PS206)

Registration clutch (CL203)

253 mm/s

670 mm/s

8/21/2019 652 Service



10

P I - 5 0 5

O P E R A T I O N


• The paper size VRs /Up and /Lw coupled with the side guide detects the paper size in

the main scan direction.

• The paper set sensors /Up and /Lw and the L size sensor /Lw detects the paper size in

the sub scan direction.

A10AT2C008DA

Paper size VR /Up (VR201)

Side guide plate

Paper size VR /Lw (VR202)

Paper set sensor /Lw (PS208)

Paper set sensor /Up (PS203)

L size sensor /Lw (PS212)

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


F S - 5 2 7

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

FS-527


2. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 4

2.1 Tray1 ..................................................................................................................... 4

2.2 Tray2 ..................................................................................................................... 5

2.3 Stapling................................................................................................................. 6


4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION............................................................... 8

4.1 Configuration ........................................................................................................ 8

4.2 Horizontal conveyance mechanism ......................................................................9

4.2.1 Paper conveyance......................................................................................... 9

4.2.2 Conveyance path switching motor mechanism ........................................... 10

5. CONVEYANCE SECTION .................................................................................... 11

5.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 11

5.2 Drive ................................................................................................................... 125.3 Operation............................................................................................................ 13

5.3.1 Upper lower path switching gate ................................................................. 13

5.3.2 Tray1 path switching gate............................................................................ 14

5.3.3 Conveyance operation ................................................................................ 15

6. EXIT TRAY SECTION ........................................................................................... 18

6.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 18

6.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 19

6.2.1 Tray lift.........................................................................................................196.2.2 Exit to tray1 ................................................................................................. 20

6.2.3 Exit to tray2 ................................................................................................. 21

6.2.4 Tray2 shift control ........................................................................................23

7. ALIGNMENT SECTION ........................................................................................25

7.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 25

7.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 26

7.2.1 Alignment plate ........................................................................................... 26

7.2.2 Alignment section conveyance mechanism ................................................27

8. STAPLER .............................................................................................................. 28

8/21/2019 652 Service


F S - 5 2 7

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

8.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 28

8.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 29

8.2.1 Stapler movement....................................................................................... 29

8.2.2 Stapler control............................................................................................. 30

8/21/2019 652 Service



1

O U T L I N E

F S - 5 2 7

OUTLINE


A. Type

B. Functions

C. Paper type(1) Non sort/sort/group

*: Long size paper is available only for non-sort mode.

Name Multi staple finisher

Type Freestanding

Document

alignmentCenter

Consumables Staples

Modes Sort, group, offset, group offset, sort staple

Type Size Weight Max. capacity

Plain paper

Recycled

paper

A6S, A5S/A5, B5S/B5,

B6S, A4S/A4, B4, A3,

A3Wide

5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2S/5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2,

8 1 / 2 x 11S/8 1 / 2 x 11,

8 1 / 2 x 14, 11 x 17,

12 1 / 4 x 18

Tray1 (Sub tray)

Max.

311.15 mm x 1200 mm

12.25 x 47.24 inch

Min.

90 mm x 139.7 mm

3.54 x 5.5 inch

Tray2 (Main tray)

Max.

311.15 mm x 457.2 mm

12.25 x 18 inch

Min.

100 mm x 139.7 mm

3.94 x 5.5 inch

60 to 90 g/m2

16 to 24 lb

Exit

tray1200 sheets

Exit

tray2

A4S, 8 1 / 2 x 11S

or less

3,000

sheets

B4, 8 1 / 2 x 14

or greater

1,500

sheets

A5S, 5 1 / 2 x 8 1 / 2S

or less

500

sheets

Envelope —

20 sheets

OHP

transparencies—

Label —

Letterhead —

Thick paper 191 to 120 g/m2

24.25 to 32 lb

Thick paper 1+121 to 157 g/m2

32.25 to 41.75 lb


42 to 55.5 lb


55.75 to 68 lb


68.25 to 80 lb

Long size

paper *

210 mm to 297 mm x

457.2 mm to 1200 mm

127 to 160 g/m2

33.75 to 42.5 lb—

8/21/2019 652 Service



2

O U T L I N E

F S - 5 2 7

(2) Sort offset/group offset

*: 2,000 sheets when SD-509 is mounted

(3) Sort staple

Type Size Weight Max. capacity

Plain paper

Recycled

paper

A5, B5S/B5, A4S/A4, B4,

A3, A3Wide

8 1 / 2 x 11S/8 1 / 2 x 11,

8 1 / 2 x 14, 11 x 17, 12 1 / 4 x 18

Max.311.15 mm x 457.2 mm

12.25 x 18 inch

Min.

182 mm x 148.5 mm

7.17 x 5.85 inch

60 to 90 g/m2

16 to 24 lb

Exit

tray2

A4S, 8 1 / 2 x 11S

or less

3,000

sheets *

B4, 8 1 / 2 x 14

or greater

1,500

sheets

A5500

sheets

Thick paper91 to 300 g/m2

24.25 to 80 lb—

Type Size Weight No. of sheetsto be stapled

Max. capacity Max.

No. ofsheets

to be

stapled

A4S,

8-1 / 2 X 11S

or less

B4,

8-1 / 2 X 14

or greater

Plain paper

Recycled

paper

A5, B5S/B5, A4S/A4,

B4, A3

8 1 / 2 x 11S/8 1 / 2 x 11,

8 1 / 2 x 14, 11 x 17

Max.

297 mm x 431.8 mm

11.75 x 17 inch

Min.

182 mm x 148.5 mm

7.25 x 5.75 inch

60 to 90 g/m2

16 to 24 lb

Exit

tray2

2 to 9

sheets100 copies 50 copies

50

sheets

10 to 20


21 to 30


31 to 40

sheets 25 copies 25 copies

41 to 50


Thick

paper

91 to 209 g/m2

24.25 to 55.5 lb

—30

sheets

—15

sheets

8/21/2019 652 Service



3

O U T L I N E

F S - 5 2 7

D. Stapling

E. Machine specifications

*: Size when the paper output tray is pulled out

F. Operating environment• Conforms to the operating environment of the main body.

Staple filling mode Dedicated staple cartridge (5000 staples)

Stapling position

Back/Front of the corner

(45 degree)

A4, A3

8 1 / 2 x 11, 11 x 17


(35 degree)B5, B4


(Parallel)

A4S, B5S, A58 1 / 2 x 11S, 8 1 / 2 x 14

Side: Parallel 2 pointA4S/A4, A3, B5S/B5, B4, A5

8 1 / 2 x 11S/8 1 / 2 x 11, 8 1 / 2 x 14, 11 x 17

Manual staple None

Power

requirementsDC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main body)

Max. powerconsumption

56 W or less

Dimensions

528 (W) x 641 (D) x 1,025 (H) mm

20.79 (W) x 25.24 (D) x 40.35 (H) inch

658 (W) x 641 (D) x 1,087 (H) mm *

25.91 (W) x 25.24 (D) x 42.8 (H) inch *


8/21/2019 652 Service



4

O U T L I N E

F S - 5 2 7

2. PAPER FEED PATH

2.1 Tray1

A0HRT1C001DB

Tray1 exit rollerTray1

Tray1 path switching gate

Paper path from the horizontalconveyance unit

8/21/2019 652 Service



5

O U T L I N E

F S - 5 2 7

2.2 Tray2

A0HRT1C002DB

Tray2

Bypass route Upper lower path switching gate


8/21/2019 652 Service



6

O U T L I N E

F S - 5 2 7

2.3 Stapling

A0HRT1C003DB

Tray2 exit roller

Tray2

Alignment sectionStapler


Bypass route Upper lower path switching gate

8/21/2019 652 Service



7


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 7


3. CONFIGURATION

• The following sections are combined in a single unit: the horizontal conveyance section,

conveyance section, alignment section, tray1, tray2, and stapler section.

A0HRT2C002DB

Alignment section

Tray2

Stapler section

Horizontal conveyancesectionConveyance section

Tray1

8/21/2019 652 Service


4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

8

F S - 5 2 7

O P E R A T I O N

4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION

4.1 Configuration

• The horizontal conveyance section is composed of the duplex path switching sensor,

paper passage sensor/1, horizontal conveyance cover sensor, paper passage sensor/2,

paper passage motor/1, and duplex path switching motor.

A0HRT2C001DA

Paper passagemotor/1 (M1)

Paper passage sensor/2 (PS2)

Duplex path switching sensor (PS3)Duplex path switching motor (M2)

Paper passage sensor/1 (PS1)

Horizontal conveyance coversensor (PS5)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION

9


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 7

4.2 Horizontal conveyance mechanism

4.2.1 Paper conveyance

• In the horizontal conveyance section, the paper passage motor/1 drives the conveyance

rollers to convey paper fed out from the fusing section of the main body to the finisher.

A0HRT2C003DA

Horizontal conveyance section

Main body sideFinisher side

Conveyance roller

Paper passage motor/1 (M1)

8/21/2019 652 Service


4. HORIZONTAL CONVEYANCE SECTION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

10

F S - 5 2 7

O P E R A T I O N

4.2.2 Conveyance path switching motor mechanism

• The horizontal conveyance section is provided with a path switching mechanism for con-

veying paper fed from the fusing section onto the duplex section or tray3 (when another

option of JS-603 is mounted).

• The paper path is changed by the duplex path switching motor and the path switching

guide.

A. Operation• The path switching guide swings up or down when the duplex path switching motor is

energized.

• The duplex path switching sensor detects the position of the path switching guide.

A0HRT2C024DA

Duplex path switchingsensor (PS3)

Duplex path switchingmotor (M2)

Path switching guide

Path switching guide position Duplex path switching sensor

Swung-up position (paper to finisher) Unblocking

Swung-down position (paper to duplex section) Blocking

8/21/2019 652 Service



11


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 7

5. CONVEYANCE SECTION

5.1 Configuration

A0HRT2C025DB

Conveyance motor (M4)


Exit motor (M5)

Registrationroller

Switchback rollerTray2 exit roller

Tray1 exit roller

8/21/2019 652 Service



12

F S - 5 2 7

O P E R A T I O N

5.2 Drive

A0HRT2C004DC

Conveyance motor (M4)


Exit motor (M5)Tray1 exit roller

Exit driven roller

Tray2 exit roller

Conveyanceroller 2

Paper passage roller

Conveyance roller 1

8/21/2019 652 Service



13


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 7

5.3 Operation

5.3.1 Upper lower path switching gate

• The upper lower path switching gate switches the paper conveyance path that go to indi-

vidual trays and SD-509.

• The paper exit command from the main body moves the upper lower path switching gate

up or down as necessary.

A. Upper lower path switching gate operation• The upper lower path switching motor drives the upper lower path switching gate.

A0HRT2C005DB

Upper lower path switching motor (M6)

Upper lower path switching gate

Upper lower pathswitching gate

8/21/2019 652 Service



14

F S - 5 2 7

O P E R A T I O N

5.3.2 Tray1 path switching gate

• The tray1 path switching gate changes the path between one toward the tray1 and one

toward the bypass.

A. Tray1 path switching gate operation• The tray1 path switching gate is operated by the tray1 path switching motor.

• When the tray1 path switching motor is energized, the tray1 path switching gate swings

up or down.

• The tray1 path switching home sensor detects the position of the tray1 path switching

gate, either the swung-up or swung-down position.

A0HRT2C006DB

Tray1 path switching home sensor (PS7)

Tray1 path switchingmotor (M8)



8/21/2019 652 Service



15


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 7

5.3.3 Conveyance operation

A. Tray1 conveyance• The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is conveyed via the registra-

tion roller, upper lower path switching gate, and tray1 path switching gate. It is then fed

out into the tray1 by the tray1 exit roller.

B. Tray2 conveyance• The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is conveyed onto the align-

ment section by way of the registration roller, paper passage roller, switchback roller, and

lower path roller.

A0HRT2C008DB

Registration roller

Upper lower path switching gate

Tray1 exit roller


Tray1

A0HRT2C007DB

Paper passage roller

Lower path roller

Switchback roller

Tray2 Registration roller

8/21/2019 652 Service



16

F S - 5 2 7

O P E R A T I O N

C. Bypass route• The bypass route is provided to eliminate any time loss during stapling operation relative

to the subsequent sheet of paper and to achieve high productivity.

The following describe how two copy sets/stacks are produced as an output, each con-

sisting of two sheets of paper stapled together.

(1) For the 1st copy

• The bypass route is not used for the paper path for the first copy set/stack.

(2) For the 2nd copy• The first sheet of paper of the second copy set/stack passes through the path to tray2,

but is fed and temporarily brought into a standby state on the conveyance path to the SD-

509 by the switchback roller.

• The second sheet of paper of the second copy set/stack is then conveyed and fed into

the bypass route.

• At the same time that the first copy set/stack is fed out, the first and second sheets of the

second copy set/stack are conveyed onto the alignment section.

A0HRT2C009DB

SD-509

Switchback roller

Tray2

Conveyance path to the SD-509

Bypass route

8/21/2019 652 Service



17


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 7

D. Conveyance to SD-509• The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is further conveyed onto the

path toward tray2 and, when the trailing edge of the paper moves past the lower path

sensor, the switchback roller is brought to a temporary stop.

• The switchback roller is thereafter turned backward, so that the paper is conveyed into

the SD-509.

A0HRT2C010DB

Switchback roller

Lower path sensor (PS9)

SD-509

8/21/2019 652 Service



18

F S - 5 2 7

O P E R A T I O N

6. EXIT TRAY SECTION

6.1 Drive

A0HRT2C011DB

Lift belt

Tray2

Elevate motor (M15)

8/21/2019 652 Service



19


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 7

6.2 Operation

6.2.1 Tray lift

A. Tray lift operation• The driving force of the worm gear mounted on the shaft of the elevate motor drives the

lift belt.

• The tray2 moves up or down depending on the direction in which the lift belt is driven.

B. Paper detection• The tray2 upper position sensor keeps the specified distance between the upper surface

of the paper exited to the tray2 and the paper exit opening to eliminate the misalignment

of the exited paper.

• The tray2 upper position sensor and tray2 lower position sensor detect a full-of-paper

condition of the tray2.

• When both of these sensors are activated, a corresponding message appears on the

control panel.

• The tray2 lower position switch detects the lower limit of the tray.

A0HRT2C012DB

Tray2 upper position sensor (PS24)

Tray2 upper positionswitch (SW2)

Tray2 lower position sensor (PS21)

Tray2

Elevate motor (M15)

Lift belt

Tray2 lower positionswitch (SW3)

8/21/2019 652 Service



20

F S - 5 2 7

O P E R A T I O N

6.2.2 Exit to tray1

• The paper conveyed from the horizontal conveyance section is fed out into the tray1 by

the tray1 exit roller by way of the registration roller and paper passage roller.

• The upper lower path switching gate and tray1 path switching gate are also operated to

convey the paper into the tray1.

• The paper passage motor/2 provides drive for the tray1 exit roller.

A0HRT2C015DB

Upper lower pathswitching gate

Paper passage motor/2 (M3)Tray1 pathswitching gate

Tray1 exit roller

Tray1

8/21/2019 652 Service



21


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 7

6.2.3 Exit to tray2

• The exit motor is energized to convey paper onto tray2.

• To collect sheets of paper in the alignment section during stapling, the exit roll is tempo-

rarily retracted.

• When the stapling operation is completed, the exit roll is pressed, so that the paper is fed

out into tray2.

• The exit roller retraction motor provides drive for retraction of the exit roll.

A. Normal paper exit operation• When the leading edge of the paper reaches a point a given distance before the tray2

exit roller, the exit motor is energized and the paper is conveyed onto tray2.

A0HRT2C013DB

Tray2 exit roller

Exit motor (M5)

8/21/2019 652 Service



22

F S - 5 2 7

O P E R A T I O N

B. Paper exit operation during stapling• When the leading edge of the paper reaches the paper exit sensor of the main body, the

exit roller retraction motor is energized to retract the exit roll.

• After the paper is processed, the exit roller retraction motor is energized to press the exit

roll and the paper is fed out by drive from the exit motor.

A0HRT2C014DB

Exit roll

Exit roller retraction motor (M9)

Exit motor (M5)

Tray2 exit roller

A0HRT2C026DA

Before pressure After pressure

8/21/2019 652 Service



23


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 7

6.2.4 Tray2 shift control

• The tray2 is moved to the front or rear in order to offset one copy set/stack with respect to

another in the sort or group mode.

• The tray2 shift motor provides drive for the front-to-rear shift motion of the tray2.

A0HRT2C016DB

Tray2

Tray2 shift motor (M16)

8/21/2019 652 Service



24

F S - 5 2 7

O P E R A T I O N

A. Tray1 shift operation• When the leading edge of the paper reaches a point a given distance before the tray2

exit roller in the sort/group mode, the tray2 shift motor is energized to perform the shift

operation.

• When the tray2 shift motor is energized, the shift frame is moved to the right or left via a

gear train, which results in tray2 operatively connected to the shift frame being moved to

the right or left.

• If a command for the next paper is received, the tray2 shift motor is energized again toperform the shift operation.

• The shift position of the tray2 is controlled by the tray2 shift home sensor. The sensor is

activated when the tray2 is at its home position (ordinary position).

• The amount of shift operation of the tray2 is 30 mm.

A0HRT2C019DB

Tray2 shift home sensor (PS25)

Tray2 shift motor (M16)

30 mm

Tray2

Shift frame

8/21/2019 652 Service



25


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 7


7.1 Drive

A0HRT2C017DB

Alignment plate

Alignment plate motor (M13)

Alignment plate home sensor (PS17)

8/21/2019 652 Service



26

F S - 5 2 7

O P E R A T I O N

7.2 Operation

7.2.1 Alignment plate

• The alignment plates align sheets of paper in the crosswise direction inside the finisher.

• The alignment plate motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to open/close the

alignment plates to perform the alignment of the paper.

• The alignment plate motor rotates to open/close the alignment plates via the alignment

plate belts.• The alignment plate home sensor detects the home position of the alignment plates.

A0HRT2C018DB

Alignment plate motor(M13)

Alignment plate home sensor (PS17)

Alignment plate

8/21/2019 652 Service



27


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 7

7.2.2 Alignment section conveyance mechanism

• The paper fed out from the main body goes in the alignment section by its own weight.

• The accommodation paddle motor operates the accommodation paddle and rewind pad-

dles to convey paper reliably onto the alignment section.

A0HRT2C020DB

Rewind paddle

Accommodation paddlemotor (M12)

Accommodationpaddle

8/21/2019 652 Service



28

F S - 5 2 7

O P E R A T I O N

8. STAPLER

8.1 Drive

A0HRT2C021DB

Stapler movement motor (M11)

Stapler home sensor/1 (PS18)


Stapler unit

Belt

A0HRT2C027DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



29


O P E R A T I O N

F S - 5 2 7

8.2 Operation


A. Stapler movement operation• The stapler movement motor moves the stapler.

• Rotation of the stapler movement motor drives the belt through the pulley, which moves

the stapler mounted on the belt.

• The stapler stop position varies depending on the staple position and paper size.• In the two-point stapling mode, the stapler is stopped at a position a given distance rela-

tive to the stapler home sensor/2 to staple sheets.

• In the one-corner stapling mode using A4 or A3 paper, the stapler stops at the stapler

home sensor/1 to staple sheets. For any other paper size, the stapler stops a position a

predetermined distance away relative to the stapler home sensor/1 to staple sheets.

A0HRT2C028DA

Belt


Stapler

8/21/2019 652 Service



30

F S - 5 2 7

O P E R A T I O N

8.2.2 Stapler control

• The stapling operation is performed by the stapler motor.

A. Stapling operation• In the stapling operation, the stapler motor drives the clincher side to press the paper.

Then, the staple is pushed out from the stapler side and bent at the clincher side.

B. Staple control(1) Stapling• After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the stapler motor per-


• The stapling operation is completed when the stapler home sensor in the stapler detects

the home position and turn ON.

(2) Clogged staple detection• The main body determines that staples have been jammed, if the stapler home sensor is

not activated within a predetermined period of time after it has been deactivated during a

stapling operation. The stapler motor is then rotated backward to bring the stapler back

to its home position.

(3) Staple detection and cartridge detection• When the staples run out, or if there is no cartridge loaded in position, the staple empty

switch turns ON and the main body displays a corresponding staple empty message on

the control panel.

A0HRT2C023DB

Paper

Stapler (clincher side)

Stapler (stapler side)Stapler motor (M18)

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


P K - 5 1 7

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

PK-517


2. UNIT CONFIGURATION ......................................................................................... 2

3. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................3


5. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 5

5.1 Skew correction mechanism................................................................................. 5

5.2 Punch mechanism................................................................................................ 6

5.3 Punch status detection .........................................................................................7

5.4 Punch trash box full detection mechanism ........................................................... 8

8/21/2019 652 Service


P K - 5 1 7

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



1

O U T L I N E

P K - 5 1 7

OUTLINE


A. Type

B. Functions

C. Paper type




Name Punch kit

Type FS-integrated type punching operation device

Punching method Stops and punches every paper

No. of holes 2-3 holes / 4 holes / Sweden 4 holes

Hole diameter/pitch


4 holes / φ 6.5 mm / 80 mm pitch

Sweden 4 holes / φ 6.5 mm / 70 mm, 21 mm pitch

Supported mode Punch mode

Applicable post processingmode

Sort, group, staple

Size

2 hole punch setting:

11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 14, 8-1 / 2 x 11/8-1 / 2 x 11S

3 hole punch setting:

11 x 17, 8-1 / 2 x 11

4 hole punch setting:A3, B4, A4, B5

Sweden 4 hole punch setting:

A3, B4, A4/A4S, B5

Supported paperPlain paper, bond paper, thick paper 1/1+/2/3

(Main unit specifications prioritized)

Weight60 to 256 g/m2

16 to 68 lb

Punch prohibited paper

Label paper, tab paper, transparency film, 2nd base paper, holed paper,

and the other paper that may interfere with the operation of the punch kit

or the punch blade




8/21/2019 652 Service


2. UNIT CONFIGURATION Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

2

O U T L I N E

P K - 5 1 7

2. UNIT CONFIGURATION

A10ET1C001DB

Punch section

Punch scraps box section

8/21/2019 652 Service



3

O U T L I N E

P K - 5 1 7

3. PAPER PATH

A10ET1C002DB

Punch scraps box

Punch kit

Paper path fromthe main body

8/21/2019 652 Service



4

O U T L I N E

P K - 5 1 7

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



5


O P E R A T I O N

P K - 5 1 7


4. CONFIGURATION

5. OPERATION

5.1 Skew correction mechanism

• For punch operation, a loop is formed in the paper at the conveyance roller to correct

skew.

• The paper passage sensor/1 detects the leading edge of the paper and the conveyance

roller forms a loop in the paper.• The paper passage motor/1 is then energized after a given period of time after the paper

passage sensor/1 is activated by the leading edge of the paper, this causes the convey-

ance roller to start turning.

A10ET2C001DA

4512T2C002DA

Conveyance roller

Paper passage sensor/1(PS1)

8/21/2019 652 Service



6

P K - 5 1 7

O P E R A T I O N

5.2 Punch mechanism

• The paper passage sensor/1 will detect the trailing edge of the paper and stop feeding

the paper after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

• The drive cam will be rotated by the punch motor/1(2) to move the slide cam back and

forth. The slide cam will move the puncher down to make the punch hole at the back

edge of the paper. (The punch hole will be made sheet by sheet.)

A10ET2C004DA

Puncher

A10ET2C002DA

Paper passagesensor/1 (PS1)

Puncher

Punch motor/1 (M100)Punch motor/2 (M101)

Slide cam

Paper feed direction

Slide cam

Punch motor/1 (M100)Punch motor/2 (M101)

8/21/2019 652 Service



7


O P E R A T I O N

P K - 5 1 7

5.3 Punch status detection

• The punch status is detected by the punch cam position sensor, punch home sensor/1,

and the punch pulse sensor/1.

A10ET2C003DA

Punch cam position sensor (PS200)

Punch pulse sensor/1 (PS300)Punch pulse sensor/2 (PS301)

Punch home sensor/1 (PS100)

Punch home sensor/2 (PS101)

8/21/2019 652 Service



8

P K - 5 1 7

O P E R A T I O N

5.4 Punch trash box full detection mechanism

• The punch trash box is provided with the punch hole full sensor. When a punch waste is

detected, the corresponding message is displayed on the control panel.

• The punch hole full sensor is a reflector type sensor that detects height of the punch

trash.

• Punch hole full sensor also detects whether or not the punch trash box is mounted.

“Punch dust full” message will be displayed on the control panel when the punch trashbox is not mounted.

A10ET2C005DA

Punch hole full sensor (PS30)

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


S D - 5 0 9

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

SD-509


2. PAPER FEED PATH ................................................................................................ 2


4. ALIGNMENT SECTION .......................................................................................... 4

4.1 Drive ..................................................................................................................... 4

4.2 Operation..............................................................................................................5

4.2.1 Alignment ...................................................................................................... 5

4.2.2 Stopper ......................................................................................................... 7

5. STAPLER ................................................................................................................ 9

5.1 Drive ..................................................................................................................... 9

5.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 10

5.2.1 Stapling ....................................................................................................... 10

6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING .......................................................................... 11

6.1 Drive ................................................................................................................... 116.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 12

6.2.1 Folding plate................................................................................................ 12

6.2.2 Folding conveyance .................................................................................... 13

7. EXIT SECTION ..................................................................................................... 15

7.1 Configuration ...................................................................................................... 15

7.2 Operation............................................................................................................ 16

7.2.1 Exit .............................................................................................................. 16

8/21/2019 652 Service


S D - 5 0 9

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



1

O U T L I N E

S D - 5 0 9

OUTLINE


A. Type

B. Paper(1) Saddle stitching

(2) Folding



E. Consumables• Staples 5000 (SK-602: Staple kit)


Name Saddle sticher

Type Built into the finisher

Installation Screwed to the finisher


Stapling function Center parallel two points

Type Plain paper, Thick paper 1, Thick paper 2

Size

A3, B4, A4S, A3 Wide

Min: 210 mm x 279.4 mm, 8.27 inch X 11 inch

Max: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 inch X 18 inch

Max. saddle stitching capacity

15 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)

14 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)

+ 1 sheet (60 g/m2 to 209 g/m2 , 16 to 55.5 lb)

Type Plain paper

Size

A3, B4, A4S, A3 Wide

Min: 210 mm x 279.4 mm, 8.27 inch X 11 inchMax: 311.15 mm x 457.2 mm, 12.25 inch X 18 inch

Max. number of sheets folded together 3 sheets (60 g/m2 to 90 g/m2 , 16 to 24 lb)




8/21/2019 652 Service



2

O U T L I N E

S D - 5 0 9

2. PAPER FEED PATH

A10DT1C001DB

8/21/2019 652 Service



3


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 9


3. CONFIGURATION

A10DT2C001DA

Exit section

Alignment section

Stapler

8/21/2019 652 Service



4

S D - 5 0 9

O P E R A T I O N


4.1 Drive

A10DT2C002DB



Alignment plate/FAlignment plate/R

Leading edge stopperLeading edge stopper motor (M20) Leading edgestopper

8/21/2019 652 Service



5


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 9

4.2 Operation

4.2.1 Alignment

• In the folding/saddle stitching mode, the center staple alignment motor/F and /R aligns

paper.

• The center staple alignment motor rotates in the forward/reverse direction to move the

alignment plates, thereby aligning paper in the main scanning direction.

• The leading edge stopper motor is rotated to raise the leading edge stopper up to a posi-tion of the paper to be stored, thereby aligning paper in the sub-scanning direction.

A. Alignment operation• The center staple alignment motor/F and /R rotate to open/close the alignment plates via

the alignment belts.• The center staple alignment home sensor/F and /R detect the home position of the align-

ment plates.

• The leading edge stopper motor rotates to move the leading edge stopper in the vertical

direction via the belt.

A10DT2C003DB


Center staple alignment motor/R (M23)

Alignment plate/F

Alignment plate/R



Center staple alignmenthome sensor/F (PS42)

Center staple alignmenthome sensor/R (PS41)

Paddle

Upper paddle motor (M21)

8/21/2019 652 Service



6

S D - 5 0 9

O P E R A T I O N

B. Alignment control• When the first sheet of paper undergoes a switchback operation, the center staple align-

ment motor/F and /R start rotating to bring the alignment plates closer to each other and

then bring them to a stop at the standby positions at which they are apart from each at a

distance slightly wider than the paper width.

• The center staple alignment motor/F and /R perform the alignment operation by rotating

in the forward and reverse direction to move the alignment plate back and forth after a

specified period of time since the saddle path sensor detects the trailing edge of thepaper.

• The paper alignment operation in the main scanning direction is performed each time a

sheet of paper is fed in.

C. Paddle control• After the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the saddle path sensor has

detected the leading edge of the paper, the upper paddle motor is rotated to align the

paper in the sub-scanning direction.

• The paddles are rotated each time a sheet of paper is fed in.

8/21/2019 652 Service



7


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 9

4.2.2 Stopper

• At the leading edge stopper, papers in sub scanning direction are aligned, and papers

conveyed to the aligning section are conveyed to the specified position.

• The leading edge grip holds the paper when moving it to a specified position, or when

stapling or folding it.

A. Stopper operation• The leading edge stopper motor moves the leading edge stopper up and down in accor-

dance with the paper size. The leading edge stopper home sensor detects the home

position.

A10DT2C004DA


Leading edge grip


Leading edge stopper home sensor (PS45)

Leading edge grip

Leading edge grip solenoid (SD3)

8/21/2019 652 Service



8

S D - 5 0 9

O P E R A T I O N

B. Stopper control(1) Folding mode• After the last sheet of paper was aligned, the leading edge grip solenoid is turned ON

and the sheets of paper are held in place.


leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the folding position.

(2) Saddle stitching mode• After the last sheet of paper was aligned, the leading edge grip solenoid is turned ON

and the sheets of paper are held in place.


leading edge stopper down and lower the sheets to the saddle stitching position.

• After stapling operation was completed, the center staple alignment motor/F and /R

opens the alignment plates and the leading edge stopper motor starts rotating to move

the leading edge stopper further down and lower the paper to the folding position.

8/21/2019 652 Service



9


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 9

5. STAPLER

5.1 Drive

A10DT2C005DA

Staple motor

Drive gear

8/21/2019 652 Service



10

S D - 5 0 9

O P E R A T I O N

5.2 Operation

5.2.1 Stapling

• The stapling operation is performed by the staple motor.

A. Stapling operation• In the stapling operation, the staple motor in the stapler pushes out the paper press sec-

tion to the clincher by the drive gear to hold the paper and punch out the staple. Then,the staple is bent in the clincher.

B. Staple control(1) Stapling• After completing the alignment operation of the alignment plate, the staple motor per-


• The stapling operation is completed when the sensor in the stapler detects the home

position and turn ON.

(2) Clogged staple detection• During the stapling operation, it is determined that the staple has been clogged and the

staple motor rotates in the reverse direction to replace the stapler to the home position if

the sensor in the stapler does not turn ON after a specified period of time since it turn

OFF.

A10DT2C006DA

Stapler

Clincher Drive gear

Staple

Staple motor

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING

11


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 9

6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING

6.1 Drive

A10DT2C007DB

Folding rollerFolding plate

Center fold platemotor (M26)

Center fold rollermotor (M25)

8/21/2019 652 Service


6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

12

S D - 5 0 9

O P E R A T I O N

6.2 Operation

6.2.1 Folding plate

• The center fold plate motor drives the folding plate.

A. Folding plate operation• The center fold plate motor rotates the crank shaft a half turn via the gear and pushes the

paper to the nip section with the folding plate.• The folding rollers draw and fold the paper.

• The position of the leading edge stopper controls the folding position.

B. Folding plate control

• The center fold plate motor turns ON and sticks out the folding plate to the paper after aspecified period of time since the leading edge stopper stops at the folding position.

• The center fold plate motor stops when the folding plate reciprocates and the center fold

plate home sensor turns ON.

A11RT2C014DA

Fold plate

Paper

Folding roller


Center fold platehome sensor (PS47)

Crank shaft

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING

13


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 9

6.2.2 Folding conveyance

• The center fold roller motor drives the folding roller.

A10DT2C009DA

Folding roller

Center fold rollermotor (M25)

8/21/2019 652 Service


6. FOLDING/SADDLE STITCHING Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010

14

S D - 5 0 9

O P E R A T I O N

A. Folding conveyance control• The center fold plate motor turns ON after the leading edge stopper stops at the folding

position.

• When the center fold plate motor turns ON the center fold plate home sensor, the center

fold roller motor turns ON and folds the paper.

• The center fold roller motor stops after a specified period of time since the paper sensor/

2 detects the trailing edge of the paper bundle.

B. Folding roller control• Different folding roller controls are performed depending on the number of sheets of

paper and the size of the paper.

(1) The paper width is 215.9 mm or more and the number of sheets of paper is lessthan six

• When the center fold plate home sensor is deactivated after the center fold plate motor

has been energized, the center fold roller motor is energized to start rotating at low

speed.

• The folding roller is made to start rotating at high speed after the lapse of a predeter-

mined period of time after it has started rotating.

• When the paper sensor/2 detects the trailing edge of the paper stack, the leading edge

stopper motor is energized to raise the leading edge stopper to the alignment position

defined according to the paper size.

(2) Other than above• The center fold roller motor is energized to start rotating at low speed a predetermined

period of time before the paper stack reaches the center fold position.

• The center fold plate motor is energized and, after the lapse of a predetermined period of

time after the center fold plate home sensor has been deactivated, the folding roller is

made to start rotating at high speed.

• When the paper sensor/2 detects the trailing edge of the paper stack, the leading edge

stopper motor is energized to raise the leading edge stopper to the alignment position

defined according to the paper size.

A10DT2C010DA

Paper sensor/2 (PS44)

8/21/2019 652 Service


Theory of Operation Ver. 1.0 Dec. 2010 7. EXIT SECTION

15


O P E R A T I O N

S D - 5 0 9

7. EXIT SECTION

7.1 Configuration

A10DT2C008DA

Booklet tray near fullsensor (PS48)

Booklet tray fullsensor (PS50)

8/21/2019 652 Service



16

S D - 5 0 9

O P E R A T I O N

7.2 Operation

7.2.1 Exit

• The paper fed out by the center fold roller motor is stacked in the tray by its own weight.

A. Full-of-paper detection• The capacity of the tray varies depending on the number of sheets of paper in the paper

sets/stacks fed into the tray and detection of a full-of-paper condition cannot be madebased on the number of sheets of paper stacked in the tray.

The main body therefore counts the number of sheets of paper stacked and detects a

full-of-paper condition when a predetermined number of sheets of paper is reached.

If the booklet tray full sensor remains activated for a predetermined period of time, the

main body determines that paper can no longer be fed into the tray and that there is a

full-of-paper condition in the tray.

B. Full-of-paper detection conditions• The booklet tray full sensor is activated.

• The booklet tray near full sensor is activated when the power switch is turned ON.• The number of sets/stacks stacked in the tray reaches a predetermined value during

copying.

• A set/stack having a paper length different from that fed out earlier is fed out.

The main body does not determine that there is a full-of-paper condition in the tray under

any condition other than above.

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


J S -

6 0 3

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

JS-603


2. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................2


4. DRIVE ..................................................................................................................... 4

5. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 5

5.1 Conveyance/exit section ....................................................................................... 5

5.1.1 Paper conveyance......................................................................................... 5

5.1.2 Conveyance path switching........................................................................... 5

5.1.3 Full-of-paper detecting mechanism...............................................................6

5.1.4 Exit roller pressure/retraction ........................................................................ 7

8/21/2019 652 Service


J S - 6 0 3

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



1

O U T L I N E

J S - 6 0 3

OUTLINE


A. Type

B. Functions

C. Paper




Name Job separator

Type Fixed to the finisher

Document align-

mentCenter

Modes Sort, group

Size Type Capacity

A5S, B5S/B5, A4S/A4, B4, A3, A3 Wide

5-1 / 2 X 8-1 / 2S, 8-1 / 2 X 11S/8-1 / 2 X 11, 8-1 / 2 X

14, 11 X 17, 12-1 / 4 X 18

Max.: 311.15 mm X 457.2 mm

12.25 inch X 18 inch

Min.: 139.7 mm X 182 mm5.5 inch X 7.17 inch

Plain paper (60 to 90 g/m2)

(16 to 24 lb)100 sheets

Special

paper

Thick paper 1 (91 to 120 g/m2)

(24.25 to 32 lb)

10 sheets

Thick paper 1+ (121 to 157 g/m2)

(32.25 to 41.75 lb)


(42 to 55.5 lb)


(55.75 to 68 lb)Thick paper 4 (257 to 300 g/m2)

(68.25 to 80 lb)

OHP film

Label

Envelope

Power require-

ments

DC 24 V ± 10 % (supplied from the main body)

DC5 V ± 5 %

Dimensions165 mm (W) X 389 mm (D) X 63 mm (H)

6.5 inch (W) X 15.31 inch (D) X 2.48 inch (H)


8/21/2019 652 Service



2

O U T L I N E

J S - 6 0 3

2. PAPER PATH

A10FT1C001DA

8/21/2019 652 Service



3


O P E R A T I O N

J S -

6 0 3


3. CONFIGURATION

A10FT2C002DB

Conveyance/exit section

8/21/2019 652 Service



4

J S - 6 0 3

O P E R A T I O N

4. DRIVE

A10FT2C003DA

Tray3 exit roller retractionmotor (M17)

Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)

Tray3 full sensor (PS36)


8/21/2019 652 Service



5


O P E R A T I O N

J S -

6 0 3

5. OPERATION

5.1 Conveyance/exit section

5.1.1 Paper conveyance

• The paper passage motor/1 is energized a predetermined period of time after the paper

has activated the paper passage sensor/1.

• Drive of the paper passage motor/1 rotates the exit roller, so that paper is conveyed intothe tray.

5.1.2 Conveyance path switching• The horizontal conveyance section of FS-527 is provided with a conveyance path switch-

ing mechanism for conveying paper onto JS-603. For details of the mechanism, see the

horizontal conveyance section of FS-527.

A10FT2C004DB

Exit roller


8/21/2019 652 Service



6

J S - 6 0 3

O P E R A T I O N

5.1.3 Full-of-paper detecting mechanism

• The tray3 full sensor is located at the exit of the tray, detecting a full-of-paper condition of

the tray.

• The actuator is operated each time paper is fed into the tray. When the level of paper fed

into the tray reaches a predetermined value (capacity), the sensor is blocked and the

main body determines that the tray is full of paper.

• The number of sheets of paper that is detected as a full-of-paper condition is 100 sheets

in terms of plain paper.

• The number of sheets of paper detected as a full-of-paper condition, however, varies

depending on the environmental conditions and the amount of curl in paper.

A10FT2C005DA

Actuator

Tray3 full sensor (PS36)

8/21/2019 652 Service



7


O P E R A T I O N

J S -

6 0 3

5.1.4 Exit roller pressure/retraction

• The tray is provided with an exit roller pressure/retraction mechanism that allows paper

to be temporarily fed into the tray when a 2-sided print cycle is commanded.

• When a pressure/retraction command is received, the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is

energized. Then, the lifting cam is rotated a half turn, which causes the lifting lever to

swing up and down, so that the exit roller is pressed and retracted.

A10FT2C006DA

Tray3 exit roller retraction motor (M17)

Lifting cam

Tray3 exit roller retractionsensor (PS35)

Lifting lever

Exit roller

A10FT2C007DB

RetractionPressure

Exit roller

Lifting cam

Lifting lever

8/21/2019 652 Service



8

J S - 6 0 3

O P E R A T I O N

A. Exit roller pressure/retraction overview• The exit roller is in its retracted condition during a normal print cycle. It is pressed when

paper exit into tray3 during a 2-sided print cycle.

• When the main body is turned or retracted from the sleep mode, or the front door open/

close, the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is energized to bring the exit roller into its

retracted condition, which is done to determine the condition of the exit roller.

B. Exit roller pressure/retraction operation• When the tray3 exit roller retraction motor is energized, the lifting cam is rotated a half

turn. The lifting lever is then raised and lowered to complete a pressure/retraction opera-

tion.

• Whether the tray3 exit roller retraction sensor is blocked or unblocked determines thecondition of the exit roller, either pressed or retracted.

• When the tray3 exit roller retraction sensor is blocked and unblocked, the tray3 exit roller

retraction motor is deenergized to stop the operation.

Roller pressure/retraction conditionNormal printing Retracted

2-sided printing (except for small size paper)

Retracted → pressed → retractedThe main body is turned ON or retracted from the sleep mode,

or the front door is opened/closed

Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor

Pressed Blocked

Retracted Unblocked

A10FT2C008DA

Lifting lever

Lifting camExit roller Tray3 exit roller retractionmotor (M17)

Tray3 exit roller retraction sensor (PS35)

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service


A U - 1 0 1 / 1 0 2 / 2 0 1

O T - 5 0 3

O U T L I N E


O P E R A T I O N


i

CONTENTS

AU-101/AU-102/AU-201/OT-503

AU-101/AU-1021. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 1

2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 1

AU-2011. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 2

2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 2

OT-5031. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 3

2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 3

8/21/2019 652 Service


O T - 5 0 3

O U T L I N E

O P E R A T I O N


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



1

A U - 1 0 1 / 1 0 2 / 2 0 1

O T - 5 0 3


O P E R A T I O N

AU-101/AU-102

1. CONFIGURATION

2. OPERATION

• A finger vein pattern is used for personal identification.

• Vein patterns are inside the body and cannot be visually recognized. This makes vein

patterns extremely difficult to forge or falsify. The vein pattern authentication system canprovide high security.

• With ultra-red LED radiation, a finger vein pattern is captured by camera and its image is

created. The vein pattern image is registered and a person can be identified if the per-

son’s vein pattern matches the registered one at the time of user authentication.

A00JT2C256AA

Ultra-red LED

Vein image

Camera

Finger

VeinAuthentication unit (AU-101)

A0P0T2C581AA

Finger

Authentication unit (AU-102)

8/21/2019 652 Service



2

O T - 5 0 3

O P E R A T I O N

AU-201

1. CONFIGURATION

2. OPERATION

• A non-contact IC card, such as an employee ID card, is used for personal identification.

• The system supports the communications protocol in compliance with Type A, Type B,

and Felica (Type C) of ISO14443.

• It can be used that the card corresponded to Felica, TypeA, SSFC (Shared Security For-

mats Cooperation), FCF (Felica common-use format), or FCF campus.

• Simply placing the IC card on the authentication unit will let the unit read the data from

the card.

ABCDE_Co.

Abcde Fgdhi

A00HT2C302AA

Non-contact IC card

Authentication unit (AU-201)

8/21/2019 652 Service



3

A U - 1 0 1 / 1 0 2 / 2 0 1

O T - 5 0 3


O P E R A T I O N

OT-503

1. CONFIGURATION

2. OPERATION

• Output Tray OT-503 is comprised a fan unit and a paper exit tray.

• In order to avoid toner adhesion to other things, three tucking fan motors installed in the

fan unit send outside air to an ejected paper for cool it down.

A092T2C501AA

Fan unit

Paper exit tray

8/21/2019 652 Service



4

O T - 5 0 3

O P E R A T I O N

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service



O P E R A T I O N

E K - 6 0 4 / 6 0 5 / S C - 5 0 7


i

CONTENTS

EK-604/605/SC-507

EK-6041. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 1

2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 1

EK-6051. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 2

2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 3

SC-5071. CONFIGURATION .................................................................................................. 4

2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 4

8/21/2019 652 Service


O P E R A T I O N

E K - 6 0 4 / 6 0 5 / S C - 5 0 7


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



1


O P E R A T I O N

E K - 6 0 4 / 6 0 5 / S C - 5 0 7EK-604

1. CONFIGURATION

2. OPERATION

• The document can be printed directly from, or saved in, the USB memory.

• Connecting the USB keyboard (dealer option: overseas market only) will permit keyboard

input.

A0YCT2C502AA

Local Interface Kit EK-604

USB terminal (extension) USB terminal (standard)

8/21/2019 652 Service



2

E K - 6 0 4 / 6 0 5 / S C - 5 0 7

O P E R A T I O N

EK-605

1. CONFIGURATION

A0YCT2C504AA


USB terminal (extension) USB terminal (standard)

8/21/2019 652 Service



3


O P E R A T I O N

E K - 6 0 4 / 6 0 5 / S C - 5 0 72. OPERATION

• The document can be printed directly from, or saved in, the USB memory.

• Connecting the USB keyboard (dealer option: overseas market only) will permit keyboard

input.

• The local interface kit is mounted when the voice guidance function and functions inter-

acting with the portable phone or PDA (portable data terminal) compatible with Bluetooth

are to be used. It has a built-in speaker and Bluetooth communication receiver.• Using Bluetooth, the user can print files directly from the portable phone, download and

print PDF or other files from the portable phone, or save them in a box.

• If an XHTML file is downloaded from the portable phone, an image file can be down-

loaded from the URL described in XHTML and printed as an image onto a location spec-

ified in the XHTML document.

A0YCT2C503AAPortable phone, PDA


8/21/2019 652 Service



4

E K - 6 0 4 / 6 0 5 / S C - 5 0 7

O P E R A T I O N

SC-507

1. CONFIGURATION

2. OPERATION

• The security kit offers the copy guard (copy prohibited) and password copy functions in

addition to the conventional copy protect function. The copy guard security pattern or

password copy security pattern printed on the original is detected to thereby prevent

unauthorized copies from being produced.

* The copy guard security pattern and password copy security pattern can be detected

only by the Konica Minolta machine mounted with the copy guard and password copy

functions.

A0Y9T2C501AA

Security Kit SC-507

A0Y9T2C504AA

Making a copy from anoutput produced by add-ing the copy guard secu-rity pattern or passwordcopy security pattern.

Detecting the copyguard security pat-tern to discard the

job.

CopyPrint

Copying enabled throughpassword input.

8/21/2019 652 Service


SERVICE MANUAL

2010.12

Ver. 1.0

THEORY OF OPERATION

8/21/2019 652 Service







Revision mark:




corresponding page.







1

1

1

1



8/21/2019 652 Service



O P E R A T I O N

S A - 5 0 2


i

CONTENTS

SA-502


2. OPERATION ........................................................................................................... 1

8/21/2019 652 Service


O P E R A T I O N

S A - 5 0 2


ii

Blank Page

8/21/2019 652 Service



1


O P E R A T I O N

S A - 5 0 2


1. CONFIGURATION

2. OPERATION

• By mounting the scan accelerator kit, the image can be processed at high speed during

scan transmission, thus improving performance in scan functions.

• The scan accelerator kit is mounted at the FAX line 2, which disables addition of the FAX

line 2.

A0P0T2C622AAScan accelerator kit SA-502

8/21/2019 652 Service



S A - 5 0 2

N

Documents

652 Service